JP2020036955A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately performing a display performance.SOLUTION: A memory module 133 stores moving image data for textures and image data of a dome-shaped object. A VDP 135 retrieves the image data of the dome-shaped object and pastes a texture using the moving image data for textures on the image data of the dome-shaped object on the basis of a drawing instruction from a display CPU 131. A game machine generates drawing data by projecting a portion of the image data of the dome-shaped object, on which the texture is pasted, on a projection plane and performs a display using the drawing data.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

JP 2007-7465 A

  Here, a display effect of a series of display contents is performed by deriving a series of image data corresponding to the continuous update timing and displaying an image using the image data according to the continuous update timing. I have. By starting the display in the middle of this series of display contents, that is, by starting the display from the image using the image data corresponding to the update timing in the middle of the update timing, the display effects are diversified, It is considered that the degree of attention can be increased.

  However, even if the display is started in the middle of a series of display contents, if it is necessary to derive the image data corresponding to the previous timing in order to derive the image data corresponding to the update timing of the start, There is a possibility that the data cannot be derived at an appropriate timing and the display effect cannot be satisfactorily performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing a display effect.

The present invention
Display means having a display screen in which a number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
By setting the image data in the setting storage unit having a large number of unit setting areas to create drawing data in the setting storage unit, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display unit. Display control means for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen in the image for one frame;
Regarding the data of the unit setting area where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping portion of the rear individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image. Duplication reflection means for ensuring that
It is characterized by having.

  It is possible to perform a display effect satisfactorily.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning / non-prize drawing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a memory module. 9 is a flowchart illustrating data transfer processing executed by the controller. 6 is a timing chart showing a state of data transfer. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an initial setting process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by the display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by the VDP. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which drawing data is created in association with execution of a drawing process. 9 is a flowchart showing hidden surface processing using a Z buffer executed in VDP. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a calculation process for a mask executed by the display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 1st mask display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 2nd mask display. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a calculation process for a mask executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an operation generation command corresponding process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a display mode background executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a background setting process performed by the VDP. 9 is a flowchart illustrating background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP. 9 is a timing chart showing the timing at which separate saved data for the first display mode and separate saved data for the second display mode are created. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for describing a data configuration of moving image data for texture. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by moving image data. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a panorama display effect executed by the display CPU. 9A is a flowchart illustrating a camera parameter calculation process executed by the display CPU, and FIG. 9B is a flowchart illustrating a moving image texture setting process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a decoding process performed by a video decoder. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a moving image texture mapping process performed by the VDP. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which drawing data is created in association with execution of a drawing process. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a connected object executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a connected object effect performed by the VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection object effect. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a memory module. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process performed by the VDP. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a range of a virtual two-dimensional plane to be calculated by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by the display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode that each individual image becomes a control object. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining scroll background data. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect caused by setting an overlapping area. 9 is a flowchart showing a scroll background calculation process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process of divided part data executed by the VDP. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining small unit group background data. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a displacement background executed by the display CPU. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition process of an effect image. 9 is a flowchart showing a first effect effect calculation process executed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a first effect effect executed by the VDP. FIG. 4A is a flowchart illustrating a first effect addition process, and FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state of the first effect addition process. 5A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration for performing partial addition, and FIG. 5B is a flowchart illustrating a second effect effect calculation process executed by a display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a second effect effect performed by the VDP. FIG. 7A is a flowchart illustrating a second effect addition process, and FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state of the second effect addition process. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for producing a plurality of effects performed by the display CPU. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing a setting process for a plurality of effect effects performed by the VDP, and FIG. 6B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combined data area. (A)-(g) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (alpha) data. 9 is a flowchart showing a symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process of symbol sprite data executed by the VDP, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which a symbol is partially displayed. (A)-(h) The explanatory view for demonstrating 1st different form. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a second modification, and (b) is a flowchart showing symbol sprite data setting processing executed by the VDP. 9A is a flowchart illustrating a character transition process executed by the VDP, and FIGS. 7B to 7F are explanatory diagrams illustrating how character transition display is performed. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the wipe switching effect. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a wipe switching effect executed by the display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing list created when a wipe switching effect is performed. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting process for a wipe switching effect performed by the VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the wipe switching effect. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining a sprite for smooth movement, (b), (c) Explanatory diagram for explaining sprite data for displaying a sprite for smooth movement. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for smooth movement executed by the display CPU. 9A is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for smooth movement performed by the VDP, and FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the setting process for smooth movement is performed. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the resolution adjustment by a scaler. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a zoom-in effect performed by the display CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process for a zoom-in effect performed by the VDP. 9 is a flowchart showing output processing executed by the display circuit. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of a zoom-in effect. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of moving image data. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by moving image data. 9 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a moving image executed by the display CPU. 5A is a flowchart illustrating a decoding process performed by a moving image decoder, and FIG. 5B is a flowchart illustrating a moving image setting process performed by a VDP. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a third embodiment. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a background calculation process performed by a display CPU according to the fourth embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a type of gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 rotatably mounted forward with respect to the outer frame 11. . The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as a support side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a supporting side. A back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right sides being a support side.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at the tip end of its rotation, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-back direction are formed in the game board 20. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating opening 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, a display unit 34 for accessory, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper working opening 23, and the lower working opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20, Payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is executed based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports and the like are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Some embodiments are not included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish game balls from entering the out port 27, game balls enter the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24, or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as winning.

  The upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are unitized as working port devices and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are open upward. The two working ports 23 and 24 are arranged in a vertical direction such that the upper working port 23 faces upward. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot enter the lower operation port 24, and the electric operation object 24a is in the open state (support state or guide state) so that the lower operation port is opened. 24 can be awarded.

  The variable winning device 22 has a large winning opening 22a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 20, and also has an opening / closing door 22b for opening and closing the large winning opening 22a. The opening / closing door 22b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win or hard to win, and when an internal lottery is selected to shift to an open / close execution mode (open / close execution state), a predetermined game ball is likely to win. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a big hit is won. The open / close execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable prize device 22, the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes is one round, and the variable prize device 22 is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is a mode that is performed.

  The main display section 33 and the accessory display section 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display section 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of the internal lottery performed based on this is clearly indicated by the display. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning in the upper operating port 23 and the winning in the lower operating port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is performed. The result of the drawn internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After the display and the fluctuation display are stopped, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  In addition, the main display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, Other types of display devices such as a CRT and a dot matrix may be used. Further, as the pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types are displayed. A configuration in which different colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 34, the pattern change display is performed with the winning in the through gate 25 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 25 is displayed. Specified by indication. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a fluctuating manner. Is stopped, the state shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric-power-opened state, the electric-powered accessory 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 for variably displaying (or variably or switching) a symbol which is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 surrounding the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game balls are prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and there is no inconvenience such that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the game balls falling. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, the variable display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 in accordance with the variable display. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a big hit, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a symbol of a predetermined combination on a preset pay line.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), the pattern, which is a kind of pattern, is composed of nine types of main patterns, each of which has a numeral “1” to “9”, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, a main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as an octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the big hit moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal big hit result or the 15R certainty big hit result described later.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R certainty-variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbols are used. The combination is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”, and when a jackpot result usually occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. You.

  In addition, when the result of the explicit 2R probability change jackpot described later is obtained, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined combination of symbols different from the same combination of symbols is formed. An explicit movie is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

  Further, based on the winning of one of the operating ports 23, 24, the variable display is started on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. This corresponds to one game time.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32, a first reserved light emitting section (first reserved lamp section) 35 corresponding to the main display section 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The number of game balls that have won the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of the retained balls is displayed by turning on the first reserved light emitting unit 35.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second reserved light-emitting unit (second reserved lamp unit) 36 corresponding to the accessory display unit 34 is provided. The number of times that the game balls have passed through the through gate 25 is held up to four times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding light emitting unit 36. Note that the function of each of the reserved light emitting units 35 and 36 may be performed by display in a partial area of the symbol display device 31.

  A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20. The rail portion 37 forms a guide rail, and is fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism performs a launch operation of the game ball by operating a firing handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is formed of glass and is transparent and colorless, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless.

  A light emitting unit is provided around the window 42. A display light emitting section 44 is provided above the window section 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, on both left and right sides of the display light emitting section 44, speaker sections 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to a game state are provided.

  Below the window portion 42 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In a region facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the upper bulging portion 46, a rendering operation device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by a player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by a player to make the effect content on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 or the like a predetermined effect content.

  On the rear side of the inner frame, a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. In addition, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that performs main control of the game. In the main control device 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control substrate 51 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of the opening. It may be. Examples of the trace means include a structure of a connecting portion (caulking portion) that inseparably couples a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box and requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of the separation, and a method of peeling off the adhesive layer so that the adhesive layer is adhered. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left over is attached across a boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is considered.

  The main control board 51 has an MPU 52 mounted thereon. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A certain RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

  As the ROM 53, a storage unit (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that can be randomly accessed when reading out a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage and storage is used. Specifically, a NOR cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be configured as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as a structure mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. The power supply and the launch control device 57 are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and the launch control device 57 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 51 and supplies the generated operating power. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and a display control device 130 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on a power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply and the launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 so that the MPU 52 executes processing for a power failure. It is possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, there are detection sensors provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to a winning corresponding ball portion such as a general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating opening 24, and a through gate 25. The MPU 52 performs a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry unit. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winning in the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24, and executes a reach generation lottery of each game time and a determination lottery for a display continuation period.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses the various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display on the main display unit 33, set the symbol display on the symbol display device 31, set the display on the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability change jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a symbol The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the display device 31 comes off and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuations in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 A variation type counter CS for determining the display time is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is to be in the electric opening state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. In the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning operation occurs in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

  The reserved ball storage area 54b includes a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 include a first holding area RE1 → a second holding area when a winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 occurs continuously plural times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold. Further, the holding area RE includes a number-of-holds storage area NA. The number-of-holds storage area NA specifies the number of the winning histories to be stored in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. Is stored.

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but may be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 33. Based on various types of numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made.

  Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

  More specifically, each of the counters is configured such that the jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table (hit / hit information group) in a hit / hit table storage area in the ROM 53 as hit / hit information group storage means. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for a low probability mode (a success / failure information group for low probability) and a success / failure table for a high probability mode (a success / failure information group for high probability) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as lottery modes in the winning / rejecting lottery means.

  Under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of the random numbers for the jackpot winning is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode is referred to at the time of the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is 20. If the winning probability is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode of the winning / rejecting lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference between the three conditions, that is, the support mode of the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24.

  The opening / closing control of the variable prize device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode is performed in such a manner that the frequency of winning in the variable prize device 22 during the period from the start of the opening / closing execution mode to the end thereof is relatively high or low. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed 15 times (the number of times of high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed for 30 seconds (high frequency time). ) Elapses or until the winning number in the special winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high-frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed twice (the number of times of low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed for 0.2 seconds (low frequency time). Is continued or until the winning number in the large winning opening 22a becomes 6 (low-frequency number).

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is driven and controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. . On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low frequency prize mode, the prize of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of times the large winning opening 22a is opened and closed in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time limit (or opening time limit) for one opening, and the opening number for one opening time are determined in the high frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning in the variable winning device 22 during the period from the start of the opening / closing execution mode to the end thereof is higher than that in the low frequency winning mode. Optional. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 22 occurs. It is good to have composition. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, for one opening, the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the opening number is set to be shorter than the opening time limit, while in the low frequency winning mode, the product is The product of the launch cycle of the game balls and the limited number of openings may be set to be longer than the limited opening time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the winning in the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur.

  As the support mode of the motorized accessory 24a of the lower working port 24, the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is compared with a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. The low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high and low. Is set.

  More specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric-power-opening state in the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery using the electric-powered-object opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is opened when the electrification is released is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the electric accessory 24a is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured than the low-frequency support mode as a minimum time to be secured after one electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning will occur in the lower operation port 24 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will occur in the upper working port 23 than in the lower working port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning to the lower working port 24 is higher than in the upper working port 23. The probability of winning is increased. When a prize is generated in the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls so much. be able to.

  In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric utility opening state per unit time in the high frequency support mode compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of electrification open state winning high in. Further, a securing time secured after one electric-power-operated-object opening lottery is performed and then the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is performed (for example, the special-effects display portion 34 is displayed based on a prize in the through gate 25). In the configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time are executed, a setting is made such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or the average securing time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It may be. Further, increasing the number of times of opening and lengthening the opening time, shortening the securing time secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (ie, , One of the change display times on the accessory display unit 34), the average time of the securing time is shortened, and the winning probability is increased. This may increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. Then, as the distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (a special game result corresponding to a low probability), an explicit 2R probability-changing jackpot result (an explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result of a sudden probability change state), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot result (a high probability result) Corresponding special game result) is set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state (low-probability-compatible special game state).

  The explicit 2R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. . The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to a big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability-change jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability-variable jackpot state (specific high-probability-compatible gaming state).

  The 15R probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning / non-winning lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to a big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability-change jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the 15R probability-change jackpot state (high-probability-compatible special game state).

  The normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R sure-change jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability change jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability-change jackpot result is set as the probability-change jackpot result, the modes of the probability-change jackpot result are diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of the probability change jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability change jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode is the high frequency winning mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode is the highest, In the mode, the low frequency winning mode is set, but in the support mode, the explicit 2R certainty variable jackpot result in the high frequency support mode is the lowest. Thereby, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  As one type of the probability change jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. A non-explicit 2R probable change jackpot result (a non-explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result of a latent probable change state) may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variable jackpot result is achieved.

  Furthermore, as one type of the deviation result in the success / failure lottery, a special deviation result in which the transition to the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur after the transition to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode may be included. . In a configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result and the special outlier result are set as described above, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. In contrast to this, when the transition mode of the winning / rejecting lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the non-explicit 2R sure-change jackpot result or the special off result occurs in the normal game state, the Can actually be predicted by the player as to which result corresponds.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 31. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 31 capable of performing a variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and a variable display in a game time in which the opening and closing execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is a high-frequency winning mode. In a gaming machine in which a later stop display result is a special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 31 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, This is a display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to be a special display result.

  Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach display, and a preview display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display or the occurrence of a special display result before the reach display is generated.

  In the reach display, the combination of the big hit symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols in some of the symbol columns among the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A display state in which a combination of reach symbols that are likely to be established is displayed, and in that state, the remaining symbols are displayed in a variable pattern. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image or , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen.

  For the reach display related to the symbol variation display, specifically, as a pre-stage for terminating the symbol variation display, the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is set on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the reach symbol combination in which the combination of the corresponding jackpot symbols may be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the symbol is displayed by the final stop symbol column. Is to do.

  The display contents of FIG. 3 will be specifically described. In a state in which the variable display of the symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1 and the variable display of the symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3, any of the valid symbols is displayed. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers attached to the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach lines are formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. When the high frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line so that the main symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is ended.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variable display is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode for displaying a character separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background image may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, or the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than that when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game that shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game times in which the mode does not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Will be executed if On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 50 but by the audio light emission control device 60.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time (display duration) on the main display unit 33 and the symbol variation display time (display duration) on the symbol display device 31. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 33 and at the time of the symbol variation being started by the symbol display device 31. When determining the variable display time, a variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in a variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, be incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory open counter C4.

  The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a payout control device 55 and a power supply and a firing control device 57. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball entry section. The payout control device 55 controls the payout device 56 to pay out prize balls and loaned balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. The firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply and the firing control device 57 based on the fact that the firing handle 41 is operated. The power supply and launch control device 57 drives the game ball launching mechanism 58 based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50 to launch the game ball toward the game area.

  The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game time. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

  On the output side of the MPU 52, a variable winning drive unit for opening and closing the opening and closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric accessory driving unit for opening and closing the electric accessory 24a of the lower operating port 24 are connected. . That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 52 controls the driving of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. In addition, when the open state of the electric accessory 24a is won, the MPU 52 controls the driving of the electric accessory drive unit so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

  Further, an audio light emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and transmits various commands for effects to the audio light emission control device 60.

  Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be briefly described.

  The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress processing, the normal processing repeatedly executed in the first cycle and the normal processing which is started in the second cycle shorter than the first cycle are executed by interrupting the normal processing. And a timer interrupt process are set, but the specific processing configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

  As a part of the game progress process, a process of acquiring hold information, a process of controlling game times, a process of transitioning to a game state, and a process of displaying a demonstration are set. In the process of acquiring the hold information, in the situation where the hold upper limit number of hold information is not held in the hold ball storage area 54b and a winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is detected, the lottery is performed at that time. A process of storing a combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the counter buffer 54a as holding information in the holding ball storage area 54b is executed. You. Note that the holding information is stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in time series as described above.

  In the game time control process, the data shift process of the reserved ball storage area 54b is performed on the condition that the pending information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b while the game is not being executed or in the open / close execution mode. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. In addition, when the data shift process is executed, a win / fail lottery process, a type determination process, and a game start process are executed.

  In the winning / rejecting lottery process, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is won by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the winning / not-hitting table corresponding to the current winning / decreasing lottery mode. judge. If the winning is a big hit, a type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical information on the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table in the hold information shifted to the execution area AE.

  In the processing for starting the game, whether the reach is generated even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the numerical information on the reach random number counter C3 of the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and the reach table. Is determined. Further, in the process for starting the game round, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the occurrence of the reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the readout of the variable type counter CS at that timing are read. The fluctuation display time of the current game is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the process for starting the game round, the variation display of the picture corresponding to the determined variation display time is started on the main display unit 33, and the variation command including the information on the variation display time, the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, A type command including information on the jackpot type is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  By the way, since the variable display time is determined by reading the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of jackpot winning, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of reach, the command for variation includes information on whether or not reach has occurred. It can be said that. In addition, as described later, since the voice emission control device 60 determines the type of the reach display according to the variable display time, it can be said that the variable command includes information on the reach type.

  Further, in the game time control process, during the execution of the game time, the variable display process is executed, and when the variable display time determined in the change start process has elapsed, the game time is displayed on the main display unit 33. The variable display of the pattern is terminated in a state where the stop result corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning and the jackpot type is displayed. In addition, an end command for instructing the sound emission control device 60 to end the game round is transmitted.

  In the game state shift processing, when the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning has ended, the shift processing to the opening and closing execution mode is executed, and the opening and closing processing of the big winning opening 22a in the variable winning device 22 is started. When the opening / closing execution mode is started, during the opening / closing execution mode, and when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, various commands for the opening / closing execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. When the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the shift of the winning / rejection lottery mode and the shift of the support mode are executed in accordance with the jackpot type related to the game time that triggered the start of the mode.

  In the demo display process, a predetermined start time for demo start (for example, 0.1 sec) elapses without a new game time being started after the game time has ended in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is not being performed. A determination process is performed to determine whether or not the operation has been performed. In addition, after the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting a demonstration elapses without newly starting a game round. A determination process is performed to determine whether or not the operation has been performed. When it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  The demonstration display refers to a start waiting effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demonstration image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol performs a predetermined operation. After or instead of displaying the displayed image, a moving image using a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display is diversified.

<Sound emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  The sound light emission control device 60 includes a sound light emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted, as shown in FIG. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

  As the ROM 63, a storage unit (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that can be randomly accessed when reading out a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage and storage is used. Specifically, a NOR cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation part, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be configured as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as a structure mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The operation device 48 and the main controller 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, the speaker unit 45, and the display controller 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. I have.

  The MPU 62 receives the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, recognizes that it is necessary to start the game effect, and executes the game effect effect start process. In addition, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the game effect, and executes the game effect end process. Also, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start or advance the jackpot effect, and executes the jackpot effect process. Further, by receiving the command for demonstration display transmitted from main controller 50, it recognizes that demonstration display needs to be started, and executes the process for demonstration display.

  It should be noted that receiving a command from main controller 50 in MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which a command is directly received from main controller 50, but also includes a configuration in which a command relayed to a relay board is received.

  In the game effect production start process, based on both the change command and the type command, the process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) of the game game and the presence of reach display are grasped. The following processes are performed: a reach display grasping process, a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs. Further, based on the grasping results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, a symbol for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in this game time. Execute the type grasp process. Then, based on a result of each of the above grasping processes, a display pattern control command including a variable pattern command including information on a variable display time and information on a type of a display effect and a symbol designating command including information on a type of a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed are provided. Send to 130.

  In the game effect presentation start process, in addition to the above grasping processes, a preview display lottery process of whether or not to perform a preview display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, in the case of the winning of occurrence of the notice display, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In the game effect presentation start process, the display light emission table for the game and the audio table for the game are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of the above processes. The display mode light emitting table for the game round defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of the progress of the game round. Further, the output form from the speaker unit 45 in the course of the progress of the corresponding game time is defined by the audio table for the game time.

  In the game end effect processing, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game time are ended. Further, in the game rendition effect ending process, an end command including information to end the game rendition effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In the jackpot effect processing, based on the various commands for the jackpot effect received, the effect state such as opening, each round, between rounds and at the end time is grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped result is obtained. Is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasp result, the display light emission table for the jackpot effect and the audio table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. Is specified.

  In the demonstration display process, the demonstration mode of the demonstration display is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasp result, the display light emission table for the demonstration display and the audio table for the demonstration display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting section 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker section 45 during the demonstration display. Is specified.

  The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 includes, in addition to the above-described processing, processing for controlling the light emission of the first reserved light emitting unit 35 and the second reserved light emitting unit 36. included.

  In addition, the MPU 62 recognizes that the staging operation device 48 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the staging operation device 48 based on the operation of the operation unit of the staging operation device 48. Then, an operation corresponding process is executed. Also, when the operated state is released, the operation signal is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed.

  Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect is executed in which the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 is shifted to a different position on the two-dimensional plane. A plurality of positions, specifically, two positions are set as the shiftable positions. Correspondingly, the operation unit of the operation device 48 for production is provided as, for example, a cross key or an operation lever rotatable in a plurality of directions so that these plural positions can be individually designated. An operation signal corresponding to each operation is transmitted from the device 48. In the operation corresponding process, the operation mode is specified in accordance with the type of the operation signal, and information indicating that the effect operation device 48 has been operated and an operation generation command including information on the operation mode are transmitted to the display control device 130. In the operation corresponding process, when the operation of the operation unit is released, an operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 130. In addition, in the operation correspondence processing, in addition to the transmission of the command, the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the audio output mode from the speaker unit 45 are defined so as to correspond to the operation of the operation device 48 for production. .

<Display control device 130>
The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Is done. The reception of a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to a configuration in which a command is directly received from the sound emission control device 60, but also includes a structure in which a command relayed to a relay board is received. It is.

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. A transfer instruction to transfer is issued. The display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and issues a drawing instruction for displaying a 3D image on the symbol display device 31 based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

  The memory module 133 previously stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data, and also previously stores various image data (image information) for displaying a 3D image. It is storage means. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply for storage and storage. In detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is performed well. When the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM).

  The various types of image data stored in the memory module 133 include image data for an object such as a symbol or a character displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for a texture to be pasted on the object, and one frame worth of image data. And the image data for the back which constitutes the back image.

  Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system (world space), which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and includes three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. It is. A polygon is a polygon plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to image data for an object, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (ie, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object. When the texture is pasted on the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including a design or a character is generated. How to hold the image data for texture is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. I have.

  The rearmost image forms a two-dimensional image. The way of holding the image data for the back side is arbitrary, but for example, two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the back image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

  The work RAM 132 is a storage unit for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to a DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed well. The work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 131 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data. In detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM, or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 can be performed well. The VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 134 includes an expansion buffer 141. Image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. The VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135. The VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144, and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by processing the data based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 131 using data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141. This is a kind of drawing circuit for operating an image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. The VDP 135 is also called a “drawing chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated to drawing.

  In detail, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, a display circuit 155, and a video decoder 93. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the geometry calculation unit 151 places the object specified as the placement target in the world coordinate system. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is finally clipped corresponding to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display screen G.

  Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes a texture on each clipped object to determine the appearance of the object. Further, the rendering unit 152 projects each object on a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, performs various adjustments based on depth information, and renders one-frame drawing data as two-dimensional data in a frame buffer. 142. The drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  The moving image decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. The contents of the processing will be described later in detail.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by a drawing list, and a memory in which the control programs are stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are stored. The configuration may be such that the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 execute processing according to the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the configuration may be such that the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 execute processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using a program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b in the frame buffer 142, in a situation where drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. Then, creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the frame buffer 142 adopts the double buffer method.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 138. More specifically, drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by performing resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

  Further, when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. The predetermined processing will be described later.

<Specific configuration of the memory module 133>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 133 will be described.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of the memory module 133. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory module 133 is configured by integrating the controller 161 and the NAND flash memory 162 into one package.

  The NAND flash memory 162 is provided with a memory cell array. The memory cell array includes a control program area 163 in which control program data of the display CPU 131 is stored, and an image displayed on the symbol display device 31. An image data area 164 in which image data to be used is stored is provided.

  The image data area 164 includes an object storage area 165 storing object image data, a texture storage area 166 storing texture image data, and a back image storage area storing back image data. 167. The object storage area 165 is provided with a connected object storage area 165a that stores image data for a connected object. The connection object will be described later in detail.

  The controller 161 includes a main body I / F 171 for transmitting and receiving data to and from the display CPU 131 of the transfer instruction source and the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 of the data transfer destination, and a storage I / F 171 for transmitting and receiving data to and from the NAND flash memory 162. / F 172, a controller CPU 173, a control ROM 174 and a control RAM 175, which are a control unit for performing data control processing in the controller 161 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 162, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 173. A transfer execution circuit 176 for reading data from the memory 162; a cache memory 177 for temporarily storing data read by the transfer execution circuit 176; An error correction circuit 178 performs correction of the read error detection and the detected errors in the data from the 162, and a.

  In general, the NAND flash memory 162 is used to avoid a block including a defect even in a memory cell array even if the block includes a defect. The presence / absence and location of the bad block differ for each individual. Therefore, it is necessary to associate the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 162, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 173.

  More specifically, the control ROM 174 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates logical addresses with addresses of each page of a physical block. The address designation command received from the display CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the address designation buffer of the control RAM 175. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175, the controller CPU 173 reads the address management table from the control ROM 174, and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, a transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 173 to the transfer execution circuit 176, and the data is transferred in the transfer execution circuit 176 so that the data of the physical address according to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. The processing is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 177 is transferred to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134.

  Incidentally, a memory that can be randomly accessed, such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory, is used as the control ROM 174. The cache memory 177 has a read speed (transfer speed) faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared when reading data of the same capacity. Specifically, the semiconductor memory device includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data. More specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to a DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used.

  The memory module 133 is provided with a boot memory 179 in which boot data for initial startup in the display CPU 131 is stored in advance. As the boot memory 179, a mask ROM is used so that random access is possible, and the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared when reading data of the same capacity. Used. Note that the boot memory 179 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data reading speed is higher than that of the NAND flash memory 162. May be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit having

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 179 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same as, substantially the same as, or similar to the storage capacity of one page in the NAND flash memory 162. Boot data for initial startup is stored in the boot memory 179 in advance, and when processing at the time of initial startup is executed in the display CPU 131, the data is not read from the NAND flash memory 162 but from the boot memory 179. Is read. As the boot data for the initial startup, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 and an instruction code for transferring data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 to the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 are set.

  Here, the data transfer processing executed by the controller 161 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is started when an unprocessed address designation command is stored in the control RAM 175.

  First, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the current address designation relates to access to the boot memory 179. If the data is related to the access to the boot memory 179, the data transfer process is terminated after executing the process of transferring the boot data of the boot memory 179 to the display CPU 131 in step S102. Thereby, the display CPU 131 reads the boot data.

  On the other hand, if it is not related to the access to the boot memory 179 (step S101: NO), that is, if it is related to the access to the NAND flash memory 162, the process proceeds to step S103. Incidentally, although the details will be described later, the execution timing of the transfer instruction in this case is set at a timing before the timing at which the program data and image data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 are required by the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135. And transfer to the VRAM 134 is completed.

  In step S103, it is determined whether or not the address is a target address of the predicted transfer. The target address of the predicted transfer refers to a physical address corresponding to a logical address of one page following the logical address when a logical address of one page is specified by the display CPU 131.

  If the address is not the target address of the predicted transfer (step S103: NO), in step S104, the physical address corresponding to the logical address to be specified this time is grasped using the address management table. By this processing, even in the configuration using the NAND flash memory 162 in which a defective block is likely to occur at the time of data writing, it is possible to satisfactorily associate a physical address with a logical address.

  In the following step S105, the controller CPU 173 instructs the transfer execution circuit 176 to transfer the data stored at the grasped physical address from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. Thus, the transfer of the data to the cache memory 177 is started.

  In the following step S106, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the cache memory 177 has been completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, in step S107, a data transfer instruction related to the target address of the predicted transfer is executed. As a result, in the transfer execution circuit 176, the transfer of the data stored at the physical address corresponding to the logical address that is continuous with the logical address of the data that has just been transferred to the cache memory 177 is started.

  In this case, the cache memory 177 has a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing data for a plurality of pages, specifically, two pages. Then, when transferring the data related to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 177, the transfer execution circuit 176 transfers the data of the immediately preceding address which has been the trigger of the prediction and the data transferred to the cache memory 177. The data relating to the target address of the predicted transfer is transferred so as not to be erased, that is, to an area different from the area where the data is stored. As a result, the data being transferred from the cache memory 177 to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134 can be prevented from being erased when the data relating to the target address of the predicted transfer is transferred.

  In the subsequent step S108, a process is executed to transfer the data determined to have been transferred to the cache memory 177 in step S106 to the work RAM 132 or VRAM 134 which is set as the transfer destination. In this case, when transmitting the address designation command, the display CPU 131 transmits the information of the RAM of the data transfer destination and the information of the transfer destination address included in the address designation command or as another command. Therefore, in step S108, the data is transferred to the transfer destination address in the specified transfer destination RAM.

  Thereafter, in step S109, it is determined whether or not the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. If the data transfer to the transfer destination has been completed (step S109: YES), the data transfer process ends.

  If it is determined in step S103 that the current address designation relates to the target address of the predicted transfer, the process proceeds to step S106 without executing the processes of step S104 and step S105. Then, when the transfer of the data related to the address designation to the cache memory 177 is completed (step S106: YES), the processing of steps S107 to S109 is executed, and the data transfer processing ends.

  The state of data transfer will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 8A shows a state in which data is transferred from the boot memory 179, FIG. 8A shows a state of a read request from the display CPU 131, and FIG. This is the state of data transfer. FIG. 8B shows how data in the NAND flash memory 162 is transferred, FIG. 8C shows a read request from the display CPU 131, and FIG. FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer to the memory 177, and FIG. 8E shows a state of data transfer from the cache memory 177.

  First, a case where data is transferred from the boot memory 179 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131 at the timing of t1, and the controller CPU 173 recognizes the reception of the address designation command at the timing of t2.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the controller CPU 173 recognizes that the boot data in the boot memory 179 has been designated as a read target, and starts data transfer from the boot memory 179. In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 173 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 131 to when the data transfer is started is T1. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the data transfer is completed.

  Next, a case where data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, an address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131 at the timing of t5, and the controller CPU 173 recognizes the reception of the address designation command at the timing of t6.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the controller CPU 173 recognizes that the data of the NAND flash memory 162 is designated as the read target, and also grasps the physical address corresponding to the designated logical address. The page corresponding to the physical address is sequentially recognized in the transfer execution circuit 116, and the data transfer to the cache memory 177 is started. In this case, the recognition of the physical address corresponding to the logical address and the recognition not in the random access but in the sequential manner are performed, so that the period T2 from the timing t6 to the timing t7 is from the timing t2 to the timing t3. It is longer than the period T1.

  Thereafter, at time t8, the data transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, and the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination RAM is started. In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 173 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 131 to when the data transfer to the transfer destination RAM is started is T3, and the data transfer from the boot memory 179 is performed. It is longer than the period T1 required to start.

  Thereafter, at time t9 when data is being transferred to the RAM, transfer of data corresponding to the target address of the predicted transfer to the cache memory 177 is started. In this case, in the controller CPU 173, the physical address corresponding to the continuous logical address may be designated by the transfer execution circuit 176. Therefore, the address of the defective block may be interposed between the physical addresses corresponding to the continuous logical address. Even if it does, the continuity of the continuity is associated in advance, so that the time required for recognizing the physical address can be reduced as compared with the case where the physical address is recognized from the address designation command. Note that an image data group for executing a predetermined effect such as super reach display is stored over a plurality of physical blocks.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the destination RAM is completed. Then, a new address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 131. Incidentally, the NOR type flash memory is provided with an address terminal and a data input / output terminal separately, but the memory module 133 having the NAND type flash memory 162 has, as its specifications, an address terminal and a data input / output terminal. Are not provided separately. Therefore, after data transfer from the cache memory 177 is performed, the display CPU 131 transmits an address designation command.

  Thereafter, at time t11, the transfer of the data relating to the predicted transfer to the cache memory 177 is completed, and at time t12, the controller CPU 173 recognizes the reception of a new address designation command from the display CPU 131. Since the logical address specified by the address specification command corresponds to the logical address of the data to be predicted and transferred, the cache memory of the data to be predicted and transferred at the subsequent timing t13. From 177, transfer to the destination RAM is started.

  In this case, the period from when the controller CPU 173 recognizes the read request from the display CPU 131 to when the data transfer is started is T4. As described above, the transfer of the data related to the predicted transfer is started while the data is being transferred from the cache memory 177 to the RAM, and the start timing is before the read request from the display CPU 131 is performed. Timing. Therefore, the period T4 is shorter than the period T3 required until the data transfer is started when data is read from the NAND flash memory 162 without performing the predicted transfer. Incidentally, the period T4 is shorter than the period T1 required to start the data transfer from the boot memory 179, but is not limited to this, and may be longer than the period T1. Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the transfer of the data related to the predicted transfer is completed.

  In the case where the data transfer related to the predictive transfer is continuous, a transfer mode in which the period required until the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM is started in response to the read request from the display CPU 131 is T4. Will be continuous. On the other hand, when the logical address of the data related to the predicted transfer does not match the logical address related to the read request from the display CPU 131, the period required until the data transfer from the cache memory 177 to the RAM starts is T3. Data transfer is performed in the following manner.

  As described above, since the NAND flash memory 162 is used as the memory for storing the control program data and the image data in advance, it is possible to increase the capacity while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Can be. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 162, rewriting can be repeatedly performed in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be reduced. In addition, recycling becomes possible. In particular, since the control program data and the image data are not stored in separate memories but are stored in a single memory module 133, the transfer path to the display CPU 131 can be made compact. Can be.

  However, the data transfer speed of the NAND flash memory 162 is lower than that of the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 131 is started because the boot data for the initial startup is stored in the boot memory 179 in which the reading speed is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162 in advance. In the case or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 131 can promptly start the process for initial startup. Therefore, control in the display CPU 131 can be started smoothly compared to a configuration in which the program data for initial startup is stored in the NAND flash memory 162.

  In addition, data whose logical address is continuous with data specified as a transfer target from the display CPU 131 is set as data related to the predicted transfer, and one page of data is transferred from the cache memory 177 to the transfer destination RAM. Utilizing the period, data related to the predicted transfer is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177 in advance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for data transfer of a page having continuous logical addresses. The display CPU 131 reads out the program data transferred in advance to the work RAM 132 and executes the processing, and the VDP 135 reads out the image data transferred in advance to the VRAM 134 and executes the processing. Thus, the data transfer waiting time can be prevented from occurring, and each process can proceed smoothly.

  The NAND flash memory 162 and the boot memory 179 are packaged as a single memory module 133, and the controller CPU 173 manages reading data from the memories 163 and 179. Accordingly, the display CPU 131 may transmit an address designation command to the controller CPU 173 regardless of whether the data transfer is performed from the NAND flash memory 162 or the boot memory 179. This simplifies the configuration of the signal path for transmitting the command. In addition, since the locations where commands are received from the display CPU 131 in the memory module 133 are collected in the I / F 171, the configuration of the signal path can be simplified from this point as well.

  Incidentally, the NAND flash memory 162 needs to input a write command signal to the WE terminal when reading data, but the controller 161 pulls up an HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal to which a write command signal is externally input. Since the FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal of the controller 161 is connected to the WE terminal of the NAND flash memory 162, the input of a substantial write command signal from the outside of the controller 161 is disabled, and the NAND A pseudo write command signal is input to the type flash memory 162. Accordingly, unauthorized modification of the data in the NAND flash memory 162 is prevented while data can be read from the NAND flash memory 162 satisfactorily.

<Expansion buffer 141 of work RAM 132 and VRAM 134>
Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 133 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 132 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the work RAM 132 stores the power to itself while the situation in which the transferred data is likely to be used thereafter continues even after the data is once used. A normal area 132a for storing and holding data while the supply is continued, and a change area 132b to be overwritten when other data is transferred after use are provided.

  Program data necessary to advance main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, are written in the common area 132a. By providing the service area 132a, main processing, V interrupt processing, command interrupt processing, and the like, which are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals, can be started smoothly.

  If it is necessary to temporarily store data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 132b, all or a part of the data in the common area 132a is not hindered in the smooth execution of the processing by the display CPU 131. May be temporarily deleted. In this case, the data needs to be restored to the regular area 132a before the start of the corresponding process.

  In the change area 132b, program data necessary for executing a subroutine activated as necessary in each of the processes is written. The program data necessary for the next subroutine to be executed may be transferred to the change area 132b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed. This is done so as not to erase. By providing the change area 132b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 132 is smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  By the way, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, no backup power is supplied to the work RAM 132. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 132 up to that point is deleted or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

  The power supply to the expansion buffer 141 is continued while the transferred image data may be used once, even after the image data is once used. A normal area 141a that stores and holds the data while the image data is being used, and a change area 141b that is overwritten when another image data is transferred after use.

  The object area image data, the texture image data, and the back side image data used when the symbol display is started to be displayed on the symbol display device 31 are written in the regular area 141a. And abnormality notification data used when displaying an abnormality notification image when an abnormality is detected. Since the common area 141a is provided, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly issued from the display CPU 131, the VDP 135 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 141a. it can.

  If it is necessary to temporarily store image data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 141b, all or one of the common areas 141a is not hindered from displaying the image on the symbol display device 31 smoothly. A configuration may be adopted in which data of a copy is temporarily deleted. In this case, it is necessary that the image data be returned to the regular area 141a by the timing of drawing the corresponding image.

  In the change area 141b, object image data, texture image data, back image data, and the like are written. Further, image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 141b during the execution of the predetermined effect, but this transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect during the execution. Not to be done. By providing the change area 141b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the development buffer 141 is smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, no backup power is supplied to the VRAM 134. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data that has been stored and held in the VRAM 134 is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main process that is started when the supply of the operation power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

  In the main process, first, in step S201, an initial setting process is executed. In the initial setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, in step S301, a transfer request for boot data is made to the memory module 133. That is, the address indicating the boot memory 179 is written in the area first referenced in the address map of the display CPU 131, and the address designation command is transmitted to the memory module 133 based on the information.

  Thereafter, in step S302, it is determined whether the reading of the boot data has been completed, and the determination process is repeated until the reading is completed. When the reading of the boot data is completed, an initialization process is performed in step S303. As the initialization processing, the registers of the display CPU 131, the register 153 of the VDP 135, the work RAM 132, and the VRAM 134 are initialized.

  In the following step S304, a request is made to transfer the latter half of the data for the initial setting. In other words, the program data for initial setting is composed of data for initial startup constituting the first half thereof and data for the latter half continuous thereto, and the data for initial startup is set in the boot data. I have. Then, in the data for the initial startup, an instruction to read the latter half of the data is set. In this way, by storing only the data from the beginning to the middle of the initial setting program data in the boot memory 179 as the boot data in advance, the capacity of the data to be stored in the boot memory 179 can be suppressed. Accordingly, the storage capacity of the boot memory 179 can be reduced.

  Incidentally, if the entire initial setting program data is regarded as boot data, the data stored in advance in the boot memory 179 can be regarded as initial program data, and the latter half of the data is regarded as the second program data. Can be considered.

  In a succeeding step S305, an initial adjustment process of the scaler of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, the resolution initial adjustment command (resolution initial adjustment information) is transmitted to the VDP 135. The initial adjustment value is adjusted in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the boot data as a resolution initial adjustment command.

  By transmitting the resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler in the register 153 of the VDP 135. Thus, when an image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

  In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the latter half of the data to the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 has been completed, and the determination processing is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the latter half of the data are set so that the standby time in step S306 is minimized or substantially prevented. If the transfer of the latter half of the data has been completed, the process proceeds to step S307.

  Incidentally, the processing of steps S301 to S306 is executed based on the boot data stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and the processing of steps S307 to S314 is executed based on the latter half data.

  In step S307, a transfer request for initial image data is made to the memory module 133. Here, the initial image data is the minimum image data for displaying an image related to the system test on the symbol display device 31, and the display of the symbol is changed and displayed in front of a predetermined background image on the display screen G. Therefore, the data capacity is set smaller than the image data necessary for displaying the demo image or the image data required for displaying the demo image. The initial image data is not a simple 3D image data but a combination of 2D still image data and plate polygon image data.

  The image related to the system test is an image for confirming that the symbol display device 31 is normal at a manufacturing factory or a game hall of the pachinko machine 10, and for example, an image of all red on the entire display screen G. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an image in which a plurality of colors are divided and displayed, or an image in which the manufacturer name or model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The memory module 133 receives the address designation command corresponding to the initial image data from the display CPU 131, and starts transferring the initial image data to the change area 141b in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

  In a succeeding step S308, a ground color initial adjustment process is executed. In the initial adjustment process, the VDP 135 issues a ground color initial adjustment command (ground color initial adjustment) so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes the initial numerical information. Information). This initial numerical information is adjusted in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the latter half of the data as a ground color initial adjustment command.

  The VDP 135 transmits the ground color initial adjustment command, so that the initial numerical value information is stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 153 of the VDP 135. As a result, the background color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas that have not been updated from the initial numerical information when the drawing data is created. Although black is set in the pachinko machine 10 as an initial ground color, it is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

  In a succeeding step S309, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial image data to the VRAM 134 is completed, and the determination processing is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the initial image data are set so that the standby time in step S309 is minimized or substantially does not occur. If the transfer of the initial image data has been completed, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, a request to transfer the regular program data is made to the memory module 133. As described above, the regular program data includes the program data necessary to advance the processing after step S201 in the main processing and various interrupt processing. The memory module 133 starts transferring the regular program data to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the regular program data from the display CPU 131.

  In a succeeding step S311, task processing for an initial image is executed. In the task process, a process of grasping various parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 135 to display an initial image is executed. Specifically, as various parameters, address information of an area in the VRAM 134 to which the initial image data is transferred, information of the frame areas 142a and 142b in which the drawing data is to be created using the initial image data, the geometry calculation unit 151, The rendering unit 152 includes information for creating drawing data corresponding to the initial image from the initial image data.

  In the following step S312, a drawing list is created as drawing instruction information including information corresponding to the processing result of the task processing in step S311, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. The VDP 135 creates drawing data corresponding to the initial image in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be created according to the drawing list, and outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. Thus, the display of the initial image is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The display of the initial image is continued until a new drawing list is transmitted from the display CPU 131 and the image is updated by the VDP 135. By displaying the initial image in this manner, the display of the image on the display screen G is started earlier than in the configuration in which no image is displayed on the display screen G until the display of the game image is started. can do.

  In a succeeding step S313, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular program data to the work RAM 132 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the common program data are set so that the standby time in step S313 is minimized or substantially does not occur. If the transfer of the regular program data has been completed, the process proceeds to step S314.

  In step S314, a request for transfer of ordinary image data is made to the memory module 133. After that, the initial setting process ends. The regular image data includes the image data for the back surface used when starting the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31, and the image data for the object for displaying the symbol and the image data for the texture. Image data is included. The image data for displaying the back surface and the image data for displaying the design are set in accordance with the type of the display mode, and the common image data includes the image data of both display modes. In addition, abnormality notification data used for displaying an abnormality notification image when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included. The abnormality notification data includes 2D still image data and plate polygon data. This is a combination with the image data.

  Here, when the main processing is started in the display CPU 131 by executing the initial setting processing as described above, (1) boot program data including boot data and the latter half data; 2) Initial image data, (3) regular program data, and (4) regular image data are transferred from the memory module 133. In this case, data is transferred in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) → (4). In addition, by executing the processing of steps S302, S306, S309, and S313, the transfer timing of each data does not overlap. Therefore, the transfer of each of the above data can be performed favorably.

  Returning to the description of the main processing (FIG. 9), after executing the initial setting processing in step S201, various interrupts are permitted in step S202. This allows the display CPU 131 to execute the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. Thereafter, in the main process, the process of step S202 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt processing will be described.

  The command interrupt process is a process to be started with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, whatever the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, the command received at the input port 137 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the change area 132b of the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that the command has been newly received is stored in the corresponding area. set. Thereafter, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the process before the start of the command interrupt process.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt processing is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  In addition, when outputting the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 135 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display screen G, and places it on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. An image signal is output sequentially for the dots arranged, and an image signal is output for each horizontal line from left to right in order from the top. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dot at the lower right corner of the display screen G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot to make the display CPU 131 recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be considered to be started in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S401, a command analysis processing is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 are analyzed. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result of the step S401. If a new command has been received, a command corresponding process is executed in step S403.

  In the command corresponding process, a data table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is grasped. The data table defines processing required to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. Information group.

  Here, the commands that the display CPU 131 receives from the sound emission control device 60 include a variation pattern command, a symbol designation command, and a notice command as described above. When these commands are received, a data table necessary for executing the game effect for each of the commands on the symbol display device 31 is grasped. In addition, there is an end command as the command to be received, and when the command is received, a data table necessary for finally stopping the currently executed game effect is grasped. The received command includes various commands for a jackpot effect. When the command is received, a data table necessary for executing the jackpot effect is grasped. The received command includes a command for demonstration display. When the command is received, a data table necessary for executing the demonstration display is grasped. Further, it also grasps other program data necessary when executing processing based on the data table grasped as necessary.

  Of the data tables required to execute the game effect, the data table required to start the game effect has already been transferred to the work area 132a of the work RAM 132 as the work program data. Further, the data table necessary for the final stop of the game round effect, the data table required for starting the jackpot effect, and the data table necessary for executing the demo display are also used as the regular program data in the work RAM 132. The data has already been transferred to the area 132a. Further, other program data necessary for executing the processing based on these data tables has already been transferred to the regular area 132a of the work RAM 132 as regular program data.

  After executing the command corresponding process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the program data needs to be transferred in advance. The data that is determined to be necessary here is a data table that is determined to be necessary in step S403 and is not included in the regular program data, and a data table that is required to execute processing based on the data table. Other program data.

  If the program data needs to be transferred in advance, a request for transferring the necessary program data is made to the memory module 133 in step S405. The memory module 133 starts transfer of the program data to the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the program data from the display CPU 131.

  That is, when a new command is received, the display CPU 131 determines whether or not new program data needs to be transferred at the timing when the command is analyzed, and issues a program data transfer request if necessary. Thus, the advance transfer of the program data can be started at the earliest possible timing. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address at which the program data to be transferred is stored, but also the address of the transfer destination are specified. In addition, since the data table and program data including the process at the first timing in executing the process corresponding to the command are transferred as the regular program data at the time of initial startup, the process corresponding to the command is performed after the command is received. There is no waiting time before it starts.

  When a negative determination is made in step S402, when a negative determination is made in step S404, or after the process of step S405 is performed, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, a pointer update process is performed. In the pointer update process, the information of the pointer set in the data table is updated so as to be advanced by one frame. This allows the display CPU 131 to grasp the processing required to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In a succeeding step S407, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, calculation of parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 135 to draw is performed. The details of the task processing will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S408, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current process is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task processing is to be drawn, and information of the parameter updated in the task processing is also set. The VDP 135 creates drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to the drawing list. The processing in the VDP 135 will be described later in detail.

  In a succeeding step S409, it is determined whether or not the program data is being transferred. If the program data is being transferred, the V interrupt processing ends. On the other hand, if the program data is not being transferred, in step S410, by referring to the information set as the update timing after the present in the currently set data table, it is determined whether the transfer of the image data is necessary. Is determined.

  Among various types of image data, the image data used at the time of a drawing instruction based on common program data is set as common image data. That is, as the regular image data, image data necessary for starting the game round effect, image data necessary for starting the jackpot effect, and image data necessary for executing the demonstration display are set. . These image data transfer requests have already been made to the memory module 133 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10), and when the display CPU 131 has received a command, the transfer has been completed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which at least the processing after step S406 is not performed until the transfer of the common image data is completed. In this case, after the main process (FIG. 9) is started in the display CPU 131 and the initial image is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the display of the initial image is continued until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. Becomes In addition, when the initial image data is transferred, the simple design data having a data size smaller than the total data size of the image data necessary for performing the variable display of the design is simultaneously transferred, and the transfer of the regular image data group is completed. When a variation pattern command is received in a situation where the variation pattern command is not present, a variation display using a simple symbol may be performed.

  The image data that is determined to need to be transferred in step S410 is the image data that is required in the currently set data table at the update timing after the current time, and is not included in the regular image data. It is. If it is not necessary to transfer the image data, the V interrupt processing ends. If the transfer of image data is necessary, in step S411, a request for transfer of the necessary image data is made to the memory module 133, and then the V interrupt processing ends. The memory module 133 starts transferring the image data to the change area 141b of the expansion buffer 141 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the image data from the display CPU 131.

  That is, the display CPU 131 refers to the currently set data table to determine whether or not new image data needs to be transferred, and if necessary, makes a transfer request for image data. The VDP 135 creates drawing data. In this case, the image data is pre-transferred before the timing required for the transfer. This allows the VDP 135 to smoothly create drawing data. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address where the image data to be transferred is stored, but also the address of the transfer destination is specified. Further, since the common image data is transferred at the time of the initial startup, a standby time is not generated between the reception of the command and the start of the display of the corresponding image.

  Here, by executing the processing in step S409, the transfer of the program data has priority over the transfer of the image data. Even if the transfer of the program data is prioritized as described above, the necessity of the transfer of the image data is determined with reference to the data table. Therefore, even if the transfer is once avoided in step S409, The necessity of transfer is determined in the subsequent V interrupt processing, and the transfer request is executed. Thus, the transfer timing of the program data and the image data can be prevented from overlapping, and the transfer of the program data can be prioritized.

<Task Processing in Display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the task process, first, in step S501, a setting process for starting control is executed. In the control start setting process, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the current process. The individual image is defined as one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data or one 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. That is.

  More specifically, the control start setting process first determines whether or not there is an individual image to be control-started this time based on the currently set data table. If there is, in the change area 132b of the work RAM 132, a search is made for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and the search is performed for the individual image grasped as the control start target. An empty buffer area is secured so as to correspond one-to-one. Further, an initialization process is performed on all the secured free buffer areas, and a control start parameter corresponding to an individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

  In a succeeding step S502, a control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

  In a succeeding step S503, a background calculation process is executed. In the background calculation processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and darkness, and projection of the background image and the background character, which constitute the background image, in the world coordinate system are calculated. A process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation is executed.

  In a succeeding step S504, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameters is performed for an individual image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  In a succeeding step S505, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is performed on the image of the symbol to be subjected to the fluctuation display in each game time.

  By the way, in each processing of steps S503 to S505, processing for updating the control start parameter set in step S501 is executed. In each of the processes of steps S503 to S505, animation data set to change various parameters of an individual image according to a specific pattern each time an image update timing is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of the individual image. The animation data is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in advance, and is transferred to the work RAM 132 in advance by a timing when the display CPU 131 needs to read the animation data.

  After that, in step S506, a process of grasping an arrangement target in the world coordinate system is performed, and then the task process ends. In the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images subjected to the control update by the processes of steps S503 to S505 described above. Execute The determination is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 may be the same as the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135. In this case, the process of step S506 is executed. Eliminates the need.

  In the control start setting process in step S501, the control start timing of each individual image may be set to be dispersed in order to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in VDP 135>
Next, a basic process executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of generating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 142a and 142b is executed.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. The process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. The process of outputting an image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. FIGS. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, for an image of one frame related to the drawing list is set. I have. Also, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as image data handled by the VDP 135, the presence / absence of decoding designation and information of an address to which moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set in the header information. Is also good.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the current drawing data are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number information, and parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 13A, the image data for the back is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. I have. In addition, the rendering image data is set as an order after the background image data. For example, the rendering object A is set as the mth, the rendering object B is set as the (m + 1) th,... I have. In addition, the image data for symbols is set as an order after the image data for effects, for example, the symbol object A is set as the n-th symbol, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1-th symbol, and so on. I have.

  , P (m), P (m + 1),..., P (n), P (n + 1),. Is set with a plurality of types of parameters. More specifically, regarding the parameter P (1) of the back image data, as shown in FIG. 13B, the address information of the area to which the back image data is transferred in the VRAM 134 and the back image Coordinate information (X-value information, Y-value information, Z-value information) indicating a position in the world coordinate system when data is set, and a coordinate in the world coordinate system when back image data is set. The information of the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle, the scale information indicating the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back, and the image data for the back are And information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) in the case of setting.

  Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all pixels of the image data for the object. Further, the coordinate information is set for the image data for the object, but is not set for the image data for the texture. In the texture image data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each pixel of the object image data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in a state attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. I have. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when performing texture mapping.

  The parameter (P1) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera when projecting the back image data onto the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and rendering the back image data. In this case, light information including information on the position and the direction of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case where the shadow is determined is set.

  Further, in the parameter (P1), information of Z test designation indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of a technique for erasing a hidden surface, is set. The Z-buffer method means that when many objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel) arranged on the Z-axis is viewed from the viewpoint. This is a depth adjustment processing method for sequentially referring to the distances and setting the numerical information set for the pixel closest to the viewpoint to the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When applying the Z-buffer method, a Z-buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

  In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for performing the above-described hidden surface removal. The Z sorting method is a depth adjustment processing method for sequentially setting numerical information set for each pixel on the Z axis in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and if necessary, the addition processing as described above and the processing for fusion as described above are executed. The Rukoto. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, but the processing is started when an effect image is displayed.

  Further, the parameter (P1) includes information of α data designation indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target, information of fog designation indicating the application of the fog and the application target, and a background image. In addition, separate storage designation information indicating the presence or absence of separate storage of the drawing data for the background image is set.

  Here, the α value is transmission information of a corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of 2D still image data and texture image data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162 as image data. The α data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same image data for texture. The α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of 2D still image data and image data for texture is not finely controlled in pixel units, but is uniformly controlled for all pixels. In a situation where control is required, the required data capacity can be reduced by being able to cope with a uniform α value, and the transmittance can be finely controlled in pixel units by applying the α data.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, fog is applied to an image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image of one frame. In this case, another fog is set for the object located in the back side in the Z-axis direction in a situation where applying the same fog to the object as to the other object is too dark to have a texture. It is good to have composition. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while keeping the texture from being impaired.

  Separate storage refers to writing and storing in a mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use the once created background image drawing data as it is in subsequent frames. Say. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode buffer 145 and a second mode buffer 145 so as to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. The specific contents of this separate storage will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, other parameters such as the parameter P (2) include object information and object information in place of the background image data among the various information shown in FIG. 13B. Texture information is set. As these pieces of information, address information of an area to which an object or a texture is transferred is set.

  The drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how the drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S602.

  In the setting process for the background, of the image data designated in the current drawing list, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If not, a free buffer area to be referenced for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. Thereafter, the address at which the image data is pre-transferred is grasped and read out in the VRAM 134, and the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process for converting the coordinates into a coordinate value in the world coordinate system is executed, and the data is set in the buffer area secured above.

  When the parameters are arranged, the update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In the background setting process, a control end process of deleting background image data not specified in the current drawing list from among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In a succeeding step S603, an effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting processing, an object for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data designated in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, a process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case of the background setting process described above. If they are arranged, the process of updating various parameters is executed. In the effect setting process, a control end process of erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In a succeeding step S604, a setting process for symbols is executed. In the setting process for the symbol, an object for displaying the symbol is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, a process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case of the background setting process described above. If they are arranged, the process of updating various parameters is executed. In the symbol setting process, a control end process of deleting image data for a symbol not specified in the current drawing list from among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  By executing the processing of the above steps S602 to S604, as shown in FIG. 15, in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis, the object is designated as the arrangement target by the drawing list. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale similarly designated by the drawing list is completed. FIG. 15 simply shows how the rearmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged.

  In a succeeding step S605, a conversion process to a camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin, based on the coordinates and direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 15, the viewpoint PC31 represented by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC31 is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (backmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30), and a camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch viewpoints individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 15 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In a succeeding step S606, a conversion process to a view coordinate system (view space) is executed. In the conversion process to the view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a view coordinate system corresponding to the view (view angle) from the viewpoint. Thus, if each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, and the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In a succeeding step S607, a clipping process is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S606 is grasped using the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, extraction is performed in step S606 based on a space corresponding to the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 15) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31). Clip each of the individual images.

  In a succeeding step S608, a writing process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the information of the light specified by the drawing list, and the shadow, reflection, and the like are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. .

  In a succeeding step S609, a texture mapping process is executed. In the texture mapping process, a texture corresponding to each of the objects extracted by the clipping process is pasted, and the appearance of each object is determined. This texture mapping process includes processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping, in addition to the process of simply pasting image data for texture.

  Thereafter, in steps S610 to S612, each individual image extracted in step S607 and further subjected to lighting processing and texture mapping processing is projected onto a screen area PC32 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection). (Projection) to create drawing data.

  Specifically, first, in step S610, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the background drawing data creation processing, the background drawing data is created by projecting the background image and the object set as the background image onto the screen area PC32 while erasing the hidden surface.

  Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 4, and the background buffer in which background drawing data is written and the drawing data for effects are written in the screen buffer 144. An effect buffer and a symbol buffer in which symbol drawing data is written are set. In the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer, areas having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC32 are set. The background drawing data created in step S610 is written to the background buffer. If background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data is not created.

  In a succeeding step S611, rendering data creation processing for the effect is executed. In the rendering data creation process for the effect, the object set as the effect image is projected on the screen area PC32 while the hidden surface is being erased, so that the effect buffer is generated in the effect buffer in the screen buffer 144. Create drawing data. Note that if no image data for an effect is specified in the drawing list, no effect drawing data is created.

  In a succeeding step S612, a drawing data creating process for a symbol is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the symbol, the object set as the symbol is projected on the screen area PC32 while the hidden surface is erased, so that the symbol drawing is performed in the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 144. Create data. If no image data for a symbol is specified in the drawing list, no drawing data for the symbol is created.

  After that, in step S613, after the drawing data synthesizing process is performed, the present drawing process ends. In the drawing data synthesizing process of step S613, the background drawing data, the rendering data, and the design drawing data, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of steps S610 to S612, are combined. The composition is performed, and the composition result is written into the frame areas 142a and 142b to be rendered as rendering data for one frame.

  In this case, the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the presentation, and the drawing data for the design are defined so as to be arranged from the back side to the near side, and the images are set so that the images do not overlap in the depth direction. ing. Therefore, the drawing data for the background is first written into the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, then the drawing data for the effect is written, and finally the drawing data for the design is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel subjected to rendering, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The fusion of the back side image and the front side image is performed at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the front side image is overwritten on the back side image. Then, the operation for fusion as described above is executed.

  By the way, each drawing data is defined to have an area of one frame, but the alpha value of complete transparency is set for blank parts where projection is not performed in rendering data for effects or drawing data for designs. Have been.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. In addition, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is employed as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data one frame after the frame. The display circuit 155 has a selector circuit for alternately switching the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame regions 142a and 142b to be drawn are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

  Steps S602 to S607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S608 to S613 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  As described above, the Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method. Here, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer is started in the drawing data creation processing in steps S610 to S612 in the drawing processing (FIG. 14) when the Z test is specified in the drawing list. When performing the Z test designation, the display CPU 131 sets the camera information of each individual image to be subjected to the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so that each viewpoint has the same coordinates and direction, The direction of the viewpoint is set so as to be in the Z-axis direction of the world coordinate system. Therefore, the Z axis of the screen area PC32, which is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer, is set to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. Also, only one Z buffer 143 is set, and has the same number of dots as the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 144.

  First, in step S701, on the basis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 15), an individual image included on the Z axis and a target pixel of the individual image to be tested this time is set. Know the set Z value. In the subsequent step S702, the Z value set in the dot area corresponding to the drawing target dot on a one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

  In the following step S703, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image obtained in step S701 is closer to the near side in the Z-axis direction than the Z value of the Z buffer 143 obtained in step S702. If it corresponds to the near side, the process proceeds to step S704, where the Z value grasped in step S701 is overwritten on the area of the dot in the Z buffer 143 referred to in step S702. In the subsequent step S705, the numerical value information for drawing such as the color information set in the pixel referred to in step S701 is overwritten on the area of the current dot to be projected in the buffer to be drawn in the screen buffer 144. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S703 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S706 without executing the processing of steps S704 to S705. In other words, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143 or is on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. In addition, the numerical information for drawing that has already been set is held as it is. On the other hand, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is on the near side in the Z-axis direction from the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. The numerical information for drawing is also updated.

  In step S706, it is determined whether the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S701, and a Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

  If completed, in step S707, it is determined whether the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC32. If not completed, the process returns to step S701 after updating the projection target dot in step S708, and performs a Z test on the new projection target dot. If the processing has been completed, the hidden surface processing ends.

  By performing the hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual image closer to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the mask of the character for the background (that is, partial display) is executed using the hidden surface processing. This masking is performed by setting the Z value of the object in the display CPU 131 for masking.

  Hereinafter, the calculation processing for the mask executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the calculation process for the mask is performed in the effect calculation process in step S504 in the task process (FIG. 12) when the data table indicates that the calculation process for the mask is to be performed. Executed.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current processing cycle corresponds to the first mask display based on the currently set data table. Here, a first mask display and a second mask display are set as mask displays. The first mask display is a display mode in which a state in which a character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a method in which pixels to be masked from a state in which the entire character is displayed are displayed in a plurality of frames. This is a display mode in which the number gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

  If it corresponds to the first mask display, in step S802, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S803, based on the currently set data table, a pixel to be masked in the object grasped in step S802 is grasped.

  Then, after performing the process of setting the Z value in step S804, the present calculation process ends. In the Z value setting process, for the pixel to be masked in the object, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and for the pixel not to be masked, The Z value is set so as to be on the near side of the rearmost image and correspond to the position to be originally displayed.

  The calculation process for the mask is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135. In the VDP 135, the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface processing. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 16) is performed, and the first mask display is finally performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of description, FIG. 18 shows a 3D image as a 2D image.

  FIG. 18A shows a case where the character CH10 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. FIG. 18 (a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 18 (a-2) is a view of the display screen G. 3 shows a display mode. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-1), since the Z value is set to each pixel so as to be closer to the front side than the rearmost image, as shown in FIG. 18 (a-2). The entire character CH10 is displayed.

  FIG. 18B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. FIG. 18 (b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 18 (b-2) is a view on the display screen G. 3 shows a display mode. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18 (b-1), the Z value is set so that a part of each pixel is closer to the front side than the rearmost image, but the remaining pixels are rearmost. The Z value is set so as to be located on the back side of the image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18 (b-2), only the portion of the character CH10 corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set to be on the near side is displayed.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH10 are set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of types of the first mask display for the same character CH10.

  Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the mask (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S801 that the current processing cycle does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing cycle is the second mask display. Since it corresponds to the display, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, it is determined whether or not it is the second mask display start timing based on the currently set data table.

  If it is the start timing, in step S806, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S807, a dedicated table for the mask is read based on the currently set data table. This dedicated table for the mask is stored and held until the present second mask display is completed. In a succeeding step S808, a pixel set as an initial erasure target in the dedicated table for the mask is grasped.

  Then, after performing the processing of setting the Z value in step S809, this calculation processing ends. In the Z value setting process, in the object, for the pixel identified as the target of initial erasure in step S808, the Z value is set so as to be located on the back side of the rearmost image. For pixels that are not, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be displayed, which is closer to the front than the rearmost image.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, the erasure target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In the following step S811, the data corresponding to the value of the erasure target counter updated in step S810 is confirmed in the currently read dedicated mask table, and the pixel to be erased is grasped.

  Then, after performing the processing of setting the Z value in step S812, the present arithmetic processing ends. In the setting process of the Z value, in the object, the pixel grasped as the erasure target in step S811 is set so that the Z value is located on the back side of the rearmost image, and is the erasure target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to be on the near side of the rearmost image and correspond to the position to be displayed originally.

  The calculation process for the mask is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135. In the VDP 135, the Z buffer is used as the hidden surface processing. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 16) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of description, FIG. 19 shows a 3D image as a 2D image.

  FIG. 19A shows an image diagram of information set in the mask-dedicated table, and FIG. 19B shows a case where the character CH11 is displayed as usual without performing the second mask display. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 19A, the object PC34 corresponding to the character CH11 has a plurality of pixels, and in the mask-dedicated table, the plurality of pixels are grouped by a plurality of groups and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the order of frames to be erased is set. Specifically, a group indicated as “Z1” is set as an initial deletion target, and thereafter, a group indicated as “Z2” → a group indicated as “Z3” → a group indicated as “Z4” → shown as “Z5” It becomes a deletion target in the order of the group.

  In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated by “Z1” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 19C, the pixel portion corresponding to the group of “Z1” is missing. Character CH11 is displayed. In the subsequent frame, if the group indicated as “Z2” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 19D, the pixels corresponding to the group “Z2” in addition to the group “Z1” Character CH11 is displayed in a state where the portion is missing. Then, the character CH11 is not displayed in the frame in which the group finally indicated as “Z5” is to be deleted.

  As described above, the object can be masked using the Z buffer 143. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform a masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set mask data, which is a type of image data, in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data.

  Since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without significantly increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131. Also, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exhibit the above-described excellent effects.

  In addition, the Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set for the part to be hidden. Since the rearmost image is an image that always constitutes the rear surface in any frame, it is an absolute reference as the position on the Z axis (in the depth direction). By setting the Z value of the portion to be hidden based on this, the setting mode of the Z value in the case of non-display can be made uniform, and the processing related to the setting of the Z value can be performed. Is reduced.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which only one of the first mask display and the second mask display is set. In the second mask display, a configuration may be adopted in which the pixels are not erased for each of a plurality of pixels but are erased for each pixel, and the pixels to be erased may be set as display targets again. It may be.

  By setting the Z value in reverse, characters are not erased sequentially over the display period for a plurality of frames, but displayed so that the characters appear sequentially over the display period for a plurality of frames. May be adopted.

<Another form of mask processing using Z buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another embodiment of the mask calculation process executed by the display CPU 131.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether it is the start timing based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, in step S902, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S903, the object to be masked is initialized based on the currently set data table. Read the mask table.

  In a succeeding step S904, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S903. .

  The lottery counter is configured to be updated each time the process of step S202 is executed in the main process (FIG. 9), and furthermore, when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be. Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased includes all pixels constituting the object to be masked. And a plurality of pixels as one group, and each pixel corresponds to each group one-to-one.

  In the following step S905, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S904. Then, after performing the processing of setting the Z value in step S906, the calculation processing ends. In this Z-value setting process, in the object, the pixel grasped as the erasure target in step S905 is set so that the Z value is located on the back side of the rearmost image, and is the erasure target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to be on the near side of the rearmost image and correspond to the position to be displayed originally.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S901 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, the mask table is rewritten so that the information of the erasure target already set as the erasure target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased already set as the information to be erased is rewritten so as to be redundantly assigned to other information to be erased. This allocation may be performed at random, or may be configured to be allocated to information to be deleted corresponding to the counter value immediately below the table.

  After that, the processing of steps S904 to S906 is performed using the mask table rewritten in step S907, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

  As described above, according to this alternative embodiment, pixels to be erased are selected at random, so that the mode of mask display can be diversified.

  The mask display using the Z-buffer 143 may be applied not to the character for the background but to the character or design for the effect. For example, when applied to a production character, the hidden surface processing is performed on the background image data and the production image data at the same time. The distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the image. Also, when applied to a design, the hidden surface processing is performed collectively on the image data for the background, the image data for the effect, and the image data for the design, so that it is similar to the above configuration. The distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

  Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the design, the VDP 135 determines that the pixels for which the Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set are not to be drawn. If so, the distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be performed based on the Z value of the rearmost image as in the above configuration.

  Further, the distribution of the Z values of the display target and the non-display target is not performed based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but, for example, a Z value before the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the Z value on the far side from the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the display target.

  Also, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not on the basis of the Z axis of the world coordinate system but on the basis of the direction of the viewpoint.

  Also, in a configuration for displaying a 2D image as in the second embodiment described below, when the VDP is configured to be able to operate drawing data in pixel units, information in the depth direction set for each pixel of the image data is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which partial display of an image is performed by sorting the information to either target information or non-display target information.

<Configuration related to display mode switching>
Next, a configuration relating to the switching of the display mode will be described.

  The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed before the game round is started or the type of the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is being executed is set to a predetermined type. Display mode is set. Specifically, a first display mode and a second display mode are set.

  The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when comparing symbols with the same number, the outer shape and shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and patterns are different. As for the background image, the type of the rearmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and type of characters displayed in front of the rearmost image are different. The number of characters to be displayed is set larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

  The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Specifically, the display mode is sequentially switched by operating the staging operation device 48 in a state where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, switching is performed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for a performance under predetermined conditions in a situation where a game round is being executed.

  A specific processing configuration related to the switching of the display mode will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an operation generation command corresponding process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation corresponding command processing is executed in the command corresponding processing of step S403 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether an operation generation command for mode switching has been received from the sound emission control device 60. If not received, the operation command handling process is terminated, and if received, the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game round nor the open / close execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether the current period is the first switchable period is set in the data table. In step S1002, it is determined whether the current period is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, in step S1003, a first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process proceeds to step S1004, and it is determined whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from a start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in a situation where a game round is being executed. Specifically, when the effect for the game round is executed on the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started → high-speed variation display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → low-speed variation. This includes a display flow of sequentially stopping the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of the variable display of symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to the end of the high-speed variable display in all of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, the variation display mode of the symbol is changed to the symbol variation display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → the acceleration period of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → the high-speed variation display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (the high speed The display flow may be such that the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are sequentially stopped via the (speed) → low speed fluctuation display (low speed is constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Further, a medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. In other words, the specific number of stages is arbitrary as long as the mode of the symbol change display is switched in a plurality of stages such as two stages, three stages or four or more stages. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a low-recognition stage in which the player has low symbol recognizability among the stages.

  Further, as long as the flow of the symbol variation display includes a state of a variation display in a relatively low identification mode → a variation display in a high identification mode, a specific variation mode is arbitrary, and for example, any of the modes is applicable. Even if the fluctuation speed is the same, in the variable display in the low identification mode, the symbol is displayed in a state in which the symbol is transparent, translucent, hollow or partially removed, and in the variable display in the high identification mode, the entire symbol is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which the variable display is performed in the low identification mode.

  Information for specifying whether the current period is the second switchable period is set in the data table. In step S1004, it is determined whether the current period is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the process corresponding to this operation occurrence command is terminated as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, at step S1005, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 , The second switching execution flag is set.

  After executing either the process of step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, the display mode counter is updated.

  The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode by the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. In the counter for the display mode, a counter value is set in one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as described above, a numerical value of “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display mode are set as the counter values. A numerical value of “1” corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, when the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 131 is started, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the second value is set. One display mode is set.

  In step S1006, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order each time the effect operation device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S1006 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is “0” and the first display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to “1” and the second mode is set. When the display mode is switched to the display mode and the process of step S1006 is performed in a situation where the counter for the display mode is “1” and the second display mode is set, the counter for the display mode is set to “1”. 1 Switch to the display mode. After executing the processing of step S1006, the operation-corresponding-command corresponding processing ends.

  Next, the calculation processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The calculation processing for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation processing in step S503 in the task processing (FIG. 12). In the case of executing a jackpot effect, for example, when the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when displaying a standby image or performing an effect for a game round. For example, the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current mode is the first display mode by referring to the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132. In the case of the first display mode, in step S1102, the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1103, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S1104, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the first display mode and an object to be updated for the background is grasped. In the following step S1105, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  On the other hand, in the case of the second display mode, in step S1106, a second rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S1107, various parameters of the grasped second rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the following step S1108, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the second display mode and to be updated for the background is grasped. In a succeeding step S1109, the control information is updated by calculating various parameters of the grasped object.

  At the execution timing of the process of step S1102, the control start setting process (step S501) for the first back image and the background object corresponding to the first display mode has been completed. At the execution timing of the process of step S1106, the control start setting process (step S501) for the second rearmost image and the background object corresponding to the second display mode has been completed.

  After executing the processing in step S1105 or step S1109, it is determined in step S1110 whether or not either the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any of the switching execution flags has been set, it is determined in step S1111 whether the processing load is large.

  The situation where the processing load is large means that when both the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the current drawing list are performed by the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 is large enough to cause a drop in processing or This means a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively large even if no drop occurs. It should be noted that information as to whether or not the processing load is large is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1111 is made based on the information.

  If the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S1112 whether the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been saved separately. Here, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually stored and the stored state is maintained. For separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

  The mode buffer 145 includes a first mode area 145a in which background drawing data for displaying a background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and a background image corresponding to the second display mode. And a second mode area 145b in which the background drawing data is written. The VDP 135 has a function of writing background drawing data to either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reads the written background drawing data to the screen buffer 144. A display mode control unit 154 having a writing function is provided.

  If it has not been saved separately, the execution designation information of another save is stored in step S1113, and then this calculation processing ends, and if it has been saved separately, this calculation processing ends as it is.

  When the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing includes a background list corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set. If the process of step S1113 is being executed, execution designation information of separate storage is set. The separate storage execution designation information includes information indicating that separate storage is to be performed, and also includes information on the address of another storage destination.

  On the other hand, if the processing load is large (step S1111: YES), it is determined in step S1114 whether the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been saved separately. If it has not been saved separately, the present arithmetic processing ends. On the other hand, in the case where the data has been separately saved, the use specifying information of the separately saved data is stored in step S1115, and then the calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing includes a background list corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set. If the process of step S1115 has been executed, use designation information of separately stored data is set. The use designation information of the separately-stored data includes information indicating that the separately-stored data is to be used, and also includes information of an address at which the separately-stored data is stored.

  Next, the symbol calculation processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The symbol calculation processing is executed in step S505 of the task processing (FIG. 12).

  First, in step S1201, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is necessary to execute a control update process for a symbol. The case where it is not necessary to execute includes a case where a jackpot effect is executed, and the case where it is necessary to execute includes a case where an effect for a game round is executed and a case where a standby image is displayed. If it is not necessary to execute the symbol calculation process, the symbol calculation process is terminated. If it is necessary to execute the symbol calculation process, the process proceeds to step S1202, based on the currently set data table. Determine whether or not.

  If the game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If the first switching execution flag is set, in step S1204, the control target symbol is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, while the information for the parameters of each free buffer area secured in controlling the symbol in the work RAM 132 is kept as it is, only the information of the symbol to be controlled (for example, the information of the address of the transfer destination) is stored. To the information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. It should be noted that the processing of steps S1203 and S1204 may be executed in the control start setting processing (step S501) in the task processing (FIG. 12). In addition, if a positive determination is made in step S1203, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203 or if the process in step S1204 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1206, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is performed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes the image data for the symbol corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set.

  If the game round is being executed (step S1202: YES), in step S1207, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. judge. If the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, it is determined in step S1208 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

  If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 14) corresponding to the current drawing list is executed on the VDP 135, if the symbol to be controlled is to be changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination, the processing is dropped. On the basis of whether or not processing is not performed, it is possible to change the processing if no processing failure occurs, and it is determined that the processing cannot be changed if the processing processing failure occurs.

  For example, when background image data corresponding to the switching of the display mode is newly set in the current drawing list, the VDP 135 needs to newly set image data to the world coordinate system. The processing load of the VDP 135 increases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when separate storage data is set as background image data in the current drawing list, or when background image data corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set. Since the VDP 135 does not need to newly set image data to the world coordinate system, the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can be changed.

  Note that the information as to whether or not the change can be made is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1209 is made based on the information. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1208, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

  If it is determined in step S1209 that the symbol can be changed, the symbol to be controlled is changed in step S1210 in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S1204. After executing the processing of step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1209 that the change is not possible, a change standby flag is set in a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1211, and the process proceeds to step S1213. . The change waiting flag is a flag for specifying by the display CPU 131 that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change standby flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1208 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the processing in step S1212 is executed, and the processing in step S1209 is performed. Be executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change standby flag have not been set, the process directly proceeds to step S1213. The change waiting flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S1212.

  In step S1213, the object of the design to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1214, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation process is performed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. You. In this case, if it is determined in step S1209 that the design cannot be changed to the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the image data of the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching source is directly set in the drawing list. You. Then, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display screen G. However, since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is during high-speed fluctuation display, the player changes the state described above. Unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

  If it is not possible to change the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, a change waiting flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing. As a result, the display mode can be satisfactorily switched while preventing the processing from dropping in the VDP 135. The processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range in which the high-speed change display is performed.

  If the high-speed change display is not being performed (step S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1215. In step S1215, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1216, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation processing ends. When the symbol calculation process is performed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. You.

  Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the background is executed in step S602 in the drawing process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not use designation of separate saved data is set in the current drawing list. If it has been set, in step S1302, information for setting the separately stored data corresponding to the designation as drawing data for the background is stored in the register 153.

  If it is not set (step S1301: NO) or after executing the processing of step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, the rearmost image designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1304, various parameters designated for the rearmost image are grasped. Then, in step S1305, the rearmost image is set to the world coordinate system. The contents relating to this setting are as described above.

  In the following step S1306, the background object designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1307, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S1308, the setting process for the object is performed on the world coordinate system, and then the setting process for the background is ended.

  By performing the setting process for the background as described above, the drawing is performed not only in the case where the use designation of the separate save data is not set, but also in the case where the use designation of the separate save data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Accordingly, for example, if the current drawing list relates to the switching of the display mode, it is possible to perform the setting for starting the control of the image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination.

  Next, the background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The background drawing data creation processing is executed in step S610 in the drawing processing (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not information on the use setting of the separate storage data is set in the register 153. If it is not set, in step S1402, hidden surface processing is performed to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface processing has already been described.

  In the following step S1403, it is determined whether or not execution designation of separate storage is set in the current drawing list. If it is not set, the drawing data creation processing ends. If it is set, in step S1404, the background mode created in step S1402 is transferred to the target mode area out of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Write the drawing data of Thus, the drawing data for the background is separately stored. After that, the drawing data creation processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the information on the use setting of the separate storage data has been set in the register 153, the process advances to step S1405. In step S1405, of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, the separate storage data is read from the currently designated mode area, and the read different storage data is stored in the current mode. The data is written into the screen buffer 144 as background drawing data. After that, the drawing data creation processing ends.

  By executing the background drawing data creation processing as described above, the background drawing data obtained through the geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to the separately stored data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . Further, in a frame in which an image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the rendering data creation process for rendering (step S611) and the rendering data creation process for symbols (step S612) are executed. The drawing data and the drawing data for the design are created, and the drawing data synthesizing process (step S613) is executed to create the drawing data for one frame.

  Here, the timing at which the separate storage data for the first display mode and the separate storage data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  26A shows the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 26B shows the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. 26A shows the ON / OFF state of the power of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 26B shows the presence or absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 26C shows the presence or absence of the second display mode. FIG. 26 (d) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 26 (e) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the display CPU 131 starts processing. Further, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, a drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 at a timing after the timing of t1 to display an image corresponding to the first display mode. Then, the VDP 135 starts creating drawing data corresponding to the first display mode based on the drawing list.

  After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode is completed, and the drawing data is stored as separate saved data for the first display mode in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. Is stored in the storage area 145a. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 26A, 3D character images indicated by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image are displayed. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. In addition, display of an image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing of t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter.

  Thereafter, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation of the staging operation device 48 at the timing of t3. Then, drawing data for the second display mode is created, and display of an image corresponding to the second display mode is started. Further, at this timing, since the creation of the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode is completed, the drawing data is stored as separate storage data for the second display mode in the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Is stored. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 26B, a 3D character image indicated by “G” to “J” in front of the rearmost image is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

  Here, the number of objects to be set is larger in the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode than in the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, when switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that the processing may be omitted in the VDP 135. On the other hand, among the separate saved data, the separate saved data for the first display mode is created using the time during which the initial setting at the time of power-on is performed, so that the processing load is large. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode in the situation, the omission of processing can be avoided by using the separate saved data.

  On the other hand, the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for creating the drawing data PD67 and is switched to the second display mode in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large. The settings are made so that no processing failure occurs. However, the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is also saved separately, and the mode is switched to the second display mode in a situation where the processing load is relatively large even if no processing is lost. The other saved data is used for

  By generating the separate storage data as described above, when the switching of the display mode is repeatedly performed in a short time, as shown at the timing of t4 to t9, the separate storage data is generated in each display mode. By displaying a background image using the above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of omission of processing.

  In addition, the object to be separately stored is a background image, and does not include an individual image, such as a symbol, in which a change is noticed. Accordingly, when the display mode is switched in a state where the individual image is fluctuating, even if the image is displayed using the separately stored data, the movement of the individual image in which the fluctuation is noticed is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  The display mode is not limited to two levels, and may be set to three levels or four or more levels. Even in this case, the display mode can be favorably switched by separately storing the background drawing data corresponding to each display mode.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the switching of the symbol type is performed without waiting regardless of the display mode switching timing. The design may be such that the symbols do not differ between the display modes.

  Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect character switches depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may not be separately saved or may be separately saved.

<Configuration for performing special effects using video textures>
Next, a configuration for performing a special effect using a moving image texture will be described.

  The special effect using the moving image texture in the present configuration is an effect of displaying a partial area of the inner surface of the hemispherical object to which the texture of the moving image is pasted, separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a panoramic display effect). The displayed area is changed to another area according to the operation on the staging operation device 48 by the player.

  In this configuration, the moving image decoder 93 expands the compressed moving image data into still image data in order to paste the texture of the moving image. The moving image data is image data compressed between update timings so as to have a plurality of pieces of still image data for one update timing and difference data between the still image data and encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is developed into still image data for a plurality of update timings.

  The moving image data for texture set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The moving image data shown in FIG. 27 is set to be used as a texture to be attached to the inner surface of a hemispherical object in a panoramic display effect.

  In the moving image data, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data corresponding to each update timing is set. The compressed data at each update timing is accompanied by a frame header.

  The compressed data includes I picture data for one update timing corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of update timings corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of update timings corresponding to the second difference data. B picture data.

  The I picture data is data that can create still image data for one update timing by itself when decoding. The I picture data may be set periodically. When decoding P-picture data, still image data for one update timing can be created by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more update timings earlier. Data. When decoding, B picture data is bi-directionally predicted with reference to I picture data or P picture data one or more update timings earlier and I picture data or P picture data one or more update timings later. Is performed, the still image data for one update timing can be created.

  In the compressed data of the moving image data, I picture data is set as data at the first update timing. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the second update timing,..., M-1st update timing. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the m-th update timing. B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th update timing,..., The (n-1) th update timing. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the nth update timing. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The contents of the image set in the moving image data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 shows the contents of a part of the image set in the moving image data for texture.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the moving image data for texture includes reference data (a moving object character CH71 as a flying object (UFO) added to a background image PC71 in which the moon and stars are floating in the night sky. I picture data) PD71 is set. Also, as shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C, difference data (P picture data, B picture data) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC71 but moves the movement target character CH71 in a predetermined direction. ) PD72 and PD73 are set. Still image data for one update timing (here, the same content as the reference data PD71) is created by the reference data PD71, and the difference data PD72 and PD73 are applied to the reference data PD71, thereby setting the reference data PD71. Still image data for one update timing to which the movement target character CH71 set in each of the difference data PD72 and PD73 is added to the background image PC71 is created.

  Two-dimensional coordinates (hereinafter, also referred to as texture coordinates) are set in the created still image data, and the texture coordinates and the vertex coordinates of polygons forming the hemispherical object are set in association with each other. The texture coordinates and the vertex coordinates are set in association with each other so that one piece of still image data is pasted as a texture on the entire inner surface of the hemispherical object. This defines which area of the still image data is to be pasted as a texture on the hemispherical object.

  When the still image data is pasted as a texture, a partial area PL21 (FIG. 28A) of the still image data corresponding to the area of the hemispherical object projected on the projection plane is grasped, and the area is determined. Image data corresponding to PL21 is set as a texture.

  Hereinafter, the calculation processing for the panorama display effect in the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. This processing is executed in the background calculation processing (step S503) in the task processing (FIG. 12). The calculation processing for the panorama display effect is started when a data table corresponding to the number of games in which the panorama display effect is performed is set.

  In the calculation process for the panorama display effect, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not it is time to decode moving image data for texture based on the currently set data table.

  If it is time to decode the moving image data, in step S1502, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134, the address at which the moving image data for texture is transferred in advance, and the area in which the moving image data is decoded and the still image data for a plurality of update timings are stored. Figure out the address.

  After that, in step S1503, the decoding designation information of the moving image data for texture is stored. The decoding designation information is set in the drawing list in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the VDP 135 recognizes that the decoding of the moving image data is requested when the decoding designation information is set in the received drawing list. I do.

  Incidentally, the timing determined in step S1501 is set so that the still image data used as the texture at the current update timing is expanded.

  After executing the decoding designation information storage processing in step S1503, or when making a negative determination in step S1501, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not a panorama display effect is being produced. Specifically, it is determined whether or not information relating to the panorama display effect is set at a position corresponding to the current pointer in the data table. For example, it is determined whether or not image data of a hemispherical object is set as image data at a position corresponding to the pointer.

  If it is determined that a panorama display effect is being performed (step S1504: YES), a calculation process of camera parameters is executed in step S1505.

  The calculation processing of the camera parameters will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not it is a period during which the camera direction can be changed. Information on whether or not the camera orientation can be changed is set in the data table. As will be described in detail later, the camera is set at the center of the hemispherical object in the world coordinate system, and the player can change the orientation in the world coordinate system by operating the staging operation device 48. .

  If it is a period during which the camera direction can be changed (step S1601: YES), it is determined whether or not an instruction to change the camera direction has been issued in step S1602. Specifically, by determining whether or not an operation command has been received from the sound emission control device 60, it is determined whether or not the change instruction has been issued.

  Here, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Whether or not the operation generation command has been received is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11). If the operation generation command has been received, it is determined in step S403 that the operation generation command has been received. The indicated flag is set in the work RAM 132, and information corresponding to the type of the operation generation command is set in the work RAM 132.

  If an instruction to change the direction of the camera has been given (step S1602: YES), the amount of change in the direction of the camera is updated in step S1603. The direction change amount is stored in the work RAM 132, and a fixed value is added or subtracted each time there is a camera direction change instruction. The change amount of the direction is updated to the initial value “0” when the panorama display effect ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, or if the amount of change in the camera orientation is updated in step S1603, the camera orientation stored in the work RAM 132 is stored in step S1604. Understand the amount of change. After the change amount of the camera direction is grasped, in the following step S1605, the grasped change amount is reflected on the rotation angle of the camera set at the current pointer position in the data table, and the current camera position is changed. Calculate the rotation angle. If there is no instruction to change the direction of the camera during the panorama display production, the amount of change in the direction of the camera remains at the initial value “0”. The rotation angle of this camera is used as it is.

  In step S1606, the camera coordinates are calculated based on the information stored at the current position of the pointer in the data table. During the panoramic display effect, the coordinates of the camera are fixed values that do not change, and the same value is derived in each processing.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, after completing the calculation processing of the camera parameters in step S1505, a moving image texture setting processing is executed in step S1506.

  The setting process of the moving image texture will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S1701, of the still image data created from the moving image data for texture, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current update timing is stored is grasped. The determination of the address is performed based on information (for example, information indicating the order of the update timing) for identifying the update timings stored at the current pointer position in the data table. In the following step S1702, after the texture designation information indicating that the still image data stored at the address is used as the texture is stored, the calculation processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, after the moving image texture setting process in step S1506 is completed, other parameters of the hemispherical object are calculated. Specifically, it is necessary to create a drawing list such as coordinates of the hemispherical object in the world coordinate system other than camera parameters, rotation angle, scale, light information to add light and shade, and Z test designation etc. The processing for calculating and deriving various parameters is executed, and the calculation processing for the present panorama display effect is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1504 that the panorama display effect is not in progress (step S1504: NO), in step S1508, the coordinates of the background character or the like in the case where the panorama display effect is not in progress in the world coordinate system, Calculate and execute various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and shade, camera information for projection, Z test designation, etc. Then, the arithmetic processing for the present panorama display effect is completed.

  When the calculation processing for the panorama display effect is performed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), texture specification information for specifying still image data created from moving image data for texture as a texture Is set, and a drawing list in which various parameters including a rotation angle of the camera and coordinates which are fixed values are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 135. In addition, when the current arithmetic processing is a timing for specifying the decoding of the moving image data for texture, the decoding specifying information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the information of the various addresses related to the moving image data for texture. Are set in the drawing list.

  In addition, since the background image and the effect image are mixed in the still image data, it is not necessary to set the effect image separately from the still image data. Therefore, when performing a panorama display effect, the effect calculation process of step S504 in the task process (FIG. 12) is skipped. However, since the symbols are displayed separately from the still image data, the symbol calculation processing in step S505 is not skipped.

  Next, a decoding process performed by the video decoder 93 of the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The decoding process is started when the decoding list of the moving image data for texture is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131. The decoding process is started asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 14) executed by the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 of the VDP 135 and the process of outputting an image signal executed by the display circuit 155. .

  First, in step S1801, the address of the moving image data for the texture specified this time is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S1802, the area to which the moving image data for texture is to be developed is grasped from the information of the development destination address specified in the drawing list.

  In the following step S1803, moving image data is read from the address grasped in step S1801, and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each decoded still image data is written to each area of the address grasped in step S1802. Thereafter, the decoding process ends.

  Next, the drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the drawing processing in this configuration, in the texture mapping processing in step S609 of the drawing processing already described with reference to FIG. 14, a part of the still image data created from the moving image data (the area PL21 in FIG. There is a case where a moving image texture mapping process is performed to be pasted. The moving image texture mapping processing will be described later in detail. In the following description, a state in which drawing data is created along with execution of a drawing process will be described with reference to FIG.

  If the new drawing list has been received (step S601: YES), the VDP 135 executes the processing of steps S602 to S604. Thereby, the hemispherical object PC41 set as the placement target by the drawing list is designated by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis as shown in FIG. The setting of the scene arranged with the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale is completed.

  Further, by executing the processing of steps S605 to S608, the conversion processing to the camera coordinate system, the conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system, the clipping processing, and the lighting processing are performed. In step S605, a conversion process to the camera coordinate system is performed based on the rotation angle and the coordinates calculated in the calculation process (FIG. 29) for the panorama display effect in the display CPU 131. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33, the viewpoint PC31 represented by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC31 is set. Here, as described above, the coordinates of the camera are fixed during the panorama display effect, and the rotation angle changes according to the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. That is, since the camera changes its direction by the operation of the player without changing its position, the viewpoint PC31 always faces a predetermined area on the inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41.

  In step S609, a texture mapping process is performed. In this texture mapping process, if the texture designation information is set in the drawing list received this time from the display CPU 131, the moving image texture mapping process is started. The video texture mapping processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1901, the address in the expansion buffer 141 where the still image data to be used as the texture this time is stored is grasped. The information of the address is included in the texture designation information.

  When the address at which the still image data is stored is determined, the still image data stored at the address is determined in step S1902. In step S1903, parameters such as α data to be applied to the still image data are grasped. The parameter is set in the drawing list.

  In the following step S1904, the area of the inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41 to which the texture is to be pasted, that is, the area projected on the screen area PC32 is grasped. Specifically, a polygon (primitive) part or all of which is projected on the screen area PC32 is grasped.

  In the following step S1905, a part of the still image data corresponding to the area (still image data corresponding to the area PL21 in FIG. 29A) is pasted as a texture on the area of the hemispherical object PC41 grasped in step S1904. wear. At this time, the data is pasted while reflecting the values of parameters such as α data grasped in step S1903.

  Specifically, the hemispherical object PC41 is formed by a plurality of polygons, and the polygon is a closed three-dimensional figure in which at least three vertices (three-dimensional coordinates) are connected. Each pixel of the still image data used as a texture can be specified by texture coordinates. Since the coordinates of the vertices of the polygon and the texture coordinates are associated in advance, it is possible to derive the corresponding texture coordinates of each part of the interior (surface) surrounded by the side connecting the vertices of the polygon by linear interpolation or the like. In the pasting of the texture in step S1905, the texture coordinates corresponding to each part of the polygon grasped in step S1904 (each pixel corresponding to the inside of the polygon when the polygon is set in the frame buffer 142) are derived. This is executed by associating the color information set in the texture coordinates with each part of the polygon. In this case, for a polygon partially projected on the screen area PC32, the color information is set only on the projected part.

  The region PL21 is fixed as long as the direction of the viewpoint PC31 is not changed, and a portion corresponding to the same texture coordinate of a plurality of still image data over a plurality of update timings is grasped as a portion corresponding to the region PL21. That is, the moving image corresponding to the area PL21 is pasted as a texture.

  Here, since the distance between the viewpoint PC31 and the hemispherical object PC41 in the virtual three-dimensional space is constant, the area projected on the projection screen area PC32 of the hemispherical object PC41 is also constant. Therefore, the area of the still image data to be pasted on the projected area is also constant. In other words, the area of the still image data displayed on the display screen is constant without being enlarged or reduced, and is pasted as a texture in the still image data with respect to the number of pixels of the display screen (the number of pixels for one screen of the frame buffer 142). The ratio of the number of pixels in the attached area is always constant.

  Therefore, processing for setting the color information of each part of the still image data to each part of the polygon (each pixel corresponding to the inside of the polygon when the polygon is set in the frame buffer 142), specifically, the display screen Processing such as filtering for associating the number of pixels with the number of pixels in a region to be pasted as a texture in the still image data can be fixed.

  Also, by configuring the ratio to 1: 1 (the same number of pixels), the color information of the still image data can be used as it is in each part corresponding to the polygon (the inside of the polygon when the polygon is set in the frame buffer 142). Since each pixel can be set to a corresponding pixel, processing for associating the number of pixels of the display screen with the number of pixels of a region to be pasted as a texture in the still image data can be omitted.

  When the texture mapping processing is completed, the processing of steps S610 to S613 of FIG. 14 is executed to create drawing data by projecting onto the screen area PC32, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane, and combine and draw the drawing data. The process ends.

  Here, by changing the direction of the camera, the portion of the inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32 is also changed. On the inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41, one piece of still image data is associated as a texture over one surface, and the projected portion is a part of the corresponding still image data (see FIG. 29A). The area PL21) is pasted as a texture. Therefore, before and after the camera orientation is changed, portions corresponding to different regions in the still image data are pasted as textures on the hemispherical object.

  Portions corresponding to different regions in the still image data are portions of the still image data corresponding to successive update timings created from the same moving image data, and have temporal continuity.

  As described above, in the game in which the panorama display effect is performed, the moving image data is decoded to create the still image data. Further, during the panoramic display effect, the decoded still image data is pasted as a texture on the inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41. As this still image data, data corresponding to the update timing is used, so that a moving image is pasted on the inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41.

  The area of the still image data corresponding to the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32 by the viewpoint PC31 is pasted on the hemispherical object PC41. This reduces the process of associating the coordinates inside the polygons forming the hemispherical object with the texture coordinates of the still image data as compared with the case where the still image data is pasted on the entire inner surface of the hemispherical object PC41. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

  Since the hemispherical object on which the moving image is pasted is projected onto the screen area PC32 by the viewpoint PC31, the moving image can be displayed on the display screen.

  Since the rotation angle of the camera (viewpoint PC31) is changed by the player operating the staging operation device 48, the area of the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32 is changed, and thus the projected stillness is changed. The area of the image data is also changed. Thereby, the player can change the display range of the moving image by operating the effect operation device 48, and can diversify the game.

  When the panoramic display effect is started, still image data corresponding to each update timing during the panoramic display effect is created in the expansion buffer 141 at a timing before each update timing, so that the still image data can be smoothly processed. Can be used as a texture.

  Since an area not used as a texture in the still image data (an area other than the area PL21 in FIG. 28A) is also created in the expansion buffer 141, the display range of the moving image is changed (used as a texture in the still image data). Even if there is an area (PL21 change), it is possible to display a moving image in which the update timing from the start of the panorama display to the change is reflected.

  Since the coordinates of the camera are fixed values, the distance in the virtual three-dimensional space from the viewpoint PC31 to the screen area PC32 is constant. Therefore, the area of the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32 is also constant. As a result, the size of the area of the still image data used as the texture can be kept constant, and the ratio of the number of pixels of the display screen to the texture coordinates is also kept constant, thus simplifying the processing configuration for pasting the texture. Can be achieved.

  When the panorama display effect is performed in the middle of the game time in the game time in which the panorama display effect is performed, the still image data is created from the start of the game time to the use of the still image data in the panorama display effect. Therefore, still image data can be suitably prepared, and suitable display can be performed.

  While a part of the moving image (a part of the still image data pasted as a texture) is always displayed during the panoramic display effect, the moving image is displayed when the panoramic display effect period starts. A configuration may be adopted in which the moving image is not displayed but is displayed from the middle of the moving image when the operation device for effect 48 is operated in the middle of the panorama display effect period. For example, up to the middle of the panoramic display effect period, while performing decoding of the moving image, an image using sprite image data of the content related to the moving image is displayed, and the operation device 48 for operation is operated. Alternatively, the display of a moving image using a moving image (still image data) decoded halfway may be started.

  Further, the object to which the texture of the moving image is pasted is not limited to the hemispherical object PC41, but may be a spherical or plate-like object. Even when these other objects are used, the processing configuration for pasting the texture is simplified by adopting a configuration in which the distance from the surface on which the texture is pasted in the virtual three-dimensional space to the position of the camera is constant. be able to.

  Also, the coordinates of the camera need not be fixed values. However, in the case of such a configuration, the area of the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32 is not constant, and the size of the area of the still image data used as the texture is also not constant. May be complicated. Therefore, it is preferable that the coordinates of the camera be fixed values as described in the above embodiment.

  Further, a configuration for performing two-dimensional display without using three-dimensional image data (not using still image data as texture) may be adopted. For example, a partial area of the still image data created by decoding the moving image data is written to the frame buffer 142, and the area in the still image data to be written to the frame buffer 142 when the operation device 48 is operated is changed. You may comprise so that it may change.

  Further, by developing a plurality of different moving image data in the expansion buffer 142, each still image data corresponding to each update timing is created before each update timing, and the operation device 48 for operation is operated. Thus, the still image data written to the frame buffer 142 may be switched between a plurality of moving image data.

  Still image data corresponding to each update timing may be developed in the development buffer 141 in synchronization with one or two or more update timings before each update timing.

  Further, the region PL21 may be configured to move as the update timing elapses. In this case, by setting the area to partially overlap the area PC21 set at the previous update timing, the range of the moving image pasted as the texture can be continuously changed.

  The area PC21 may be set so as to include the movement target character CH71 over a plurality of update timings. Thereby, a moving image in which the movement target character CH71 is moving can be pasted as a texture.

  Moreover, you may comprise as follows. Regardless of whether or not display is performed using image data, parameter values related to the image data are accumulated in a specific period in association with each update timing. When a specific condition is satisfied during the period, display using the image data is performed by reflecting the integrated parameter corresponding to the update timing corresponding to this case. For example, in a configuration for performing two-dimensional display, the coordinates of the sprite data are integrated according to the elapse of the update timing in a specific period, and the coordinate integrated up to that point is operated by operating the operation device 48 for staging. May be configured to display an image using the sprite data at a position on the display screen corresponding to.

  Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the developed still image data is prepared in advance, and the texture is pasted using the data. In this case, it is not necessary to consider the period for generating the still image data, so that suitable display can be performed regardless of the timing of using the still image data. In this case, when displaying over a plurality of frames, only the address of the still image data used in the first frame is set in advance, and the address of the still image data used in the subsequent frames is set for each frame. It is good also as a structure which calculates and derives.

  Further, in the panorama display effect, a configuration may be used in which still image data created in a game round at a previous timing is used.

<Configuration for displaying 3D image using connected object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a 3D image using a connected object will be described.

  A connected object is a unit of an object in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected using joints as joints, and is set to give a motion to a 3D image character by relatively displacing each part object. Have been. By using the connected object, the character of the 3D image can be smoothly moved. In addition, in view of the fact that the connected object has a skeleton and a joint, it can also be referred to as a bone model.

  The connection object is set to display a character performing a predetermined action. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, a first connected object PC35 and a second connected object PC36 are set to display a common character. Each of the first connection object PC35 and the second connection object PC36 has a plurality of connection portions CT1 and CT2, but the connection portions CT1 and CT2 are set at mutually different locations.

  More specifically, the first connected object PC35 does not have a connecting portion at the knee portion, but has a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a-1) and (a-2). The following operation can be displayed. On the other hand, the second connected object PC36 has no connecting portion at the elbow portion, but has the connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, and as shown in FIGS. 34 (b-1) and (b-2). The operation can be displayed. Since the connecting portions are set at different places as described above, it is possible to cause the character to perform different actions when the first connected object PC35 is used and when the second connected object PC36 is used. Becomes

  Note that the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 have the connection portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location, but may have a configuration that does not have the connection portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location. Further, a common texture is mapped to both the connected objects PC35 and PC36, but the texture may be set individually for each. As long as a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are prepared to allow the character to perform different actions, the positions of the connected portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of the character are arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which a character is moving using both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a connected object executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation processing for the linked object is performed in the effect calculation processing in step S504 of the task processing (FIG. 12). The calculation processing for the linked object is started when a data table corresponding to the number of games in which an effect is performed using the linked objects PC35 and PC36 is set.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If an effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is time to start an effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36. When it is not the start timing, the present arithmetic processing is terminated as it is, and when it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the following step S2004, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table. I do. By the way, at the execution timing of the processing of step S2004, the control start processing for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 has been completed in the immediately preceding control start setting processing (step S501). The control information of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is completed.

  In a succeeding step S2005, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and control information on the first connected object PC35 is updated. In step S2006, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and the control information on the second connected object PC36 is updated.

  In a succeeding step S2007, the designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, in the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, the characters are displayed using the first connected object PC35 in the first effect period and the third effect period, and the characters are displayed using the second connected object PC36 in the second effect period. After that, in step S2008, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set so as to be specified in the current drawing list.

  In a succeeding step S2009, based on the currently set data table, another object for the first effect period and an object to be updated this time are grasped. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S2009, the control start process for the object to be updated this time has been completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S501). After that, in step S2010, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated, control information relating to these other objects is updated, and then this calculation processing is ended.

  When the calculation processing for the connected objects is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are assigned to these objects PC35 and PC36. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are set. In addition, the start designation information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 should be started, and the designation information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Is done.

  On the other hand, if the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (step S2001: YES), then in step S2011, based on the currently set data table, whether the first effect period is in progress. Determine whether or not. If it is during the first effect period, after performing the processing of step S2004 to step S2010, the calculation processing ends. Incidentally, this time is during the first rendering period, so that the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 34A) with the progress of the first rendering period. Then, the calculation of the parameters is performed in step S2005.

  When the calculation processing for the connected objects is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are assigned to these objects PC35 and PC36. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are set. The designation information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2011 that it is not during the first effect period, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not it is in the second effect period based on the currently set data table. If it is during the second effect period, in step S2013, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control objects based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S2014, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC35 is updated. In step S2015, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC36 is updated. Incidentally, this time is in the second production period, so that the second connected object PC 36 performs a predetermined second operation (see FIG. 34B) with the progress of the second production period. Then, a parameter calculation is performed in step S2015.

  In a succeeding step S2016, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in a step S2017, the parameter of the second connected object PC36 of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In a succeeding step S2018, based on the currently set data table, another object for the second effect period and an object to be updated this time are grasped. Here, in the second effect period, the effect is more developed than in the first effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S501) for the object that has been increased when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period has been completed at the execution timing of the process of step S2018. After that, in step S2019, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated, control information relating to these other objects is updated, and then the present calculation processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the connected objects is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are assigned to these objects PC35 and PC36. On the other hand, the parameters of the second connected object PC36 are set. In addition, the designation information of the second effect period indicating the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2012 that it is not during the second effect period, it means that it is in the third effect period, and the process proceeds to step S2020. In step S2020, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In a succeeding step S2021, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated, and control information on the first connected object PC35 is updated. By the way, since this time is during the third production period, the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 34A) with the progress of the third production period. Then, in step S2021, parameter calculation is performed. In step S2022, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated, and the control information on the second connected object PC36 is updated.

  In a succeeding step S2023, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in a step S2024, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In a succeeding step S2025, based on the currently set data table, another object for the third effect period and an object to be updated this time are grasped. Here, in the third effect period, the effect is more developed than in the second effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S501) for the object that has been increased when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period has been completed at the execution timing of the process of step S2025. After that, in step S2026, various parameters of the other objects grasped above are calculated, control information relating to these other objects is updated, and then the present calculation processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the connected objects is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are assigned to these objects PC35 and PC36. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are set. In addition, the designation information of the third effect period indicating the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

  Next, a setting process for a connected object effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The connection object effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process of step S603 in the drawing process (FIG. 14). The setting process for the connected object effect is started when any one of the start designation of the connected object effect and the designation of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the connected object effect has been set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2102, based on the current drawing list, the address to which the first connected object PC35 is pre-transferred in the VRAM 134 is grasped, and the first connected object PC35 is read. . In step S2103, based on the current drawing list, the address at which the second connected object PC36 has been transferred in the VRAM 134 is grasped, and the second connected object PC36 is read.

  In a succeeding step S2104, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information. I do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the first connected object PC35 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the second connected object PC36.

  In the following step S2105, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36. After that, in step S2106, a setting process to the world coordinate system is performed for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is the processing time related to the start designation of the connected object effect, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Although the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, the connected portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are applied to the second connected object PC36 as they are, some pixels do not have the same coordinate designation. However, for such pixels, predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In a succeeding step S2107, other objects for the first effect period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2108, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S2109, the setting process for the object is performed on the world coordinate system, and then the setting process for presenting the connected object is completed.

  By executing the setting processing for the connected object effect as described above, the arrangement of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 starts simultaneously with respect to the world coordinate system. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged so as to overlap at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the processing of step S2104 is performed, the second connected object PC36 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering. Therefore, the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed on the display screen G. Only the PC 35 is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2101 that the start designation of the connected object effect has not been set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S2110. In step S2110, it is determined whether the designation of the first effect period has been set in the current drawing list.

  If the setting has been made, the process from step S2104 to step S2109 is executed, and then the setting process ends. In this case, in step S2106, various parameters of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from the information of the parameters set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Update.

  By executing the setting processing for the connected object effect as described above, the various parameters of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated. However, since the processing of step S2104 is executed, the two screens are displayed on the display screen G. Only the first connected object PC35 among the objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2105 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connection is performed on the display screen G so as to perform the first operation with the progress of the first effect period. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2110 that the designation of the first effect period has not been set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not designation of the second effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it has been set, in step S2112, a uniform α value setting process for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “1” which is opaque information. I do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC 36 without any change. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of one connected object PC35.

  In the following step S2113, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC36 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36. After that, in step S2114, a setting process to the world coordinate system is performed for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is a process for updating the second rendering period, various parameters of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list in correspondence with the second connected object PC36. Update by grasping from the information of the parameters that are in use. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the connected portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the second connected object PC36 are applied to the first connected object PC35 as they are, some pixels do not have the same coordinate designation. However, for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In a succeeding step S2115, other objects for the second effect period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2116, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S2117, the setting process for the object is performed on the world coordinate system, and then the setting process for the present connected object effect is finished. Here, if the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and accordingly, in step S2117, a process corresponding thereto is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the various parameters of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated. However, since the process of step S2112 is performed, the both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Only the second connected object PC36 among the objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2113 corresponds to the second connected object PC36, the second operation is performed on the display screen G so as to perform the second operation with the progress of the second effect period. The object PC 36 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2111 that the designation of the second effect period has not been set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period has been set in the current drawing list. Proceed to step S2118.

  In step S2118, a uniform α value setting process for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” which is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information. I do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied to all the pixels of the first connected object PC35 as it is, The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the second connected object PC36.

  In the subsequent step S2119, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36. After that, in step S2120, a setting process to the world coordinate system is performed for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  Since this time is a process related to the update of the third rendering period, various parameters of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the first connected object PC35. Update by grasping from the information of the parameters that are in use.

  In a succeeding step S2121, other objects for the third effect period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2122, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2123, the setting process for the object is performed on the world coordinate system, and the setting process for presenting the connected object is completed. Here, if the current processing time is the timing related to the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and therefore, in step S2123, a process corresponding thereto is executed. .

  By executing the setting processing for the connected object effect as described above, the various parameters of the both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated. However, since the processing of step S2118 is executed, the two screens are displayed on the display screen G. Only the first connected object PC35 among the objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S2119 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display screen G with the progress of the third effect period. The object PC 35 is displayed.

  Next, the content of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for describing a connected object effect. FIG. 37A shows a first effect period, FIG. 37B shows a second effect period, and FIG. 37C shows a third effect period. 37 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 37 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) 9 shows a display screen G. In FIG. 37 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image and the design are omitted, but the background image is actually displayed on the back side of each effect image. And a symbol is displayed on the near side.

  In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 37 (a-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparency processing is performed on the second connected object PC36. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37 (a-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first operation is performed with the progress of the first effect period. . Characters CH13 to CH15 indicated by "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

  In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 37 (b-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparency processing is performed on the first connected object PC35. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37 (b-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the second connected object PC36 is displayed on the display screen G, and the second operation is performed with the progress of the second effect period. .

  Here, when a comparison is made between FIG. 37 (a-2) and FIG. 37 (b-2), both characters CH12 are shown as if they have different shapes, but actually, both connected objects PC35, PC35, The same texture is mapped on the PC 36, so that the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first production period is switched to the second production period, the same, substantially the same or similar image is displayed on the display screen G for the character CH12, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the switching. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the switching, a texture may be individually set for both the connected objects PC35 and PC36.

  In the second effect period, characters CH13 to CH17 indicated by “A” to “E” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of the characters CH13 to CH17 is larger than that in the first effect period.

  In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparency processing is performed on the second connected object PC36. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first operation is performed with the progress of the third effect period. . In the third effect period, characters CH13 to CH19 indicated by "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of the characters CH13 to CH19 is larger than that in the second effect period.

  As described above, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for the common character, the connected objects PC35 and PC36 to be displayed can be switched according to the type of motion using the joint portion. . For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed with a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity of the NAND flash memory 162 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time in handling may be prolonged. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions without causing the above-described inconvenience.

  Further, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions in which the effect is corrected, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the character movement is corrected, the time required for the design is enormous. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of operation desired to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to modify the effect, the already-created connected object PC35 is required. , PC 36 need not be corrected. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while making it possible to design the pachinko machine 10 well.

  Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object is controlled by the display CPU 131 before the timing at which the connected object is switched to display the character, and the VDP 135 places the object in the world coordinate system. It is targeted. Accordingly, when the switching timing comes, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start process on the switching destination object, but execute the control update process with a smaller processing load than the control start process. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

  In particular, at the switching timing, the effect develops and the number of objects to be displayed increases, so that the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 may lose processing. However, as described above, the control update processing is performed on the switching destination object. Since it suffices to execute the process, the occurrence of the process omission can be prevented.

  In addition, since the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system and the applied uniform α value is switched between completely transparent information and opaque information, the display CPU 131 sets the uniform α value for the switching between the two. The switching may be designated, and the VDP 135 may switch the uniform α value to be applied according to the designation. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complexity of the processing configuration of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

  Also, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 with only the parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 which are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. As a result, the amount of data set in the drawing list can be reduced. In the VDP 135, the parameters of both the connected objects PC35 and PC36 may be updated in the same manner, so that the processing load of the VDP 135 is reduced.

  In the switching between the first production period to the third production period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the character for the production different from the character in which the plurality of connected objects is prepared is performed. A configuration may be newly added, or a configuration in which the display of a production character having a large processing load is started separately from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

  Further, the control start timing of the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 36 and the control start timing of the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC 35. For example, the timing may be before the timing of switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, but later than the control start timing of the first connected object PC35.

  Further, although the processing load at the switching timing of the effect period is increased as compared with the above configuration, the configuration may be such that the control of the second connected object PC36 is started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are not arranged at the same time in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to perform the control of switching the display target by adjusting the α value uniformly.

  Further, for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 which are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display target may be switched by switching the rendering target instead of adjusting the α value uniformly. In this case, the connected object that is not the display target is not rendered, so that the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

  Further, a configuration in which the third production period is not provided may be adopted, and a configuration in which a production period longer than the fourth production period may be set. Further, a configuration in which three or more connected objects are prepared for one character may be adopted.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 20, the object can be masked using the Z buffer 143. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform a masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set mask data, which is a type of image data, in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26, the drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is separately saved, and the processing data of the player is transmitted to the operation device 48 for effect in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large. When the display mode is switched based on the above operation, the separately stored data is used. As a result, even if the switching of the display mode is repeatedly executed in a short time, it is possible to prevent the processing from being dropped.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 33, a part of a moving image can be pasted as a texture on a portion of the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32. Further, by operating the operation device 48 for production, the portion of the hemispherical object PC41 projected on the screen area PC32 is changed, and another part of the moving image can be pasted as a texture on the changed portion. it can. In this case, since the moving image is expanded in the expansion buffer 141 at a timing before the moving image is pasted as a texture, the moving image can be smoothly used as a texture.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, the connected objects to be displayed according to the type of motion using the joint portion. The objects PC35 and PC36 can be switched. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed with a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity of the NAND flash memory 162 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time in handling may be prolonged. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions without causing the above-described inconvenience.

  Further, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions in which the effect is corrected, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the character movement is corrected, the time required for the design is enormous. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 according to the type of operation desired to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to modify the effect, the already-created connected object PC35 is required. , PC 36 need not be corrected. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while making it possible to design the pachinko machine 10 well.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration according to the present embodiment.

  The configuration shown in FIG. 38 includes a main control device 50 as in the first embodiment. In addition, the main control device 50 includes a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, and a power supply that has a function of supplying power to each device including the main control device 50 and that drives and controls the game ball firing mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the main display unit 33 that displays the result of the game times, and the display unit 34 for the special item that displays the result of the election opening lottery are electrically connected. In addition, a voice light emission control device 60 is provided which drives and controls the various light emitting units 35, 36, 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 and receives an operation signal from the effect operation device 48. Further, a display control device 70 that controls the symbol display device 31 based on a command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 is provided.

  The hardware configuration of the display control device 70 is different from that of the display control device 130 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the hardware configuration of the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected via a bus to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Is done. Note that receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to a configuration in which a command is directly received from the sound emission control device 60, but also includes a structure in which a command relayed to a relay board is received. It is.

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and stores various data stored in the memory module 74 into the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 based on a command received from the audio light emission control device 60. A transfer instruction to transfer is issued. The display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and issues a drawing instruction to output an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

  The memory module 74 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also stores sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, background data, and moving images. This is storage means for storing in advance various image data (image information) including image data. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, and in detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. When the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. I have. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described later in detail.

  The work RAM 73 is a storage unit for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to a DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is performed well. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 72 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding data. In detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to the SDRAM, and another RAM such as a DRAM, an SRAM, or a dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is performed well. The VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 75 includes an expansion buffer 81, to which image data is transferred from the memory module 74 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the processing in the VDP 76 using the image data. The VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit for operating an image processing device 31b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. The VDP 76 is also called a “drawing chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 are provided by a drawing list. The control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Further, the configuration may be such that the control program is read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above processing, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data developed in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Note that the drawing data for one frame is the data required to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. That means.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing one frame of drawing data. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas (unit setting areas) corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. ing. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, one byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  By providing the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b in the frame buffer 82, in a situation where drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. Then, creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame areas is executed. That is, the frame buffer 82 employs the double buffer method.

  The display circuit 94 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the output port 78 connected. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. The display circuit 94 includes a scaler 97 and an image signal output section 98 for generating and outputting the image signal. The scaler 97 and the image signal output unit 98 will be described later in detail.

  The moving image decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The contents of the processing will be described later in detail.

<Specific configuration of memory module 74>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 74 will be described.

  FIG. 39 is a block diagram for explaining a hardware configuration of the memory module 74. As shown in FIG. 39, the memory module 74 is configured by integrating the controller 101 and the NAND flash memory 102 into one package. The NAND flash memory 102 is provided with a memory cell array. The memory cell array includes a control program area 103 storing control program data of the display CPU 72 and a symbol display device 31 for displaying an image on the symbol display device 31. An image data area 104 storing image data to be used is provided.

  The controller 101 includes a main body I / F 111 for transmitting and receiving data to and from the display CPU 72 as a transfer instruction source and the work RAM 73 and VRAM 75 as a data transfer destination, and a storage I / F 111 for transmitting and receiving data to and from the NAND flash memory 102. / F 112, a controller CPU 113, a control ROM 114 and a control RAM 115, which are control units for performing data control processing in the controller 101 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 102, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 113. A transfer execution circuit 116 for reading data from the memory 102; a cache memory 117 for temporarily storing data read by the transfer execution circuit 116; An error correction circuit 118 for performing error detection and correction of errors detected in data read from, and a.

  Generally, even when a block including a defect exists in the memory cell array, the NAND flash memory 102 is used while avoiding the block. The presence / absence and location of the bad block differ for each individual. Therefore, it is necessary to associate the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 102, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 113.

  More specifically, the control ROM 114 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates a logical address with an address of each page of a physical block. The address designation command received from the display CPU 72 is temporarily stored in the address designation buffer of the control RAM 115. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115, the controller CPU 113 reads the address management table from the control ROM 114, and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, a transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 113 to the transfer execution circuit 116, and the data is transferred by the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data of the physical address according to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. The processing is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred to the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75.

  Incidentally, a memory that can be randomly accessed, such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory, is used as the control ROM 114. The cache memory 117 has a higher read speed (transfer speed) than that of the NAND flash memory 102 when compared when reading data of the same capacity. Specifically, the semiconductor memory device includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and storing data. More specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to a DRAM, and another RAM such as an SRAM may be used.

  The memory module 74 is provided with a boot memory 119 in which boot data for initial startup in the display CPU 72 is stored in advance. As the boot memory 119, a mask ROM is used so that random access is possible, and the read speed (transfer speed) is higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102 when compared when reading data of the same capacity. Used. Note that the boot memory 119 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data reading speed is higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102. May be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit having

  The storage capacity of the boot memory 119 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same as, substantially the same as, or similar to the storage capacity of one page in the NAND flash memory 102. Boot data for initial startup is stored in the boot memory 119 in advance, and when processing at the time of initial startup is executed in the display CPU 72, data is not read from the NAND flash memory 102 but from the boot memory 119. Is read. As the boot data for the initial startup, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 and an instruction code for transferring data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 to the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 are set.

  The controller 101 performs a data transfer process. The contents of the data transfer process are the same as the data transfer process (FIG. 7) of the controller 161 in the first embodiment. The operation and effect of the execution of the data transfer process are the same as those of the first embodiment.

<Development buffer 81 of work RAM 73 and VRAM 75>
Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 74 will be described.

  First, the work RAM 73 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 38, while the situation in which the transferred data may be used once continues even after the data has been used once, as shown in FIG. A normal area 73a for storing and holding data while the supply is continued, and a change area 73b to be overwritten when other data is transferred after use are provided.

  Program data necessary for the display CPU 72 to proceed with the main processing (FIG. 9), the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11), the command interrupt processing, and the like are written in the common area 73a. By providing the service area 73a, the main processing, the V interrupt processing, the command interrupt processing, etc., which are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals, can be started smoothly.

  If it is necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 73b, all or a part of the data in the common area 73a is restored within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing by the display CPU 72. It is good also as a structure erased temporarily. In this case, the data needs to be returned to the regular area 73a by the time the corresponding processing is started.

  In the change area 73b, program data necessary for executing a subroutine activated as necessary in each of the processes is written. The program data required for the next subroutine to be executed may be transferred to the change area 73b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed. This is done so as not to erase. By providing the change area 73b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 73 is smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  By the way, unlike the RAM 54 of the main control device 50, no backup power is supplied to the work RAM 73. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 73 up to that point is deleted or destroyed.

  Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

  Even if the transferred image data is once used, the power supply to the expansion buffer 81 is continued while the situation in which there is a possibility that the transferred image data may be used is continued. A normal area 81a for storing and holding the image data while the image data is being used, and a change area 81b that is overwritten when another image data is transferred after use are provided.

  In the common area 81a, background data and symbol sprite data used when starting symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 are written, and an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined irregularity or abnormality is detected. The abnormality notification data used for displaying is written. Since the common area 81a is provided, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly given from the display CPU 72, the VDP 76 can satisfactorily draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 81a. it can.

  If it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data exceeding the storage capacity of the change area 81b, all or one of the common areas 81a is not hindered from displaying the image smoothly on the symbol display device 31. A configuration may be adopted in which data of a copy is temporarily deleted. In this case, it is necessary that the restoration of the image data to the common area 81a has been performed by the timing of drawing the corresponding image.

  In the change area 81b, effect sprite data and moving image data such as effect characters are written. Further, image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 81b during the execution of the predetermined effect, but this transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect during the execution. Not to be done. By providing the change area 81b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 81 is smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

  Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, no backup power is supplied to the VRAM 75. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 75 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 72>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 72 will be described.

  In the display CPU 72, the main process is started when the supply of the operation power is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. The contents of the main processing are the same as the main processing (FIG. 9) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment, except for the following points.

  The initial image data for which a transfer request is made in step S307 and the ordinary image data for which a transfer request is made in step S314 are 2D image data. The various parameters grasped in step S311 include the address information of the area where the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, the information of the frame areas 82a and 82b where the drawing data is to be created using the initial image data, In the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, information on coordinates when writing initial image data, information on scale when writing the initial image data, and uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing the initial image data Information is included.

  The execution of the main processing by the display CPU 72 permits the execution of the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing. The contents of the command interrupt processing are the same as in the first embodiment. The contents of the V interrupt processing are the same as those of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11) executed by the display CPU 131 of the first embodiment, except for the task processing in step S407.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, a basic process executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  The VDP 76 sets the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, A process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 82a and 82b is executed.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. The process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly started by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. FIGS. 40A to 40C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b is to be created for an image of one frame related to the drawing list, is set. I have. In the header information, information on whether or not decoding is specified and information on an address to which moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set. Also, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set. Further, information on a drawing order of each image data and information of each image data are set. Parameter information is set. In detail, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number information, and information of image data to be used in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information is set. Also, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be located on the back side of the display screen G in the image for one frame are to be drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 40A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written into the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b, and then the sprite data A and the sprite data B are written so as to overlap the background data. In addition, in the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the near side in the order of the background image → the effect image → the design.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),... More specifically, the background data parameter P (1) is, as shown in FIG. 40B, the address information of the area to which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75 and the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written. Information of coordinates indicating the position of the image data, information of a rotation angle indicating a rotation angle on a two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and frame sizes 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the initial state of the background data. , The scale information indicating the magnification at the time of writing, the uniform α value information indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) at the time of writing the background data, and the α data designation indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the target of application. Information and are set. The types of the above parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  Here, the coordinate information is not individually set for all pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In the VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinates is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinates. . Thus, the display CPU 72 can reduce the information capacity of the information of the coordinates to be designated for one image data. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates for all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be, for example, a pixel at an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the pixels at the corners as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

  The uniform α value is transmissive information applied to all dots of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. The α data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, in a situation where the transparency of the background data and the sprite data need not be finely controlled in pixel units, but should be uniformly controlled for all pixels. By being able to cope with a uniform α value, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying the α data, the transmittance can be finely controlled in pixel units.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the creation of the drawing data specified by the drawing list already received has been completed. If the drawing data has been created, it is determined in step S2202 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed in step S2203.

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from which information of the target buffer included in the drawing list which frame area 82a or 82b is to be used to create an image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time, and the grasp is made. The frame area that has been set is set as a drawing data creation target. Also, the presence / absence of the decoding designation is grasped, and if there is the decoding designation, the address to which the moving picture data to be decoded is transferred is grasped, and the moving picture decoder is operated so as to decode the moving picture data. . Details of this decoding will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S2204, a content grasping process is executed. In the content comprehension processing, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color pallet data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. In a succeeding step S2205, a writing process is executed. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation targets based on the grasp result of the content grasp process in step S2204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the drawing data specified by the drawing list already received is being created, a process of updating the drawing list counter is executed in step S2206. Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S2204 and S2205 is performed on the switched image data. That is, by performing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image for one frame specified by one drawing list is created.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and may be a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each of the processing times, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each of the rendering processing times.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or after the processing in step S2205 is performed, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the display circuit 94 has completed outputting one frame of image signal. If the drawing has not been completed, the main drawing process is terminated as it is. If completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72, and then the main drawing process is terminated.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is employed as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data one frame after the frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit for alternately switching the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. Is regulated so that the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are not output targets for outputting image signals.

<Task Processing in Display CPU 72>
Next, task processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described.

  As described above, the task process is executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72 to grasp information necessary for creating a drawing list. In this case, in the task processing, not only the individual images included in the range of the image for one frame but also the individual images not included in the range of the image for one frame are to be controlled.

  Referring to FIG. 42, the range of virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 to be calculated by display CPU 72 will be described. In FIG. 42, the range defined by the dashed line is the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, and the range defined by the dashed line is the drawing range PL2 for one frame defined by the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  As shown in FIG. 42, both the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 for one frame are defined to have a rectangular shape, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is defined so that the virtual area defined by the drawing range PL2 for one frame is larger than that of the drawing range PL2, and the range is defined to be a width including the entire drawing range PL2 for one frame. Have been. This size is set to a size that allows a plurality of drawing ranges PL2 for one frame to be arranged in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

  The display CPU 72 performs the calculation of the individual image using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as a calculation target range, and the reference coordinates are set as a position reference in the calculation. The reference coordinates are arbitrary as long as they are defined as one dot out of the dots included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the initial setting position. In this state, the dot is defined as the dot at the upper left corner of the drawing range PL2. Note that the initial setting position is a position where the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the center of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1.

  Since the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as described above, the display CPU 72 does not include the individual image in one frame image, but includes the individual image in one frame image at the subsequent update timing. Can be started in advance. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, it is possible to execute an effect in which the viewpoint is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. That is, the position of the drawing range PL2 for one frame can be displaced from the above-mentioned initial setting position in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 based on the operation of the operation device 48 for staging. The calculation for performing this effect is executed in the task processing of the display CPU 72.

  Hereinafter, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether it is a viewpoint switchable period. The viewpoint switchable period is set, for example, as a period from the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 31 to the stop of the variable display of the symbol on the first symbol row Z1 or the next symbol row Z2. May be set as a period during which the notice display is performed on the symbol display device 31, or may be set as a period during which the reach display is performed on the symbol display device 31. 31 may be set as a period during which a specific reach effect is being performed, or may be set as a period during which the jackpot effect is being performed on the symbol display device 31. The information as to whether or not it is the viewpoint switchable period is set in the data table.

  If it is the viewpoint changeable period, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the state is the viewpoint change state. The viewpoint switching state refers to a state in which the drawing range PL2 for one frame is set at a position different from the initial setting position, and a viewpoint switching flag is set in the work RAM 73 when the viewpoint is switched. As a result, the viewpoint switching state is established, and when the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position, the flag is cleared and the viewpoint switching state is released.

  If it is not in the viewpoint switching state, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not there is a viewpoint switching instruction. The presence or absence of the viewpoint switching instruction is determined by determining whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the operation of the staging operation device 48 as described above, and further, in correspondence with the fact that a plurality of positions at which the viewpoint can be switched are set, The operation generation command includes information on the position to be switched. Whether or not the operation generation command has been received is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 11). If the operation generation command has been received, it is determined in step S403 that the operation generation command has been received. The indicated flag is set in the work RAM 73, and information corresponding to the type of the operation generation command is set in the work RAM 73.

  If there is a viewpoint switching instruction, in step S2304, a coordinate change process of the drawing range PL2 is executed. In the coordinate change processing, it is determined which information included in the operation generation command corresponding to the current switching instruction is information instructing which coordinate to change, and the drawing range PL2 moves to the coordinate corresponding to the instruction. To update the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2. In addition, in the coordinate change processing, a viewpoint switching state is set.

  On the other hand, if the viewpoint is already switched (step S2302: NO), it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the release condition is satisfied. Whether or not the release condition is satisfied is determined by determining whether or not an operation release command has been received from the sound emission control device 60. The specific processing configuration for determining whether or not an operation release command has been received is the same as that for the operation generation command.

  If the cancellation condition is satisfied, the process returns to step S2306. In the return process, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position. In addition, the viewpoint switching state is canceled in the return processing. The process of step S2306 is also performed when it is determined that the period is not the viewpoint switchable period (step S2301: NO).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the process in step S2304 is performed, and if a negative determination is made in step S2305, or after the process in step S2306 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, it is determined whether an individual image to be controlled is present. The individual images to be controlled are shown in the currently set data table, and are set in association with the positions of the plurality of types of drawing ranges PL2 during the viewpoint switching period. In addition, the individual images to be controlled are not all individual images that can be arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but the currently set drawing range PL2 and the specified number of dots vertically and horizontally from the drawing range PL2. An individual image that is included in the outer range and has not been set as a control target is extracted.

  If there are individual images to be controlled, in step S2308, it is determined whether a plurality of individual images to be controlled are present. If there is not a plurality of such individual images, the single individual image is grasped as a control start target, and the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing the processing of steps S2309 to S2311.

  If there are a plurality of images (step S2308: YES), in step S2309, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled, at least part of which is included in the currently set drawing range PL2. Is determined. That is, in the configuration in which the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set in the display CPU 72 as described above and an individual image outside the currently set drawing range PL2 can be set as a control target, the individual control start target Since the image includes not only the image in the drawing range PL2 but also the image outside the drawing range PL2, it is determined in step S2309 which one of the images falls. Incidentally, the coordinates of the control start position of the individual image included in the control start target are set in the currently set data table, and the coordinates of the control start position and the currently set coordinates of the drawing range PL2 are set. , The relative position of the individual image included in the control start target with respect to the drawing range PL2 is grasped.

  If there is an individual image of a control start target that is at least partially included in the drawing range PL2, in step S2310, the individual image is grasped as the current control start target. In this case, when a plurality of individual images to be controlled are included in the drawing range PL2, all of them are grasped as the control start targets. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the individual image may be outside the drawing range PL2 so that a situation in which there are a plurality of individual images to be control-started within the drawing range PL2 in one process of the task processing does not occur. May be set as a control start target in a processing cycle with a low processing load.

  On the other hand, when the individual image of the control start target is not included in the drawing range PL2, a plurality of control start targets exist outside the drawing range PL2. In this case, in step S2311, the individual image on the side closer to the currently set drawing range PL2 among the individual images outside the drawing range PL2 is grasped as the control start target.

  Incidentally, as a result of the processing in steps S2310 and S2311, an individual image whose control start timing is postponed is grasped as a control start target in the next and subsequent processing rounds. In this case, when an individual image displayed as if moving in a predetermined direction at each image update timing is postponed, the control start parameter of the individual image including the control start position is changed by one update timing. It is updated on the data table to be in the advanced state. As a result, even if the control start timing is postponed, the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position and state at a predetermined timing.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2308, or after executing any one of steps S2310 and S2311, the control start processing in steps S2312 to S2314 is executed. In the control start process, first, in step S2312, the work RAM 73 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and searches for an individual image grasped as a control start target. An empty buffer area is secured so as to correspond to 1.

  In a succeeding step S2313, an initialization process is executed for all the empty buffer areas secured in the step S2312. In a succeeding step S2314, a control start parameter corresponding to the individual image is set in the empty buffer area initialized in the step S2313. The control start parameters include the position, rotation angle, and size of the target individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When there are a plurality of individual images grasped as control start targets, control start parameters are individually set for each free buffer area corresponding to each individual image.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2307 or after the processing of step S2314 is performed, the control update processing of steps S2315 to S2318 is performed. In the control update process, first, in step S2315, a background calculation process is performed. In the arithmetic processing for the background, the control update target of this time is grasped from the backmost still image and the background sprite which constitute the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, a rotation angle, a scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with each individual image.

  In a succeeding step S2316, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, among the effect sprites constituting an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect, the current control update target is grasped. Further, the above various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with each individual image.

  In a succeeding step S2317, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be subjected to the fluctuation display in each game time. Further, the above various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with each individual image.

  By the way, in each processing of steps S2315 to S2317, animation data set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is used. The animation data is determined according to the type of the individual image. The animation data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance, and is transferred to the work RAM 73 in advance by the time when the display CPU 72 needs to read the animation data.

  After that, in step S2318, the process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed, and then this task process ends. In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, the individual images included in the image of one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction among the individual images subjected to the control update by the processes of steps S2315 to S2317 are determined. Execute the process to grasp.

  The determination is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to information on the currently set drawing range PL2 and information on coordinates, rotation angles, and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. Thus, the individual images to be displayed in the drawing list need not be all the individual images for which control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed. There is no need to uselessly perform rendering processing on individual images that are not to be displayed even if they are not selected. Thereby, the processing load of the VDP 76 is reduced.

  As described above, for the individual image for which control is to be started, “search for empty buffer area” in step S2312, “initialization of secured buffer area” in step S2313, and “setting of parameters for control start” in step S2314. "And the" procedure for updating various parameters "in any of steps S2315 to S2317 are executed, whereas for the individual image only for the control update target, the" procedure for updating various parameters "in any of steps S2315 to S2317 is executed. Only the "update procedure" is performed. Therefore, the processing load of the individual image for which the control is to be started is greater than that of the individual image for which only the control is to be updated. Note that the processing of step S2314 may not be performed, and the processing that replaces the individual image targeted for control may be performed in any of steps S2315 to S2317.

  Here, as described above, it is necessary to update the image at a period of 20 msec, and the image is updated by transmitting the drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP 76. Then, the task processing is performed for a period of time required to create a drawing list and received by the VDP 76 for 20 msec, and a period required to create drawing data corresponding to one frame of image based on the drawing list. Must be completed in a period shorter than the period from which In such a situation, as described above, the processing for the control start has a larger processing load than the processing for the control update. Therefore, if there are a large number of individual images to be the control start in one processing, the task processing is completed. There is a possibility that processing will be missed in time. On the other hand, the processing from step S2308 to step S2311 is executed, and the control start timings are dispersed so that a large number of individual images as control start targets do not exist in one processing cycle. It does not occur.

  Although detailed description is omitted, a situation in which the individual image once controlled is not displayed within the range of a predetermined number of frames, such as a position deviating from the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. Is excluded from the control target when. If it becomes necessary to perform the control on the individual image again, the control start process is performed again.

  Next, how the individual images are controlled in the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how each individual image becomes a control target. FIG. 44 (a) shows a case where viewpoint switching is not performed, and FIG. ) Shows a case where the viewpoint is switched.

  When the viewpoint is not switched, the drawing range PL2 is fixed as shown in FIG. In this case, for the individual images PC1 to PC3 included in the drawing range PL2, the control is to be started at a timing earlier than the timing shown in FIG. 44A, so that only the control update processing is executed.

  On the other hand, since the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 outside the drawing range PL2 but included in the control target range PL3 are not yet control targets, these individual images PC4 and individual images PC5 are included in the control start target. It will be. However, if the processing load is increased when the control start processing is performed on both individual images PC4 and PC5, the control start processing is preferentially executed on the individual image PC4 close to the drawing range PL2, The control start process for the image PC 5 is performed in the next task process. In addition, the individual images PC6 and PC7 included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 but outside the control target range PL3 are not included in the control start target, and the control start processing is not executed.

  When there are a plurality of individual targets outside the drawing range PL2 as control start targets, the control start process is executed with priority from the side closer to the drawing range PL2. Thus, in a configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed, the frequency at which the control start processing is executed at a timing when at least a part is included in the drawing range PL2 is reduced.

  When the viewpoint is switched, as shown in FIG. 44B, the drawing range PL2 was the first position defined by the two-dot chain line in the previous task processing, whereas the current task In the process, the drawing range PL2 is displaced to the second position defined by the solid line. In this case, a part of the drawing range PL2 at the second position is included in the drawing range PL2 at the first position, and accordingly, the individual image PC8 becomes the first drawing at the time of the previous task processing. Is at least partly included in the drawing range PL2 at the position of. Therefore, in the present task processing, it is not necessary to execute the control start processing for the individual image PC8.

  On the other hand, since the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10 are newly included in the drawing range PL2 displaced to the second position, the control start processing is given priority over both the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10. Is executed to be the control target. In this case, although the individual image PC11 is newly included in the control target range for the drawing range PL2 at the second position, the control start process is executed with priority for the individual images PC9 and PC10. This time, it is excluded from the control start targets.

  Even when the control start timing is dispersed, if the control start process needs to be performed on the individual images included in the drawing range PL2, that is, the individual images included in the image of one frame, the control start process is performed. It is executed with priority and will not be postponed. As a result, an inconvenience such that an individual image that should be originally included in an image for one frame is not included does not occur.

  In particular, in a configuration in which an effect in which the viewpoint is switched when the operation device for operation 48 is operated by the player is executed, an individual image that has not been controlled before may suddenly be controlled. It can happen. On the other hand, as described above, since the control start process is executed with priority on the individual images included in the image for one frame, the effect of the viewpoint switching can be achieved without causing the above-described inconvenience. Can be performed well.

  Note that the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which all the individual images included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are control start targets in the display CPU 72. In this case, the individual images for the entire range should be set as the control start targets while the individual images included in the drawing range are given the highest priority as the control start targets and the side closer to the drawing range is given the next priority. Thus, control can be started in advance for individual images in a wider range than the above-described configuration, while variably performing the control start timing.

  However, in this configuration, since the number of individual images to be updated by the control in the display CPU 72 is larger than that in the above-described configuration, the processing load of the control update process in each processing increases. In order to reduce the processing load of the control update processing, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a part of the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as a control start target as in the above configuration.

  Further, the configuration may be such that the switching destination of the drawing range is determined in advance. In this configuration, it is preferable that the control start processing of the individual image to be included in the drawing range of the switching destination is performed in advance when the switching becomes possible or at a timing earlier than that. . Thus, even if the drawing range is switched at an arbitrary timing, it can be dealt with.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the drawing range is not switched. In this case, the presence or absence of the control start target may be determined based on the fixed drawing range, so that the processing configuration for performing the confirmation is simplified. In this configuration, as the individual image to be controlled at the timing when it is displayed on the display screen G, for example, an individual image displayed so as to move in the depth direction of the display screen G can be considered.

  Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the background image, the design, or the like is changed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 or the like. Even in this case, the control start timing can be satisfactorily dispersed.

<Configuration for Displaying Scroll Background Image>
Next, a configuration for displaying a scroll background image will be described.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a scroll background image is set as a type of background image. The scroll background image is a background image displayed so as to be scrolled and changed in a predetermined direction, specifically, a horizontal direction with the passage of time. The scroll background image is set to have a plurality of frames of background images in the scroll direction. Further, the scroll background image has a start point portion and an end point portion, and the image of the start point portion is set to have continuity with respect to the image of the end point portion. As a result of the scroll display, if the scroll background image reaches the end point, the start point is displayed continuously. That is, the scroll background image is repeatedly displayed so as to go around.

  Scroll background data PD1 is set as image data for displaying a scroll background image. The scroll background data PD1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for describing the scroll background data PD1.

  The scroll background data PD1 is still image data, and as shown in FIG. 45A, the vertical size is set to one frame or larger, and the horizontal size as the scroll direction is , For a plurality of frames. The scroll background data PD1 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided part data PD2 to PD10. These divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so as to divide the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction, and the scroll background data PD1 is configured by arranging in the scroll direction.

  The contents of the images set in the divided part data PD2 to PD10 are different from each other. However, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction is set so that the content of the image has continuity in the scroll direction.

  Each of the divided part data PD2 to PD10 is set to have the same size in the vertical and horizontal directions. In this case, the size in the horizontal direction is set smaller than one frame, and in order to form a background image for one frame, a part of the divided part data PD2 to PD10 and a plurality of divided part data are set side by side. There is a need to. Specifically, when the divided part data is set with the initial size, two or three divided part data are arranged so that the background image for one frame can be formed so that the background image for one frame can be formed. The size has been set. The background image for one frame may be formed by always arranging three divided part data, or by arranging four or more divided part data, and the background image may be formed by one divided part data. A configuration capable of forming an image may be employed.

  Further, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction are set so as to overlap each other at the boundary portion. A description will be given by taking divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction as an example.

  As shown in FIGS. 45B and 45C, each pixel constituting one line in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the end point of the divided part data PD5 on the scroll destination side, and the scroll rear side. At the start point of the divided part data PD6, the coordinates of the pixels constituting one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction are set to the same coordinates in the scroll direction when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b. The same data is set in each line. When both the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are drawn, the respective lines overlap. That is, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction, the overlapping area PA1 is set at the boundary.

  The operation resulting from the setting of the overlapping area PA1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 46 (a-1) and (a-2) show the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, and FIGS. 46 (b-1) and (b-2) show the overlapping area PA1 being set. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 that are not performed are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b-1), in the case of the divided part data in which the overlapping area PA1 is not set, when both the divided part data are enlarged from the default size and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, FIG. As shown in b-2), a gap may be generated at the boundary between both divided parts data. For example, when enlarging the divided part data, the above-described phenomenon occurs due to the contents of the linear interpolation executed when each pixel of the enlarged divided part data is made to correspond to each dot of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Since the drawing data is not set for the dots in the gaps as described above, the background color is displayed on the dots on the display screen G. Then, it is not desirable in appearance.

  On the other hand, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set as shown in FIG. 46 (a-1), the two divided part data PD5 and PD6 are enlarged from the default size to the frame area. Even if the image is drawn on 82a and 82b, as shown in FIG. 46 (a-2), no gap is generated because the overlapping area PA1 exists on the boundary between the two divided part data PD5 and PD6. Thus, an image can be displayed using the divided part data PD5 and PD6 without causing the above-described inconvenience.

  In addition, a portion constituting one overlap area PA1 is one line of pixels in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. Thereby, the data capacity allocated for providing the overlapping area PA1 can be minimized.

  Further, the same data is set in a portion forming one overlap area PA1 in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. Thereby, when each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6 is individually enlarged and set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, even if the overlapping part thereof is slightly shifted, the shifted part is within the same data range. A shift occurs, and even in this case, a favorable display mode can be obtained.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a scroll background calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the scroll background is performed in the background calculation processing in step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 43). The calculation processing for the scroll background is started when information on the scroll background is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2401, scroll position information is updated. The scroll position information is information for specifying which region in the scroll background image is to be displayed on the display screen G. The scroll position information is determined by numerical information of a scroll counter provided in the work RAM 73. Many frame portions included in the scroll background image correspond one-to-one with each numerical value of the scroll position information. In step S2401, the numerical information of the scroll counter is updated so as to be incremented by one.

  In the following step S2402, the scale of the current background image is grasped. In the subsequent step S2403, the divided part data included in the display range is grasped by referring to the scroll position information updated in step S2401 and the scale grasped in step S2402. In this case, at least two pieces of divided part data are grasped. Incidentally, the control start processing for these divided part data has already been completed.

  In the subsequent step S2404, of the divided part data grasped in step S2403, the coordinates of the divided part data closest to the scroll destination are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the divided part data. The control information is updated by writing to the secured area.

  In the following step S2405, as coordinates of the next divided part data, coordinates for generating an overlapping area with respect to the adjacent divided parts data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and information of the derived coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73. Then, the information for control is updated by writing in the area secured in correspondence with the divided part data.

  In a succeeding step S2406, it is determined whether or not the coordinates have been grasped for all of the divided part data grasped in the step S2403. If there is unidentified divided part data, the process of step S2405 is performed on the divided part data. If there is no unrecognized divided part data, the process advances to step S2407.

  In step S2407, information on parameters other than the size and coordinates is updated for the divided part data grasped in step S2403. After that, in step S2408, after the scroll background designation information is stored, the calculation processing ends.

  When the above processing is executed, the divided part data grasped in step S2403 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408). Also, scroll background designation information is set in this drawing list.

  Next, the setting process of the divided part data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the divided part data is executed in the content grasping process of step S2204 in the drawing process (FIG. 41). Further, the setting process of the divided part data is started when the scroll background is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S2501, the type of the divided part data to be drawn and the address to which the divided part data is transferred in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Then, in step S2502, the scale of each divided part data is grasped, in step S2503, the coordinates of each divided part data are grasped, and in step S2504, other parameters are grasped.

  By executing the setting process of the divided part data, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), each of the divided part data is applied to the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in a state where the parameters are applied. Is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that a background image using each of the divided part data is displayed on the display screen G.

  Here, a part of the divided part data to be drawn is protruded from the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. For example, as shown in FIG. 45A, when three pieces of divided part data PD2 to PD4 are drawn in an area PL4 for one frame sectioned by a two-dot chain line, in each of the divided part data PD2 to PD4. There is a portion protruding from the area PL4 for one frame. With the VDP 76, when rendering image data in the frame areas 82a and 82b, it is not possible to extract and render only some of the pixels. Therefore, the protruding portions are not written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the same processing as that performed when rendering the non-protruding portions in the frame areas 82a and 82b is performed on the pixels of the protruding portions. You.

  As described above, by storing scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames in advance as a plurality of divided part data, the size that can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is set to be excessively large. You don't have to. Also, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time will be lengthened. However, since the transfer can be performed in units of divided part data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

  The VDP 76 also performs the drawing process on the portions that protrude from the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same manner as the portions that do not protrude, but protrudes when the scroll background data is used as a single image data. Since there are many locations, the processing load increases. On the other hand, by using only the divided part data at least partially included in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the protruding portions are suppressed, and the processing load can be reduced. The display CPU 72 does not derive parameter information for the divided part data that is not to be displayed. Thereby, the processing load on the display CPU 72 is reduced.

  In addition, by setting the divided part data small and increasing the divided part data used in each frame, it is possible to suppress the portion that protrudes from the frame regions 82a and 82b. However, as the divided part data increases, the display CPU 72 Therefore, the image data for which the parameters are to be calculated increases, and the processing load on the display CPU 72 increases. On the other hand, since the size of each divided part data is set so that two to three divided part data are used in each frame, the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced.

  Note that the scroll direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be a vertical direction or an oblique direction.

  In addition, when focusing on the effect that the data capacity of a single image data can be suppressed, a configuration in which a plurality of divided part data are set as image data for displaying a series of images may be essential. The divided part data may not have the overlapping area PA1. In this case, if the individual size adjustment of each divided part data is not performed, the possibility of a gap is reduced.

  Further, the overlap area PA1 may not be constituted by each column of pixels, but may be constituted by a plurality of columns of pixels. In this case, although the data capacity allocated to the overlapping area PA1 increases, the generation of the gap can be more reliably prevented. Further, the configuration may be such that the same data is not set in a portion configuring one overlap area PA1.

<Configuration for Displaying Displacement Background Image of Small Unit Group>
Next, a configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a displacement background image of a small unit group is set as one type of background image. The displacement background image of the small unit group is a background image displayed such that a large number of small unit images are displaced in a predetermined direction with the passage of time in front of the rearmost image. Although an image of a flower villa is set as the small unit image, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rain image or a snow image may be set.

  As the image data for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group, the small unit group background data PD11 is set. The small unit group background data PD11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for describing the small unit group background data PD11.

  The small unit group background data PD11 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 as shown in FIG. Each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has a plurality (for example, four) of divided part data.

  The number of divided part data included in each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 is the same, and the order in which the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 are read in order to display an image for one frame is predetermined. That is, in each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15, the divided part data set as the first order is arranged at the corresponding position, whereby the displacement background image for one frame is displayed and the next order is displayed. By disposing the divided part data set as the corresponding positions at the corresponding positions, a displacement background image for the next frame is displayed. This is sequentially performed for each combination of the orders.

  Data for a plurality of small unit images is set in each divided part data. The data set for these small unit images is different for each divided part data, and the combination of the divided part data is sequentially selected in the above-mentioned predetermined order, and as shown in FIG. As shown, each of the large number of small unit images is displayed so as to be displaced in a predetermined direction as time passes.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a displacement background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the displacement background is executed in the background calculation process of step S2315 in the task process (FIG. 43).

  First, in step S2601, the value of the parts counter for specifying the order of the divided parts data corresponding to the current frame is updated. This parts counter is provided in the work RAM 73. In a succeeding step S2602, a divided data group to be set is grasped. For this determination, a target counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to.

  In the following step S2603, the divided part data to be controlled is grasped from the information on the order shown in the parts counter and the information on the divided data group to be processed shown in the target counter. In the subsequent step S2604, control is performed by calculating and deriving the parameters of the divided part data grasped in step S2603, and writing the information of the derived parameters into an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the divided part data. Update information for

  In the following step S2605, it is determined whether or not the setting of all the divided part data corresponding to the current order has been completed. If the setting has not been completed, in step S2606, the target counter is updated to update the setting target to the next divided data group, and then the processing from step S2602 is executed. On the other hand, if the setting has been completed, the displacement background designation information is stored in step S2607, and then the computation process for the displacement background ends.

  When the above processing is executed, each of the divided part data corresponding to the current order is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408). In the drawing list, displacement background designation information is set. Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 76 draws each divided part data in the frame areas 82a and 82b according to the drawing list. Then, the output of the drawing list and the drawing corresponding thereto are repeatedly performed for each frame, so that an animation as shown in FIG. 49B is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, when displaying an animation for displacing the small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, a plurality of small unit images are sequentially switched to a set of still images. Since the configuration is such that the control is performed, the processing load of the parameter CPU in the display CPU 72 is reduced. Therefore, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while the processing load on the display CPU 72 is suppressed.

  The number of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 and the number of the divided part data assigned to the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 are arbitrary as long as they are plural.

  Further, the divided part data may not be assigned to each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15, and a common divided data group in which many divided part data are set may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that divided part data is distributed to each division position from the common divided data group.

<Effect image addition processing>
Next, the effect image addition processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 51A to 51E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect image addition processing.

  Effect images include blast images, images of water droplets, luminescent images of light being radiated from the light source to the surroundings, and aura images of the surroundings of the characters as if they were emitting light. Further, an image for enhancing a visual effect is shown. Of these effect images, an image representing a blast or an image representing water droplets is not limited to a target to be applied, but an aura image is applied to a predetermined sprite.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 51B, the effect data PD17 is set corresponding to the sprite data PD16 as shown in FIG. The sprite data PD16 includes an image area PA2 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA3 surrounding the image area PA2. The sprite data PD16 is defined to have a rectangular shape as a whole. I have. On the other hand, the effect data PD17 is defined along the outer edge of the image area PA2, and includes the effect area PA4 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image and the effect area PA4 so as to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame area PA5 defining the inside and outside.

  Incidentally, the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 corresponding thereto are defined to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since information of “0” which is completely transparent information is set as an α value to the pixels constituting each of the frame areas PA3 and PA5, the pixels are not displayed on the display screen G, and are not displayed on the display screen G. The effect area PA4 is to be displayed on the display screen G. However, the non-display of the frame areas PA3 and PA5 may be performed by using dedicated α data. Details of the α data will be described later.

  By applying the effect data PD17 to the sprite data PD16, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), an effect image CH2 as if the periphery of the character CH1 is emitting light is generated for the character CH1. . In this case, the effect image CH2 overlaps a part of the background image in front of it. On the other hand, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are individually set, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone.

  As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b in which the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and an area for storing color information is set in each unit area. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 51D, color information storage areas 121a to 121c each consisting of one byte are set in each unit area 121 in one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. , RGB can be set for each of the 256 colors.

  As the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c is smaller, a darker color is finally displayed in RGB, and black is displayed in the case of the minimum value. Further, as the value of the numerical information is larger, a color with a higher degree of brightness in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed instead of the full-color method, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51E, color information including numerical information is set to each pixel 122 of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 as shown in FIG. In this case, the color information set for each of the pixels 122 is data that can display only 256 colors instead of full colors. However, in order to render the image in the frame areas 82a and 82b well, each color of RGB is used. Are set as information within the range of 1 byte.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. The color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set by 1 byte instead of 3 bytes. A configuration in which color information is also set in one byte may be adopted.

  Further, in each pixel 122, information on the α value is set in addition to the color information. Although a one-byte storage capacity is secured as the information of the α value, any numerical information of “0 to 100” in decimal is actually set. The information of the α value is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1”, and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

  When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, the numerical information obtained by multiplying the RGB value information of each pixel 122 by the α value is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. The data is stored in areas corresponding to RGB of the areas 121a to 121c. In this case, when the α value is set as the opacity information of “1”, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten on the corresponding unit area 121 as it is. On the other hand, when the α value is less than 1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is performed between the image and the image superimposed on the back side of the display screen G, and the calculation result is stored in the unit area 121. Written.

  In the case of the effect data PD17, an α value of less than 1 is set for all pixels. More specifically, complete transmission information with an α value of “0” is set for all pixels included in the frame area PA5, and semi-transmission with 0 <α value <1 is set for each pixel included in the effect area PA4. Information is set. When the effect data PD17 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the α value is set for the numerical information of each pixel of the effect data PD17 for each unit area 121 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. The result of the integration is added.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying an image using the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a first effect effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the first effect effect is executed in the effect operation process of step S2316 in the task process (FIG. 43). The first effect effect calculation process is started when information on the first effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S2701, sprite data PD16 included in the display area is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S2702, control is performed by calculating and deriving the parameters of the sprite data PD16 grasped in step S2701, and writing the information of the derived parameters in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the sprite data PD16. Update information for

  In step S2703, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the effect data should be applied. When it is not necessary to apply the effect data, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the drawing including the sprite data PD16 as the drawing target and the parameter information of the sprite data PD16 is performed. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

  On the other hand, when it is necessary to apply the effect data PD17, in step S2704, the effect data PD17 to be applied this time is grasped. In the subsequent step S2705, the same coordinates as those of the sprite data PD16 to be applied in step S2702 are grasped as the coordinates of the effect data PD17, and the coordinates are stored in the work RAM 73 in the area secured in correspondence with the effect data PD17. The control information is updated by writing.

  In a succeeding step S2706, information of parameters other than coordinates is calculated and derived for the effect data PD17, and the derived parameter information is written in the reserved area to update control information. In this case, if the size and rotation angle of the sprite data PD16 to be applied are changed from those at the time of the initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD17 are adjusted so as to be the same. Then, after storing the effect designation information in step S2707, the present arithmetic processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list in which both the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set as drawing targets is created. Is done. Further, the drawing list includes respective parameter information of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17, and effect designation information indicating that the effect data PD17 is to be applied. Then, the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the first effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the first effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). Further, the setting process for the first effect effect is started when the designation related to the first effect effect is set in the drawing list.

  In step S2801, the current drawing sprite data PD16 indicated in the drawing list and the address to which the sprite data PD16 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In a succeeding step S2802, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 are grasped.

  In step S2803, it is determined whether effect designation information is set in the drawing list in association with the sprite data PD16. If the effect designation information has not been set, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the effect designation information is set, in step S2804, the effect data PD17 to be drawn is grasped together with the sprite data PD16, and the effect data PD17 is transferred to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address that is located. After that, in step S2805, after the parameters of the effect data PD17 have been grasped, the present setting processing ends.

  That is, the effect data PD17 is set in association with the application target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list, and is simultaneously processed in the processing of processing the application target sprite data PD16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the effect data PD17 is set independently of the application target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. Even in this case, as described above, since the parameters are set for the effect data PD17 alone, the effect data PD17 can be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

  Incidentally, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are handled separately, as described above, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone corresponding to the sprite data PD16 using the same sprite data PD16. Besides, it is possible to display the character CH1 in a state where the effect image CH2 is applied.

  By executing the setting process for the first effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the sprite data PD16 is applied to the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in a state where the parameters are applied. And the effect data PD17 are drawn.

  Next, a first effect addition process executed by the VDP 76 when the effect data PD17 is drawn will be described. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the first effect addition process, and FIG. 54B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the first effect addition process. The first effect addition processing is executed as a part of the writing processing executed in step S2205 of the drawing processing (FIG. 41). Further, the first effect addition processing is started when the effect data PD17 is set.

  First, in step S2901, a process of updating a target pixel is executed. In the process of updating the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the effect data PD17 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In the following step S2902, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) where the current target pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, as shown by “r1”, “g1”, and “b1” in FIG. 54 (b-1), each numerical information of RGB is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S2903, the numerical information set for the current target pixel in the effect data PD17 is grasped. This numerical information is each numerical information obtained as a result of integrating the numerical information of the α value with each of the numerical information of RGB. That is, the numerical information of RGB is grasped as indicated by “α × r2”, “α × g2”, and “α × b2” in FIG. 54 (b-2).

  In addition, at the time of the integration, calculation is performed so that the α value defined as a value of “0 to 100” in decimal functions as “0.00 to 1.00” which is a value of 1 or less, Further, the value is truncated or rounded so that the result of the integration does not include a value below the decimal point. The handling of the α value and the handling of numerical values after the decimal point are the same in the following description. Further, the α value is defined as a value of “0 to 10” in decimal, and the calculation may be performed such that it functions as “0.0 to 1.0” which is a value of 1 or less. Good.

  In subsequent step S2904, the respective numerical information of RGB obtained in step S2902 and the respective numerical information of RGB obtained in step S2903 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 (b-3), each numerical information of RGB is “r1 + α × r2”, “g1 + α × g2”, and “b1 + α × b2”. In the following step S2905, the respective numerical value information of RGB calculated in step S2904 is written to the current target dot.

  After that, in step S2906, it is determined whether the drawing has been completed for all the pixels of the effect data PD17. If not completed, the processing of steps S2901 to S2905 is repeated. If it has been completed, the addition processing ends.

  By executing the addition processing, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Is displayed. As described above, since the effect image CH2 is an image that transmits an image on the far side such as light or water droplets, it is uncomfortable when displayed without relation to the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition processing as described above, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state where the background image is reflected, and the appearance is preferable without causing the above-mentioned discomfort. Become.

  Note that the specific process of reflecting the individual image on the back side when displaying the individual image on the front side is not limited to the addition process. May be executed.

  Also, after the image data corresponding to the back side individual image is set in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the addition process of the image data corresponding to the front side individual image to the frame regions 82a and 82b is performed. Instead, the image data resulting from the addition processing may be set in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

<Partial addition processing of effect image>
Next, the effect image partial addition processing will be described.

  When an effect image is applied as described above, an addition process is performed. However, when a bright effect image is superimposed on a bright image, each of the RGB values in the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b is obtained. The information becomes the maximum value, and the display may deviate from the intention of the designer and display white (so-called overexposure occurs). On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when a predetermined effect image is displayed in order to suppress the occurrence of overexposure, partial addition is performed.

  The data structure for performing the partial addition will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a), taking an example of an effect such as an image representing a blast or an image representing water droplets which is treated independently of sprite data of a character. I will explain it. FIG. 55A is an explanatory diagram for describing a data configuration for performing partial addition.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a-1), the effect data PD18 to which the partial addition is applied includes an effect area PA6 which includes a plurality of pixels and is displayed on the display screen G as an effect image as an effect image, and a rectangle as a whole. And a frame area PA7 that defines the periphery of the effect area PA6 to have a shape. As described above, each pixel constituting the effect area PA6 includes color information having numerical information corresponding to each of RGB and information of α value integrated with each numerical information of the color information. Is set. It should be noted that “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as an α value for each pixel constituting the frame area PA7.

  One-to-one correspondence with the effect data PD18, as shown in FIG. 55 (a-2), the partial addition data PD19 defined so that the size and outer shape at the time of initial setting are the same as the effect data PD18. Is set. The partial addition data PD19 includes an effect corresponding area PA8 defined to have the same shape and the same number of pixels as the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, and a periphery of the effect corresponding area PA8 so as to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame corresponding area PA9 that defines

  Unlike the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, no color information is set in each pixel constituting the effect corresponding area PA8, and only information of the α value is set. Incidentally, the information of the α value set for each pixel is individually set according to the execution target of the partial addition, and if there is a pixel in which the same α value information is set, the mutual There is also a pixel in which information of a different α value is set. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the α value set for each pixel is the same.

  When partial addition is performed, first, the partial addition data PD19 is applied to each dot (that is, each unit area) on which the effect data PD18 is drawn in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. After that, the effect data PD18 is drawn for each dot. A specific processing configuration in which the drawing is performed will be described below.

  FIG. 55 (b) is a flowchart showing a second effect effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the second effect effect is performed in the effect operation process of step S2316 in the task process (FIG. 43). The calculation process for the second effect effect is started when information on the second effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3001, the effect data PD18 to be designated for drawing this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S3002, control is performed by calculating and deriving the parameters of the effect data PD18 grasped in step S3001, and writing the information of the derived parameters into an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the effect data PD18. Update information for

  In the subsequent step S3003, based on the currently set data table, the partial addition data PD19 to be designated for application this time is grasped. In the subsequent step S3004, the same coordinates as those of the effect data PD18 to be applied in step S3002 are grasped as coordinates of the partial addition data PD19, and the information of the grasped coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73 in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing to the area secured in correspondence with the data PD19.

  In the subsequent step S3005, information on parameters other than coordinates is calculated and derived for the partial addition data PD19, and the derived parameter information is written in the reserved area to update control information. In this case, if the size and the rotation angle of the effect data PD18 to be applied are changed from those at the time of the initial setting, the size and the rotation angle of the partial addition data PD19 are adjusted so as to be the same. . After that, the partial addition designation information is stored in step S3006, and then the calculation processing ends.

  When the calculation processing for the second effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the drawing list in which both the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19 are set as drawing targets Is created. Further, the drawing list includes respective parameter information of the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19, and partial addition designation information indicating that the partial addition data PD19 is to be applied. The created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process for the second effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the second effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). Further, the setting process for the second effect effect is started when the partial addition designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S3101, the partial addition data PD19 to be applied this time, which is indicated in the drawing list, and the address to which the partial addition data PD19 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In a succeeding step S3102, the parameters of the partial addition data PD19 are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3103, the effect data PD18 to be drawn this time indicated in the drawing list and the address to which the effect data PD18 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Thereafter, in step S3104, after the parameters of the effect data PD18 have been grasped, the present setting process ends.

  That is, the partial addition data PD19 is set in the drawing list in association with the effect data PD18 to be applied, and is simultaneously processed in the processing of processing the effect data PD18 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the partial addition data PD19 is set independently of the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list. In this case, since the parameters are set in the partial addition data PD19 alone, if the drawing order is set so that the partial addition data PD19 is processed before the effect data PD18, the partial addition It is possible to draw the application data PD19 appropriately in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

  By executing the setting process for the second effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the above-described partial addition process is performed on the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in a state where the above parameters are applied. The data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn.

  Next, the second effect addition process executed by the VDP 76 when the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn will be described. FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the second effect addition processing, and FIG. 57B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the second effect addition processing. The second effect addition processing is executed as a part of the writing processing executed in step S2205 of the drawing processing (FIG. 41). The second effect addition process is started when the partial addition data PD19 is set.

  First, in step S3201, a process of updating a target pixel is executed. In the process of updating the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

  In the following step S3202, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) where the current target pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, as shown by “r3”, “g3”, and “b3” in FIG. 57 (b-1), each numerical information of RGB is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3203, the α value set for the current target pixel in the partial addition data PD19 is grasped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (b-2), “α1” is set as the α value.

  In the subsequent step S3204, the α value grasped in step S3203 is integrated with each of the RGB numerical information grasped in step S3202. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b-3), the respective pieces of RGB numerical information corresponding to the integration result are “α1 × r3”, “α1 × g3”, and “α1 × b3”.

  In the subsequent step S3205, the numerical information set for the current target pixel in the effect data PD18 is grasped. The numerical information is numerical information obtained as a result of integrating the numerical information of the predetermined α value for the pixel with respect to the numerical information of RGB. That is, as shown in FIG. 57 (b-4), each numerical information of RGB is “α2 × r4”, “α2 × g4”, and “α2 × b4”.

  In subsequent step S3206, the respective numerical information of RGB obtained in step S3205 and the information of each integration result of RGB obtained in step S3204 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b-6), each numerical information of RGB becomes “α1 × r3 + α2 × r4”, “α1 × g3 + α2 × g4”, and “α1 × b3 + α2 × b4”. In a succeeding step S3207, each of the RGB numerical information calculated in the step S3206 is written to the current target dot.

  After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not drawing has been completed for all pixels of the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18. If not completed, the processing of steps S3201 to S3207 is repeated. If it has been completed, the addition processing ends.

  By executing the addition processing, the numerical information already stored in the unit area where the effect data PD18 is drawn is reduced to a numerical value corresponding to the α value of the partial addition data PD19. Numerical information obtained by adding the numerical information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical information of is set. Thus, after rendering of the effect data PD18, each numerical information of RGB in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b is suppressed from being the maximum value, and the occurrence of overexposure can be suppressed.

  In addition, for example, when the numerical information and the α value of the effect data PD18 are suppressed, the effect image becomes familiar with the image to be superimposed, and the visual effect cannot be enhanced by the effect image. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the image to be superimposed is suppressed by the partial addition data PD19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure while enhancing the effect image.

  Further, a configuration in which the numerical information of the image to be superimposed is originally set in a suppressed state is also conceivable, but in such a case, when the image is used without applying the effect image, the numerical information corresponding to the numerical information is used. It is limited to color information. On the other hand, by setting the partial addition data PD19 separately as described above, it is difficult to restrict the image on the side to be superimposed.

  Further, the partial addition data PD19 has a configuration in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is not set and the numerical information corresponding to the α value is set. It is smaller than the data PD18. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while the required storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 102 is suppressed.

  As a method for reducing the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side, a method other than the method of applying the partial addition data PD19 may be adopted. For example, in the configuration in which the α value of the image data can be operated in pixel units in the processing of the VDP 76, the numerical information in the corresponding portion of the individual image on the back side is reduced at a predetermined rate in the processing of the VDP 76. Is also good.

  In addition, in the rear-side individual image, a portion other than the overlapping portion with the front-side individual image is affected, but a uniform α value for partial addition is set for the rear-side individual image. Conceivable.

  Further, in a configuration in which the limit numerical values of the frame areas 82a and 82b are the darkest and the minimum numerical values are the brightest, instead of the above-described addition processing, the individual image on the back side is reflected on the individual image on the near side. , A subtraction process needs to be performed. Also, in order to suppress overexposure, it is necessary to apply partial subtraction data instead of partial addition data PD19.

Further, instead of the above configuration, the partial addition data PD19 may be configured to set not only the α value but also numerical information corresponding to the color information. In this case, in step S3203 of the second effect addition processing, the α value and numerical value information of the target pixel in the partial addition data are grasped, and in step S3204, processing of fusion calculation is executed instead of integration processing. . Specifically, when the α value of the partial addition data PD19 is set to α1 and the color information of the partial addition data PD19 is set to “r5, g5, b5”, in step S3204,
R: r3 × (1−α1) + r5 × α1
G: g3 × (1−α1) + g5 × α1
B: b3 × (1−α1) + b5 × α1
Is performed.

Then, by performing the processing of steps S3205 to S3207 on the calculation result,
R: r3 × (1-α1) + r5 × α1 + α2 × r4
G: g3 × (1−α1) + g5 × α1 + α2 × g4
B: b3 × (1−α1) + b5 × α1 + α2 × b4
Becomes

  Even in the case of using the partial addition data PD19 in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is set as described above, the timing before drawing the effect data is obtained by executing the processing of the fusion calculation. Since the numerical information already stored is reduced to a lower numerical value, the occurrence of overexposure can be suppressed.

<Synthesized data combining multiple effect images>
Next, a configuration for creating composite data in which a plurality of effect images are combined will be described.

  As described above, a plurality of effect images may be displayed in an image for one frame in order to enhance a visual effect. For example, an image representing a blast and a light emission image may be displayed at the same time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of separately storing the effect data originally set individually and combined and combined. Specific processing for creating the composite data and specific processing for using the composite data will be described below.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for producing a plurality of effects performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for effect production is performed in the task calculation processing of step S2316 in the task processing (FIG. 43). In addition, the calculation processing for the multiple effect effect is started when information on the multiple effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the VDP 76 has created composite data. The determination is made by determining whether or not a flag for determination of completion of creation has been set in the work RAM 73. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and creation of combined data is performed in the currently set data table. It may be configured such that information on whether or not it has been set is set.

  If the combined data has not been created, in step S3302, a plurality of effect data to be applied this time are grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S3303, control is performed by calculating and deriving the parameters of each effect data grasped in step S3302, and writing the information of the derived parameters into an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with these effect data. Update information for In a succeeding step S3304, a plurality of effect effect designation information is stored.

  In a succeeding step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is time to create the composite data. More specifically, a plurality of types of timings at which a plurality of effect effects are performed are set. The respective timings include timings at which the number of individual images other than the effect images is relatively large and the processing load on the VDP 76 is large, and There is a timing when the number of individual images other than the image is relatively small and the processing load on the VDP 76 is small. The timing at which the combined data is created is a timing at which the processing load is small.

  If it is determined that it is not time to create the composite data (step S3305: NO), the present calculation processing ends. If it is determined that it is the time to create the composite data (step S3305: YES), the arithmetic processing ends after storing the composite data creation designation information in step S3306.

  In the case where the arithmetic processing for effecting a plurality of effects is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list including a plurality of sprite data as parameter objects of the sprite data is drawn. Is created. In addition, the drawing list includes multiple effect effect designation information that is information indicating that a multiple effect effect is to be executed. When the composite data creation designation information is stored, the drawing list includes the composite data creation designation information indicating that synthetic data should be created.

  On the other hand, if the composite data has been created (step S3301: YES), in step S3307, the composite data to be applied this time is grasped. In a succeeding step S3308, the parameters of the combined data grasped in the step S3307 are calculated and grasped.

  In subsequent step S3309, additional effect data is grasped based on the information set as the case where the composite data has been created in the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S3310, the parameters of the additional effect data obtained in the step S3309 are calculated and derived, and information of the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the additional effect data, thereby controlling the parameter. Update information. That is, when the synthetic data is applied, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 have a margin in the processing time for drawing, and the additional effect data is set using the processing time.

  After that, in step S3311, the multi-effect effect designation information is stored, and in step S3312, the combined data use designation information is stored.

  In the case where the calculation processing for producing a plurality of effects is performed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the combined data and the additional effect data are to be drawn. A drawing list including parameter information is created. In addition, the drawing list includes the multiple effect effect designation information and the combined data use designation information that is information indicating that the combined data is to be used.

  Next, the setting process for a plurality of effect effects performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. It should be noted that the setting process for producing a plurality of effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). Further, when a plurality of effects effect designation is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the plurality of effect effects is activated.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether synthesis data use designation is set in the drawing list. If the combined data use designation is not set, in step S3402, the plurality of effect data designated as the current drawing target and the address to which these effect data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are stored. Figure out. In other words, when a plurality of effect data are simultaneously drawn, these effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set so as to be processed simultaneously in one process.

  In a succeeding step S3403, parameters of each effect data are grasped. After that, in step S3404, it is determined whether or not the synthesis data creation designation is set. If the synthesis data creation designation has not been set, this setting process ends. If the synthetic data creation designation has been set, the process advances to step S3405.

  In step S3405, combined data is created with the parameters grasped in step S3404 applied to the plurality of effect data grasped in step S3402. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), a combined data area 81c is set in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The composite data created in step S3405 is written to the composite data area 81c. The synthesized data area 81c stores and holds the written synthesized data while the power supply to the VRAM 75 is continued, and further transfers other image data from the NAND flash memory 102 to the VRAM 75. This area is not overwritten. Therefore, the combined data once created is stored and held until the power supply to the VRAM 75 is cut off.

  By performing the setting process for the multiple effect effect as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the above-described parameters are applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. Each of the above effect data is drawn. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, an effect image using each of the effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  On the other hand, if the combined data use designation is set in the drawing list (step S3401: YES), the combined data designated as the current drawing target and the combined data in the combined data area 81c are set in step S3406. To know the address where is stored. In a succeeding step S3407, parameters of the combined data are grasped.

  In the following step S3408, the additional effect data designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the additional effect data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. That is, when the combined data and the additional effect data are simultaneously drawn, the combined data and the additional effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set so as to be simultaneously processed in one processing cycle. Have been. Thereafter, in step S3409, after the parameters of the additional effect data are grasped, the setting process ends.

  As described above, the setting process for effect rendering of a plurality of effects is performed, and in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the combined data is created in a state where the parameters are applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. Is drawn, and additional effect data is drawn with the parameters applied. Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, an effect image using the combined data and the additional effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and in the subsequent use, the composite data is used. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration for drawing.

  In particular, since the display CPU 72 issues an instruction to create the composite data at a timing when the processing load on the VDP 76 is small, it is possible to create the composite data while preventing the processing from dropping in the VDP 76.

  Further, when a plurality of effect effects are performed using the combined data, an additional effect image using the additional effect data is displayed by utilizing the fact that the processing time has a margin. Thereby, more effect images can be applied, and the visual effect by the effect images can be enhanced.

  Further, compared to a configuration in which the composite data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance, the storage capacity required for the effect data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be reduced. In addition, since the combined data is created using the individually set effect data, the effect data can be used individually.

  Further, since the combined data is stored in the combined data area 81c after the creation, the combined data can be used for a plurality of discontinuous frames after the combined data is created.

  Further, when the combined effect data is used for display, the combined data is created in accordance with the effect data. Thus, there is no need to set the processing timing for creating the composite data independently of the image display.

  Further, the composite data is created after the parameter information is applied to each effect data constituting the composite data. Thus, when using the synthesized data, it is sufficient to derive and apply the parameter information for the synthesized data, and it is not necessary to derive and apply the parameter information to each effect data constituting the synthesized data. Therefore, the processing load when using the synthesized data is reduced.

  Note that, when a plurality of effect effects are performed using the composite data, the additional effect data may not be drawn. Even in this case, since the synthesized data is created, the adjustment of the processing time in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 becomes easy.

  The combined data may be created at a timing different from the timing at which each effect data is used for display, such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

<Partial display of individual image using α data>
Next, a configuration for partially displaying an individual image using the α data will be described.

  The α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data as described above, and is previously stored in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data. α data is individually set for image data that defines individual images such as background data and sprite data, but for design sprite data, α data for the whole and α data for parts are set respectively. Have been.

  The whole α data and the partial α data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the α data. FIG. 60 (a) shows the symbol sprite data PD20 corresponding to a predetermined symbol, and FIG. 60 (b) is set in association with the symbol sprite data PD20. FIG. 60 (c) shows a case where the overall α data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20, and FIGS. 60 (d) to (g) show the case where the symbol α data PD21 is associated with the symbol sprite data PD20. The set partial α data PD22 to PD25 are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the symbol sprite data PD20 includes an image area PA10 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA11 surrounding the image area PA10. The frame area PA11 allows the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to handle the symbol sprite data PD20 as image data defined in a rectangular shape regardless of the outer edge shape of the image area PA10, thereby facilitating designation of coordinates.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, the size of the entire α data PD21 is set so that the outer shape of the α data PD21 matches the design sprite data PD20 to be applied. The whole α data PD21 includes an image corresponding area PA12 occupying the inside of the outer edge part and a frame corresponding area PA13 occupying the outside of the outer edge part, with the outer edge part of the image area PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as a boundary. It has.

  “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13. On the other hand, in the image corresponding area PA12, “1” which is opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion excluding the outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is set as an α value. 0 <α value <1 which is the partial transmission information is set.

  By applying the overall α data PD21 to the symbol sprite data PD20, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to each pixel included in the image area PA10, and further, the frame area PA11 The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13 is applied to each pixel included in.

  In this case, as described above, the size of the overall α data PD21 is set such that the outer shape matches the design sprite data PD20 to be applied. Therefore, by setting the size and rotation angle of both data PD20 and 21 to be the same and setting both data PD20 and 21 so that the reference pixel such as one pixel at the center overlaps, the α data PD21 for the whole with respect to the symbol sprite data PD20 is obtained. Application can be performed, and the processing load related to the setting can be reduced. This is the same for the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

Further, when the design sprite data 20 to which the general α data PD21 is applied is superimposed on the image data overlapping on the back side of the display screen G, each dot related to the superposition is determined by the general α data PD21. Of the numerical information based on the given α value (that is, blending). In particular,
R: “R value of rear image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “R value of front image” × “α value”
G: “G value of rear image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “G value of front image” × “α value”
B: “B value of back image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “B value of front image” × “α value”
Becomes This is the same for the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

  By applying the overall α data PD21, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), in the symbol CH3 after application, the frame area PA11 is in a completely transparent state, and only the image area PA10 is visible. In addition, jaggies that occur in the outline of the pattern CH3 are reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the outline of the pattern CH3 fuses with the background. That is, anti-aliasing can be performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 60 (d) to 60 (g), the size of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 is set such that the outer shape matches the design sprite data PD20 to be applied. The partial α data PD22 to PD25 include a partial image corresponding region PA14 occupying the inside of the outer edge portion, with the outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image region PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as the boundary, and the outer edge portion. And a corresponding area PA15 other than a part occupying the outside.

  “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the other area PA15. On the other hand, in the partial image corresponding area PA14, “1” which is opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion excluding the outer edge portion, and α is set for each pixel included in the outer edge portion. As the value, 0 <α value <1 which is the partial transmission information is set.

  Each of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 has a different part corresponding to a part of the image corresponding area PA14 in the image area PA10 of the symbol sprite data PD20. More specifically, the partial α data PD22 in FIG. 60D corresponds to １ ／ of the destination side when the image area PA10 is variably displayed, and the partial α data PD22 in FIG. The data PD23 corresponds to the half of the destination side, the partial α data PD24 of FIG. 60 (f) corresponds to the half of the source side, and the partial α data PD25 of FIG. This corresponds to 1/4 of the original side.

  The number of partial α data PD22 to PD25 set for one symbol sprite data PD20 is not limited to four, but may be two, three, or five or more. Also, the number may be one. The combination of the whole α data and the plurality of partial α data is set in one-to-one correspondence with each type of the symbol sprite data.

  By using the partial α data PD22 to PD25, it is possible to partially display the symbol. In addition, even when such partial display is performed, the jaggies occurring in the outline of the design are reduced in the partially displayed range, and the color is smoothly changed so that the outline of the design fuses with the background. It is possible to do. That is, anti-aliasing can be performed even when partial display is performed.

  Hereinafter, processing in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 when the α data is applied will be described.

  First, the symbol calculation processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the symbol calculation process is a process executed in step S2317 of the task process (FIG. 43). The symbol calculation process calculates various parameters for a symbol to be subjected to variable display in each game. This is the process to derive.

  In step S3501, it is determined whether it is time to execute partial display. The determination as to whether or not the timing is made is made by referring to information specified by the current pointer in the currently set data table.

  If it is not time to execute the partial display (partial display), in step S3502, the current pattern sprite data to be controlled is grasped. In the subsequent step S3503, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the grasped design sprite data, and information of the derived various parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the design sprite data. The control information is updated by writing to the designated area.

  In the following step S3504, the whole α data corresponding to each of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3502 is grasped. In this case, the information of the address to which the entire α data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is also grasped. After that, in step S3505, the combination designating information is stored in the register, and then the symbol calculation processing ends.

  When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the pattern sprite data grasped in step S3502 is a drawing target, and the parameter information of each of the design sprite data is further processed. Then, a drawing list is created that includes the type and address of the α data for the whole, and synthesis designation information indicating that the α data for the whole is to be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data, and is transmitted to the VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is time to execute the partial display (step S3501: YES), the coordinates and size of the partial display area are grasped in step S3506. The partial display region is a region that is displayed so as to partition a part of the display screen G (see a region partitioned by a frame indicated by a symbol PL5 in FIG. 62B).

  In the following step S3507, the design sprite data displayed this time on the display screen G including the partial display area is grasped. In the pachinko machine 10, when the partial display area is displayed, the design is displayed only in the partial display area, and the display screen G has a design in which the background and the effect character are displayed outside the partial display area. Is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a symbol is displayed outside the partial display area may be adopted.

  In the following step S3508, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the design sprite data grasped in step S3507, and the information of the derived various parameters is stored in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the design sprite data. The control information is updated by writing to the secured area. In this case, the size information is calculated so that the symbol displayed in the partial display area is displayed in a smaller size than a normal display state in which the partial display area is not displayed.

  In a succeeding step S3509, it is determined whether it is necessary to set partial α data. If it is necessary to set partial α data, in step S3510, the partial α data corresponding to the design sprite data that needs to be set, and the partial α data corresponding to the current drawing list creation target Understand alpha data. In this case, the information of the address to which the α data for each part is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is also grasped.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3509 or after the processing in step S3510 is performed, it is determined in step S3511 whether or not it is necessary to set the α data for the whole. Even for the symbol sprite displayed in the partial display area, for the one that is not applicable to the partial α data, it is necessary to set the entire α data, so in this case, the affirmative determination is made in step S3511. do. If it is necessary to set the general α data, the process of step S3504 is executed to grasp the general α data.

  Regardless of whether the α data for the whole is grasped or not in step S3504, the symbol designating information is stored in step S3505, and then the symbol calculation processing is ended.

  When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a partial display area should be set in addition to the information described as the case where only the entire α data is applied. A drawing list including information, parameter information of the partial display area, the type and address of the partial α data, and synthesis designation information indicating that the partial α data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data is created. And transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, the setting process of the symbol sprite data executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the symbol sprite data is executed by the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). The setting process of the symbol sprite data is started when the combination designation is set in the drawing list.

  In step S3601, the pattern sprite data to be drawn this time indicated in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S3602, it is determined whether or not the entire α data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S3601.

  In the case where the general α data is applied, in step S3603, the general α data is read from the specified address, and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same specified address. Thus, the α value set for each pixel of the overall α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data. Incidentally, when synthesizing the entire α data, the synthesis is performed such that the entire α data overlaps with the entire symbol sprite data. This is the same for the partial α data.

  On the other hand, in the case where the partial α data is applied, in step S3604, the partial α data is read from the specified address, and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same specified address. Thereby, the α value set for each pixel of the partial α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the symbol sprite data.

  After executing Step S3603 or Step S3604, the process proceeds to Step S3605. In step S3605, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) referred to when writing the synthesized sprite data created in step S3603 or S3604 to the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The various parameters grasped in step S3605 are information set for the symbol sprite data grasped in step S3601. In other words, the information of various parameters necessary for writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b is set for the symbol sprite data, but is not set for the entire α data or the partial α data, Information of various parameters set for the data is applied to the synthesized sprite data. As a result, the amount of information specified in the drawing list can be reduced and the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced, as compared with a configuration in which various parameter information is set for the entire α data and the partial α data. Can be

  By the way, in the case of writing the symbol sprite data after the setting process is completed in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the background data and the effect data already written in the frame areas 82a and 82b have already been described. An operation for blending (blending operation) is performed.

  Next, a state in which a symbol is partially displayed using the partial display area PL5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a symbol is partially displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 62B, the partial display area PL5 is displayed as a range smaller than the display screen G at a position near the corner of the display screen G. Further, the outer edge of the partial display area PL5 is not in contact with the outer edge of the display screen G, and all the outer edges of the partial display area PL5 have a gap with the outer edge of the display screen G.

  In the partial display area PL5, symbols CH3 and CH4 are displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined direction. The predetermined direction is the same direction as the case of performing the variable display of the symbols on each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying the partial display area PL5, but may be a different direction.

  The symbols CH3 and CH4, which are variably displayed in the partial display area PL5, are displayed such that they appear from a predetermined side of the partial display area PL5 and disappear from a side opposite to the predetermined side. In this case, these symbols CH3 and CH4 are partially displayed so as not to protrude from the partial display area PL5.

  As described above, the partial α data is combined with the symbol, so that the symbol can be partially displayed using the α data capable of performing anti-aliasing.

  As described above, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 cannot recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, but can recognize only the coordinates of the reference pixel. Then, it is impossible to perform a process of dividing only a part of the symbol sprite data by a process on the program. On the other hand, a configuration is also conceivable in which a plurality of symbol sprite data necessary for partially displaying a symbol is previously set for one symbol. However, the design sprite data is data including color information, and has a larger data capacity than α data in which only an α value is set for each pixel. Therefore, by performing partial display using the α data, partial display can be performed while suppressing the data capacity of image data and the data capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

  Further, when performing partial display, the VDP 76 only needs to read out the α data for the partial and apply it to the image data to be applied. Therefore, partial display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the VDP 76.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which anti-aliasing is not performed when the partial α data is applied. Further, the application target of the partial α data is not limited to the design, and may be a background character or a production character. In addition, the configuration may be such that parameter information is independently set for the entire α data and the partial α data.

<First Alternative Form for Partial Display>
A first different mode for performing partial display will be described.

  FIGS. 63A and 63B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first alternative embodiment. FIGS. 63A and 63C show symbol sprite data, and FIGS. 63B and 63D show whole α data. 63 (e) to 63 (h) show partial α data.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (h), the whole α data PD28 and PD29 are individually set for each of the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial α data PD30. To PD33 are set in common to the respective design sprite data PD26 and PD27. Incidentally, the initial size of the data PD26 to PD33 in the state stored in the NAND flash memory 102 is the same. Further, the above data configuration is the same for the design sprite data other than the design sprite data PD26 and PD27 illustrated in FIGS. 63 (a) and (c).

  In the case of this configuration, when partial display is not performed, antialiasing can be performed by synthesizing the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 with each of the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. When partial display is performed, the anti-aliasing is performed by first synthesizing the corresponding whole α data PD28 and PD29 and then synthesizing the partial α data PD30 to PD33 corresponding to the part to be partially displayed. While performing, partial display can be performed using the common partial α data PD30 to PD33.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the types of the partial α data PD30 to PD33 as compared with the configuration in which the partial α data is individually set for the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial α It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the data PD30 to PD33.

<Second Alternative Form for Partial Display>
A second alternative mode for performing a partial display will be described.

  FIG. 64 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second alternative embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a flowchart showing a setting process of the symbol sprite data in the second alternative embodiment.

  In this alternative embodiment, anti-aliasing is performed by using α-palette data instead of using α-data, and a symbol is partially displayed. As shown in FIG. 64 (a-1), the α-palette data PD34 is obtained by adding α-value information to each color information of 256-color palette data.

  In the design sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 64 (a-2), an image area PA16 and a frame area PA17 are set, but color information not set in the image area PA16 is set in the frame area PA17. Have been. On the other hand, in the whole α palette data, complete transparency information is set as an α value for the color information set in the frame area PA17. Further, “1”, which is opaque information, is set as the α value in the color information of the portion of the image area PA16 except for the outer edge portion, and the color information of the outer edge portion is the partially transparent information as the α value. 0 <α value <1 is set. By combining the whole α palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35, anti-aliasing can be performed as shown in FIG. 64 (a-3).

  Further, in the symbol sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 64 (a-2), a plurality of partial areas PA18 to PA21 in which the same color information is not used are set. On the other hand, complete transmission information is set as the α value for the color information set in some of the partial areas PA18 to PA21 and the frame area PA17, and the color information set in other areas is set. Is prepared for partial pallet data in which opacity information is set as the α value. A plurality of types of the partial α palette data are prepared so that the partial areas PA18 to PA21 to which the α value of the complete transmission information is applied are different from each other. By combining the partial α palette data with the design sprite data PD35, a partial display of the design can be performed as shown in FIG. 64 (a-4).

  Hereinafter, the setting process of the symbol sprite data in the VDP 76 executed when the α palette data is used will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S3701, the pattern sprite data to be drawn this time indicated in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S3702, it is determined whether or not the entire α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S3701.

  In the case where the entire α palette data is applied, in step S3703, the entire α palette data is read from the specified address, and is combined with the design sprite data read from the same specified address. As a result, the α value set by being added to each color information in the entire α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

  On the other hand, when the partial α palette data is applied, in step S3704, the partial α palette data is read from the specified address and combined with the design sprite data read from the same specified address. As a result, the α value set by being added to each color information in the partial α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data.

  After executing step S3703 or step S3704, the process advances to step S3705. In step S3705, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) referred to when writing the synthesized sprite data created in step S3703 or step S3704 in the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By executing the above process, the α-palette data for the entirety or the α-palette data for the part is combined with the symbol sprite data. Even with this configuration, although the data structure of the symbol sprite data is more restricted than when α data is used, it is possible to partially display the anti-aliasing and the symbol sprite. Further, the setting for partial display can be performed in accordance with the setting of the color information.

<Another form for performing character transition display using α data>
Another mode for performing character transition display using α data will be described.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a flowchart showing a character transition process executed by the VDP 76, and FIGS. 65 (b) to (f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how character transition display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the character transition process, first, in step S3801, a superposition process of the character sprite data PD36 is executed. As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the character sprite data PD36 has a plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 arranged in a predetermined direction, specifically, a horizontal direction, and has a rectangular outer shape. The data is defined such that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are surrounded by a frame area PA27. In step S3801, two identical character sprite data PD36 are read, and the data is set such that the entirety overlaps front and rear.

  In step S3802, pallet data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. As a result, the same color information is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. In a succeeding step S3803, the whole α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. Thereby, anti-aliasing is performed on each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite on the back side.

  In step S3804, pallet data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the near side. The pallet data is different from the pallet data set in step S3802 in the color information set for each numerical information of the bitmap data. Thereby, color information different from the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the rear side is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

  In the following step S3805, it is determined whether or not to combine the overall α data with the front character sprite data PD36. In the case of combining the overall α data, in step S3806, the overall character α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side, and then the character transition process ends. The general α data is the same as the general α data used in step S3803. As a result, anti-aliasing is performed on each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the near side.

  When the process of step S3806 is executed, the character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the character sprite data PD36 on the back side are not displayed on the display screen G, and the character sprite data on the front side is not displayed. Character areas PA22 to PA26 set in PD36 are displayed. In this case, the character is displayed with the color information set in each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the front character sprite data PD36.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3805 that the entire α data is not to be combined, in step S3807, the partial α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the near side, and then the present character transition process is performed. finish. As shown in FIGS. 65 (c) and (d), the partial α data PD37 and PD38 have complete transmission information as an α value for each pixel in an area corresponding to a part of the character areas PA22 to PA26 and the frame area PA27. Is set. In each of the other character areas PA22 to PA26, opacity information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion excluding the outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is partially transmitted as an α value. 0 <α value <1 which is information is set. A plurality of types of partial α data PD37 and PD38 are set such that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are erased character by character in a predetermined direction, specifically, from left to right.

  When the process of step S3807 is executed, the character area of the character sprite on the far side is finally displayed on the display screen G for the character area not displayed in the character sprite on the near side. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 65 (e) and (f), some characters continuous from the left side are displayed with the color information set in each character area in the character sprite on the back side. The remaining characters are displayed in the character sprite on the front side with the color information set for each character information. Alternatively, all characters are displayed in the character sprite on the back side with the color information set for each character information.

  As described above, karaoke-style character transition display can be performed using the α data. Incidentally, the character transition display is performed when a karaoke style effect is performed, and an effect is performed in which the corresponding lyric portion changes color in accordance with the melody output from the speaker unit 45.

  Note that, instead of the character sprite data PD36 being set in an overlapping manner, a single character sprite data PD36 may be set and the display range may be sequentially narrowed. In this case, the character areas are not displayed so as to be sequentially colored differently, but are displayed such that the character areas are sequentially erased.

  The character sprite data on the near side may not be subjected to anti-aliasing, so that the outline of each character area is not affected by the image on the far side.

<Configuration for performing a wipe switching effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a wipe switching effect will be described.

  The wipe switching effect means that at the timing when the background image or a large number of characters are changed, the image at the first display timing is gradually deleted, and the image at the second display timing is gradually used instead of the deleted region. Is an effect that is displayed on the screen.

  At the time of the wipe switching effect, a link display function is used. The link display function is a function that integrates the dependent image data (relative sprite) with one type of reference-side image data (absolute sprite) and enables the VDP 76 to handle it as one image data. is there. When a plurality of image data are integrated by the link display function, the dependent image data is visually displayed only within the image range of the reference image data. When the image data is integrated by the link display function, the processing performed on the reference side image data is also applied to the dependent side image data.

  Further, in the wipe switching effect, α data for a wipe switching effect is used in order to gradually reveal the image at the later display timing while gradually erasing the image at the first display timing. The α data for the wipe switching effect is combined with the reference side image data at the previous display timing, but as described above, the dependent side image data is one piece of image data integrated with the reference side image data. Therefore, the α data is also applied to the subordinate image data.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 66, each image data forming the image at the first display timing, each image data forming the image at the second display timing, and the α data for the wipe switching effect will be described.

  FIG. 66A shows the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image at the previous display timing. Among them, the image data PD39 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the first display timing, and is used as reference image data in the link display function (hereinafter, the image data PD39 is referred to as the reference image data). PD39). Further, the plurality of image data PD40 to PD42 are image data for displaying an image for decoration displayed on the backmost image, and are used as subordinate image data in the link display function (hereinafter, referred to as “subordinate image data”). The image data PD40 to PD42 are referred to as subordinate image data PD40 to PD42).

  By applying the link display function to these image data PD39 to PD42, as described above, the dependent side image data PD40 to PD42 are visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data PD39. Becomes Even if the entire dependent-side image data is included in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, a portion that protrudes from the reference-side image data PD39 is not a drawing target.

  FIG. 66B shows the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image at the later display timing. The image data PD43 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the rear display timing, and the plurality of image data PD44 and PD45 are image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the rearmost image. It is. The link display function is not applied to each of the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image at the subsequent display timing.

  FIGS. 66 (c) and (d) show α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect. Since these α data PD46 and PD47 are combined with the reference side image data PD39, they have the same size and outer shape as the reference side image data PD39 at the time of initial setting. The α data PD46 and PD47 have perfect transmission areas PA28 and PA30 in which the α value of each pixel is set to “0” which is complete transmission information, and “1” where the α value of each pixel is opaque information. And the non-transparent areas PA29 and PA31 set at the same time. In each of the α data PD46 and PD47, the area inside the boundary line is the non-transmission area PA29, PA31, and the area outside the boundary line is the complete transmission area PA28, PA30. These α data PD46 and PD47 are switched and used each time an image for one frame is updated when executing the wipe switching effect, but the α data PD46 used at the earlier timing is used later. The sizes of the complete transmission areas PA28 and PA30 are set to be larger than the α data PD47 used at the timing.

  A specific processing configuration for executing the wipe switching effect using the respective image data will be described.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a wipe switching effect performed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for the wipe switching effect is executed in the background arithmetic processing of step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 43). The arithmetic processing for the wipe switching effect is started when information on the wipe switching effect is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S3901, based on the currently set data table, the image data PD43 to PD45 corresponding to the image at the later display timing are grasped, and the respective image data PD43 to PD45 are grasped as the priority side at the time of drawing. I do. In the subsequent step S3902, the parameters of the respective image data PD43 to PD45 grasped as the later display timing are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is stored in the work RAM 73 in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the respective image data PD43 to PD45. To update the control information.

  After that, in steps S3903 to S3909, processing for instructing drawing of an image at the first display timing is executed. First, in step S3903, reference-side image data PD39 among the images at the previous display timing is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S3904, the parameters of the reference side image data PD39 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the reference image data PD39, thereby controlling information. To update.

  In the subsequent step S3905, based on the currently set data table, the slave side image data PD40 to PD42 among the images at the previous display timing are grasped. In the subsequent step S3906, the parameters of the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured in correspondence with the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42. To update the control information.

  Thereafter, in step S3907, the link designation information is stored. The link designation information is information for designating execution of drawing of image data using a link display function. In the following step S3908, the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect corresponding to the current drawing instruction are grasped based on the currently set data table. The α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are set in association with the reference side image data PD39, and the application target is the reference side image data PD39.

  Then, after storing the wipe designation information in step S3909, the present arithmetic processing ends. The wipe designation information is information for instructing to combine the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect with the reference side image data PD39.

  When the calculation processing for the wipe switching effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), a drawing list for drawing an image corresponding to the wipe switching effect is created. The drawing list will be described below. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for describing the drawing list created when the wipe switching effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, a plurality of image data are set in association with each drawing order. In this case, in step S3901 of the arithmetic processing, each image data forming the image at the later display timing is grasped as the priority side, so that each image data forming the image at the later display timing is also included in the drawing list. The rendering order is set earlier than each image data constituting the image at the earlier display timing.

  A link is designated for each image data constituting the image at the previous display timing. When the link is designated, the image data related to the link designation is processed within one processing cycle of the drawing process (FIG. 41) in the VDP 76. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which processing is performed separately for each time. Although illustration is omitted, the parameter P (4) of the background data corresponding to the reference side image data among the image data constituting the image at the previous display timing includes α data for the wipe switching effect. Information is set.

  By the way, the design sprite data is set in the drawing order after each image data constituting the image at the first display timing. Therefore, an image is displayed in which the symbol change display is executed in front of the background image in which the wipe switching effect is being performed.

  Next, the setting process for the wipe switching effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). Further, at the timing when the setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed, each image data constituting the image at the display timing after being specified in the current drawing list is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. It has already been done.

  In step S4001, it is determined whether link designation is set in the drawing list. If the link designation has not been set, this setting process ends. If the link designation is set, the reference side image data PD39 specified as the current drawing target and the reference side image data PD39 in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are transferred in step S4002. Know the address. In a succeeding step S4003, parameters of the reference side image data PD39 are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S4004, the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 designated as the current drawing target and the addresses to which the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In a succeeding step S4005, each parameter of the dependent side image data PD40 to PD42 is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S4006, link setting is performed. As a result, the dependent side image data PD40 to PD42 ascertained in step S4004 are linked to the reference side image data PD39 ascertained in step S4002. By the way, at the time of this link, each of the dependent side image data PD40 to PD42 to which the parameter grasped in step S4005 is applied is linked to the reference side image data PD39 to which the parameter grasped in step S4003 is applied. .

  In a succeeding step S4007, it is determined whether or not the wipe designation is set. If the wipe designation has not been set, the setting process ends. If the wipe designation has been set, in step S4008, the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect designated this time and the α data PD46 and PD47 in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are transferred. Know the address that is located. Then, the α data read based on the grasped address is combined with the reference side image data PD39 to which the dependent side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Next, the state of the wipe switching effect using the link display function will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing before the start of the wipe switching effect, as shown in FIG. 70A, the image PC12 at the first display timing is displayed. In addition, just before the image PC12 at the first display timing, the symbols are fluctuated and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, when the wipe switching effect is started, after the image data PD43 to PD45 constituting the image PC13 at the later display timing are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the reference side image data The image data in a state where the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 are linked to the PD39 and the α data PD46 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 66C are synthesized.

  In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 at the first display timing are drawn so as to overlap the image data PD43 to PD45 at the second display timing. In the drawing, the calculation for fusion as described above is executed. Is done. Therefore, in each dot corresponding to the pixel where the complete transmission area PA28 is synthesized, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing remains. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the pixel where the opaque area PA29 is synthesized at the first display timing is overwritten on the dot to be drawn, the numerical information of the image data at the second display timing is erased and the first display timing is deleted. The image data at the timing is written. As a result, as shown in FIG. 70B, a wipe image in which the outside of the boundary is the image PC13 at the later display timing and the inside of the boundary is the image PC12 at the first display timing is displayed. In addition, before the wipe image, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Then, instead of the α data PD46 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 66 (c), the drawing processing is executed using the α data PD47 for the wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 66 (d). As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the area in which the image PC13 at the later display timing is displayed is increased instead of the area where the image PC12 at the earlier display timing is displayed becomes narrower.

  As described above, the background image switching is performed gradually over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, so that the background image switching mode can be novel and the background image switching mode can be changed. Diversification is also possible.

  Further, since the respective image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image of the front display timing are linked, and the linked image data is combined with the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect, the The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for the wipe switching effect is individually combined with the image data PD39 to PD42.

  Further, after the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear display timing is simply drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the front display timing are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b. Configuration. That is, with respect to the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear display timing, the image data may be drawn as usual according to the drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

  The α data may be individually applied to the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 for the purpose of anti-aliasing or partial display. Further, the link designation may be made for the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear display timing.

  Further, the direction of the wipe switching is not limited to the configuration in which the image at the previous display timing narrows from the outside to the inside over a plurality of frames, and may be configured to narrow from the inside to the outside. May be narrowed from one predetermined side to one side opposite to the predetermined side.

<Structure for smoothly moving and displaying sprites>
Next, a configuration for smoothly moving and displaying the sprite will be described.

  When displaying an animation in which the sprite is moving in a predetermined moving direction, the sprite is drawn at a position shifted by a predetermined dot in the moving direction every frame or every plural frames. A sprite for smooth movement is set as the sprite.

  The sprite for smooth movement will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, and FIGS. 71B and 71C show sprite data PD48 and PD49 for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction over time. Further, the display size is smaller than that of the other individual images PC 14 which are simultaneously displayed as an image for one frame. Note that the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is not limited to an individual image representing a cloud, but may be an individual image representing another object such as an airplane if displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. There may be.

  A plurality of sprite data are set as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. Specifically, two sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set. The sprite data PD48 and PD49 both represent the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, but the second sprite data PD49 is based on the frame areas 82a and 82b in the movement direction with respect to the first sprite data PD48. Corresponds to the state of being moved by a half dot.

  Both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are data shifted by half a dot due to the difference in α value at the boundary portion. When the two sprite data PD48 and PD49 are compared by taking each pixel constituting the same boundary portion as an example, as shown in FIGS. 71 (b) and (c), the α value of the pixel on the movement direction destination side is different. ing.

  As described above, when the α value is “0”, it corresponds to complete transmission information, and in the pixel having the α value of “0”, all the images overlapping on the back side of the display screen G are transmitted. On the other hand, when the α value is “1”, it corresponds to the opaque information, and the pixels having the α value of “1” are in a state of filling the overlapping image on the back side of the display screen G. Further, when 0 <α value <1, the image overlapping on the back side of the display screen G is transmitted in a state of being translucent by the α value.

  By the way, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is superimposed on the image on the back side, a calculation for fusion is executed. The calculation for the fusion is as described above.

  The first sprite data PD48 has the boundary α value set as shown in FIG. 71 (b), whereas the second sprite data PD49 has the boundary α value as shown in FIG. 71 (c). The α value of the portion is set to a value corresponding to a state shifted by half a dot in the moving direction with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Thus, when the second sprite data PD49 is set at the same position as the coordinates at which the first sprite data PD48 is set, as shown by a dashed line in FIGS. 71 (b) and (c), The sprite CH5 for smooth movement is visually recognized as if it has moved by half a dot based on the frame regions 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount based on the display screen G.

  Incidentally, the second sprite data PD49 is created by enlarging the first sprite data PD48 by two times, shifting the first sprite data PD48 by one dot based on the frame areas 82a and 82b, and then halving it. .

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing smooth movement display using the sprite data PD48 and PD49. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for smooth movement executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the smooth movement is executed in the calculation processing for the background in step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 43). The arithmetic processing for smooth movement is started when information on smooth movement is set in the currently set data table.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether it is time to start smooth movement display. This determination is made based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, the area for the progress target flag set in the work RAM 73 is cleared in step S4102. In a succeeding step S4103, the numerical information of the progress counter set in the work RAM 73 is initialized.

  In the following step S4104, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as the current drawing target. In a succeeding step S4105, the coordinate information of the first sprite data PD48 is calculated and derived by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter, and the derived coordinate information is stored in the work RAM 73 in the first sprite data PD48. The information for control is updated by writing to the area secured in correspondence with. Incidentally, the coordinate information is set to correspond one-to-one with the numerical information of the progress counter.

  After that, in step S4106, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the reserved area to update control information. . Further, in step S4107, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, the calculation processing ends. When the above processing is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target, and the initial value coordinates are set as the coordinates. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, it is determined in step S4108 whether or not the progress target flag is set. If the progress target flag has not been set, it means that the first sprite data PD48 has been set in the previous frame, and the flow advances to step S4109.

  In step S4109, a progress target flag is set. In a succeeding step S4110, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as a current drawing target. In a succeeding step S4111, the control is performed by grasping the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 and writing the grasped coordinate information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the second sprite data PD49. Update information for In this case, since the update processing of the progress counter has not been executed, the information of the same coordinates as the information of the coordinates where the first sprite data PD48 is drawn in the previous frame is grasped.

  After that, in step S4112, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the second sprite data PD49, and the derived parameter information is written in the reserved area to update control information. . Further, in step S4107, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, the calculation processing ends. When the above processing is executed, in the drawing list, the second sprite data PD49 is set as a drawing target, and the same coordinates as the previous frame are set as its coordinates. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  If it is determined in step S4108 that the progress target flag has been set, it means that the second sprite data PD49 has been set in the previous frame, and the flow advances to step S4113.

  In step S4113, the progress target flag is cleared. In a succeeding step S4114, the progress counter is updated so as to be incremented by one. In a succeeding step S4115, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a current drawing target. In the following step S4116, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is calculated and derived by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter updated in step S4114, and the derived coordinate information is secured as described above. The control information is updated by writing to the area. In this case, information of coordinates advanced by one dot in the moving direction with respect to the coordinates set in the previous frame with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4117, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the reserved area to update control information. . Further, in step S4107, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, the calculation processing ends. When the above processing is executed, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and its coordinates are shifted by one dot from the coordinates set in the previous frame in the movement direction. Is set. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

  Next, setting processing for smooth movement performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for smooth movement is executed in the content grasping process of step S2204 in the drawing process (FIG. 41). The setting process for smooth movement is started when the smooth movement designation is set in the drawing list.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the current drawing target is the first sprite data PD48. If it is the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S4202, where the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a drawing target, and the first sprite data PD48 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address. On the other hand, if the data is not the first sprite data PD48, the flow advances to step S4203 to grasp the second sprite data PD49 as a drawing target, and the second sprite data PD49 in the change area 81b of the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Figure out which address is being forwarded.

  After executing the processing in step S4202 or S4203, the coordinates of the current drawing target are grasped in step S4204, and in step S4205, other parameters are grasped, and then the setting processing ends.

  By performing the setting process for smooth movement, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the sprites to be drawn this time among the sprite data PD48 and PD49 for the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. The data is drawn at the specified coordinates. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the first sprite data PD48 is set such that the coordinates in the movement direction are “n” in the first frame, and the coordinates in the movement direction are set in the second frame. The second sprite data PD49 is set to be the same for "n". In the third frame, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinates in the movement direction are “n + 1”. In the fourth frame, the second sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinates in the movement direction are the same as “n + 1”. Is set. After the first sprite data PD48 and the second sprite data PD49 are alternately set for the same coordinates, the state in which the moving direction is updated by one dot is repeated. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is visually perceived as if it has progressed by half a dot on the basis of the frame areas 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount on the display screen G for each frame. The display can be moved smoothly.

  In particular, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement has a smaller display size than the other individual images PC14 displayed at the same time, and therefore, for each frame, one dot or the display screen G is displayed on the basis of the frame areas 82a and 82b. In a configuration in which the movement is performed by a distance corresponding to the one dot as a reference, the movement amount with respect to the area of the self becomes a large ratio, and there is a concern that the movement may be noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, such a problem does not occur, and the sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  The sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image representing a cloud. When the frame rate is reduced as if the cloud is moving slowly, the frame areas 82a and 82b are referenced at the movement timing. In a configuration in which the movement is performed by one dot or by a distance corresponding to the one dot based on the display screen G, there is a concern that the movement may be conspicuous as rattling. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, even if the movement is performed by one dot for each of a plurality of frames or by a distance corresponding thereto, movement by less than one dot is performed with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b during that period. , Sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  Incidentally, as a configuration for reducing the frame rate, specifically, the information of the same coordinates is applied to the first sprite data PD48 for the first plurality of frames, and the information of the same coordinates is stored in the second sprite data PD48. When the second number of frames are applied to the sprite data PD49, the coordinate information may be advanced by one dot. In this case, the configuration may be such that the first number of frames and the second number of frames are the same or different. However, if it is desired to display as if the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is traveling at a constant speed, it is preferable that the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames be the same.

  Further, the smooth movement display as described above can be realized only by alternately drawing the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot. That is, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complexity of the processing configuration. Also, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 can be created by a simple method of making the α values of the outer edge portions different.

  Also, since the difference between the two sprite data PD48 and PD49 is half a dot, the apparent movement amount is the same when switching from one to the other and when switching from the other to one. Can be.

  The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot are provided. Sprite data shifted by less than one dot such as 1/4 dot or 1/4 dot may be provided. . In addition to the reference sprite data, a plurality of sprite data of less than 1 dot such as 1/4 dot, half dot, and 3/4 dot may be provided so as to have different movement amounts. .

  In a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b and the number of dots in the display screen G are in a one-to-one correspondence, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the display screen G with respect to the first sprite data PD48. Becomes data shifted by half a dot.

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is smaller than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is shifted from the first sprite data PD48 by half a dot with respect to the display screen G. It may be configured to be set as data. In this case, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by less than half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of half dot with respect to the display screen G.

  Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is larger than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is shifted from the first sprite data PD48 by half a dot with respect to the display screen G. It may be configured to be set as data. In this case, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data shifted by half a dot or more with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 may be set as data shifted by less than one dot instead of half dot with respect to the display screen G.

  Also, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are not stored in the memory module 74 in advance, only one is stored in advance, and the other is stored in one of the sprite data after the power ON operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It may be configured to be created and saved separately. In this case, although it is necessary to create the one sprite data and store it separately, the processing load increases, but the storage capacity required for storing the sprite data in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

  Further, the configuration for the smooth movement may be applied to a sprite that is displayed so as to move partially, instead of a sprite that is displayed so as to move as a whole.

<Configuration for performing zoom-in effect using scaler 97>
Next, a configuration for performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  As described above, the VDP 76 outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the output target frame regions 82a and 82b, and displays the image signal on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. A display circuit 94 for displaying an image corresponding to the drawing data is provided (see FIG. 38). Incidentally, the image signal is a signal including gradation data for determining a display color in each dot (each pixel) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and is output to the symbol display device 31 based on a predetermined clock signal. .

  The display circuit 94 converts the number of pixels of the drawing data read from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b into the number of pixels designated by the display CPU 72, and converts each dot constituting the liquid crystal display section 31a of the symbol display device 31. A scaler 97 for generating gradation data of each pixel is provided.

  The scaler 97 is provided as a dedicated circuit for adjusting the resolution in the display circuit 94. As shown in FIG. 38, the scaler 97 is provided with a resolution adjusting buffer 97a. When gradation data is generated by the scaler 97, the drawing data created in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b is transferred to the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the gradation data for the designated number of pixels is transferred. The drawing data is converted so that In this conversion, a linear interpolation process is executed. Specifically, the number of pixels can be converted using bilinear filtering.

  Based on the gradation data created in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, an image signal is generated by an image signal output unit 98 provided in the display circuit 94 and output to the symbol display device 31. The image of one frame is displayed. Incidentally, the image signal output unit 98 is provided with a line buffer 98a, and when generating and outputting the image signal, detailed control is performed using the line buffer 98a.

  Here, when the drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written to all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 The number of dots is × 600. On the other hand, the resolution of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is 1024 × 768 dots. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a higher resolution than the frame regions 82a and 82b.

  When the adjustment value (adjustment information) of the resolution in the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value (initial adjustment information), the drawing data created at a resolution of 800 × 600 corresponds to 1024 corresponding to the liquid crystal display unit 31a. It is converted to grayscale data of × 768 resolution. This conversion will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 74A, the area defined by the solid line is the area of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the area defined by the dashed line is the area in which the transferred drawing data PD50 is written. When the resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD50 at a resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, the drawing data PD50 is converted into gradation data PD51 having a size indicated within a range defined by a two-dot chain line. In this case, the number of pixels of the gradation data PD51 matches the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and all data forming the gradation data PD51 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. That is, at the time of conversion to the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, gradation data for all dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is created using all pixels of the drawing data. The number of pixels of the gradation data increases.

  Note that the initial adjustment value is set based on the execution of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) by the display CPU 72 as described above. The area within the resolution adjusting buffer 97a to which the drawing data PD50 is transferred is always constant.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a zoom-in effect of an image is performed using the scaler 97. In this zoom-in effect, the adjustment value of the resolution in the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for enlargement. A plurality of types of enlargement adjustment values are set so that the corresponding resolutions are different from each other, and each resolution has a higher resolution than the resolution of the initial adjustment value. The manner in which drawing data is converted into gradation data having a resolution corresponding to a predetermined enlargement adjustment value will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD52 indicated by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 74B at a resolution corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value, the gradation data of the size indicated within the range defined by the two-dot chain line It is converted to PD53. In this case, since the number of pixels of the gradation data PD53 is larger than the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, it is not possible to output all data constituting the gradation data PD53 to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal.

  On the other hand, the display CPU 72 specifies the range of the gradation data PD53 to be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. At this time, the address of the dot serving as the drawing reference point is specified in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, but the specification method is arbitrary as long as the specification can be performed well.

  The display circuit 94 outputs the data in the range indicated by the broken line in FIG. 74B as the image signal to the symbol display device 31 by designating the drawing reference point. In this case, since an image signal is output using a part of the pixels of the drawing data, the image display on the symbol display device 31 is performed in a state where a part of the image substantially corresponding to the drawing data is enlarged. Is performed.

  Note that the drawing reference point corresponds to any one of the four corners in the range in which the image signal is to be output. However, which dot is to be targeted is arbitrary. The information capacity of the resolution adjustment buffer 97a is set to an information capacity capable of storing all pixels of the gradation data, regardless of which enlargement adjustment value is used to convert the drawing data to the gradation data. Have been.

  A specific processing configuration for executing an image zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a zoom-in effect performed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the zoom-in effect is shared and executed in each calculation processing of steps S2315 to S2317 in the task processing (FIG. 43), but is shown as a single flowchart here for convenience of explanation.

  First, in step S4301, background image data is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S4302, the parameters of the grasped background image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the background image data. Update control information.

  In a succeeding step S4303, image data for the effect is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4304, the parameters of the grasped image data for effect are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the image data for effect. Update control information.

  In the following step S4305, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is time to enlarge the scaler 97 compared to the initial adjustment value. If it is not the timing to enlarge, in step S4306, the image data for the symbol (ie, the symbol sprite data) is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4307, the parameters of the grasped image data for the symbol are calculated and derived based on the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value, and the information of the derived parameters is stored in the work RAM 73 in the work RAM 73. The control information is updated by writing to the area secured in correspondence with the symbol image data. Then, the calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the zoom-in effect is performed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), drawing for drawing an image corresponding to the setting of the scaler 97 to the initial adjustment value is performed. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

  On the other hand, if it is the timing to enlarge the scaler 97 compared to the initial adjustment value, in step S4308, information on the current enlargement adjustment value is grasped. Information of each adjustment value for enlargement is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance, and is transferred to the work RAM 73 by a time required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information of one of the adjustment values for enlargement is set, and in step S4308, the information of the adjustment value for enlargement indicated in the currently set data table is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S4309, information on the current drawing reference point is grasped. The information on the drawing reference point is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information on the adjustment value for enlargement. The information of each drawing reference point is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance, and has been transferred to the work RAM 73 by a time required by the display CPU 72. In the data table, information on one of the drawing reference points is set, and in step S4309, the information on the drawing reference point indicated in the currently set data table is grasped. In a succeeding step S4310, zoom-in designation information is stored.

  Then, in step S4311, the image data for the symbol is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4312, the parameters of the grasped image data for the design are calculated and derived based on the fact that the scaler 97 is set to the current adjustment value for enlargement, and the information of the derived parameters is stored in the work RAM 73. Then, the information for control is updated by writing into the area secured in correspondence with the image data for the symbol. In this case, the coordinates and the size of the image data for the symbol are calculated so that the display position and the symbol size of the symbol on the display screen G are not changed between the timing before the execution of the zoom-in effect and the timing during the execution.

  Specifically, when the resolution of image data of the same size is adjusted by the scaler 97, the size of the resolution adjustment using the enlargement adjustment value is larger than the resolution adjustment using the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the size information of the image data for the design specified in the drawing list is set to the initial adjustment value so that the size after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the size after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Is specified smaller than.

  Further, when the resolution of the image data is adjusted by the scaler 97, the position of the image is displaced in the direction of enlargement in the case of the resolution adjustment using the enlargement adjustment value as compared with the case of the resolution adjustment using the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the coordinate information of the image data for the pattern specified in the drawing list is set to the initial adjustment value so that the position after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is the same as the position after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Is specified by being displaced in the direction opposite to the enlargement direction than in the case of

  After executing the processing in step S4312, the present arithmetic processing ends. When the arithmetic processing for the zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), an image corresponding to the fact that the scaler 97 is set to any of the enlargement adjustment values is drawn. Then, a drawing list is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, the drawing list includes information on the adjustment value for enlargement, information on the drawing reference point, and zoom-in designation information indicating that a zoom-in effect should be performed. In addition, for the image data for the symbol, information of a parameter corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value specified at the same time is set.

  Incidentally, as described above, the number of image data for which adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information is equal to or less than the number of image data for which adjustment for enlargement is not performed.

  Next, the setting process for the zoom-in effect performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). When the zoom-in designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the zoom-in designation information is set in association with the image data for the symbol, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is performed in the drawing order of the image data for the symbol in the current drawing list. Fired when

  In the drawing order in the drawing list, the image data for the background and the image data for the effect are set as an order prior to the image data for the design, so that the setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed. At the timing, the drawing of the background image data and the rendering image data has been completed.

  First, in step S4401, the information of the adjustment value for enlargement specified in the drawing list is set by writing it in the dedicated area of the register 92 (see FIG. 38). Here, the dedicated area is set as an area different from the area in which the information of the initial adjustment value is written. Therefore, even if the information of the adjustment value for enlargement is set, the information of the initial adjustment value is not deleted.

  In the following step S4402, the information is set by writing the information of the drawing reference point specified in the drawing list into the dedicated area of the register 92. Here, when the resolution adjustment is performed using the initial adjustment value, it is sufficient that the drawing reference point always be a fixed drawing reference point. Therefore, the drawing reference point corresponding to the initial adjustment value is predetermined in the display circuit 94.

  In a succeeding step S4403, an enlargement flag is set in a predetermined area set in the register 92. When the display circuit 94 outputs an image signal by setting the enlargement flag, the resolution adjustment is performed using the enlargement adjustment value set in step S4401 and the resolution adjustment is performed in step S4402. A range in which the image signal is output is determined based on the drawing reference point. Note that the enlargement flag is deleted based on an instruction from the display CPU 72 when ending the zoom-in effect.

  In the subsequent step S4404, the image data for the symbol designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the image data for the symbol is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Also, in step S4405, the parameters of the symbol image data are grasped. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By performing the setting process for the zoom-in effect as described above, the drawing data created based on the drawing list specified this time is subjected to resolution adjustment with the corresponding adjustment value for enlargement and converted to gradation data. The data is converted, and data in a predetermined range based on the drawing reference point is output as an image signal.

  An output process executed by the display circuit 94 to output an image signal will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The output process is started when an instruction to output an image signal is issued from the display CPU 72, and is started substantially every time an image update start timing (for example, 20 msec) is reached.

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether an enlargement flag is set in the register 92. If the enlargement flag has not been set, in step S4502, a linear interpolation process corresponding to the initial adjustment value is performed. In this case, the information of the initial adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation processing is executed according to the initial adjustment value. In the linear interpolation processing, in order to interpolate the increase in the number of pixels due to the increase in resolution, the numerical information (or pixel value) of each pixel after the enlargement is linearly converted from the numerical information set for the four pixels before the enlargement. Performs bilinear interpolation obtained by interpolation. Note that the bilinear interpolation is not performed collectively for all pixels, but is performed sequentially for each predetermined number of pixels.

  In a succeeding step S4503, it is determined whether or not the conversion into the gradation data is completed, and if not completed, the process returns to the step S4502. If it has been completed, in step S4504, the output target dot is determined based on a predetermined initial reference point.

  Then, in step S4505, after performing the image signal output process, the output process ends. In the image signal output processing, image signals for the dots grasped in step S4504 are sequentially output.

  On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is set (step S4501: YES), a linear interpolation process corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value specified this time is executed in step S4506. In this case, information on the adjustment value for enlargement is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation processing is executed according to the adjustment value for enlargement. The content of the linear interpolation processing is as described above.

  In the following step S4507, it is determined whether or not the conversion to the gradation data has been completed. If not completed, the process returns to step S4506. If it has been completed, in step S4508, the drawing reference point specified this time is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the output target dot is grasped based on the grasped drawing reference point.

  Then, in step S4505, after performing the image signal output process, the output process ends. In the image signal output processing, image signals for the dots grasped in step S4508 are sequentially output.

  Next, the state of the zoom-in effect will be described. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for describing a state of a zoom-in effect. FIG. 78 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image at an image update timing immediately before a zoom-in effect is performed, and FIG. 78 (b) is an image update timing next to the image update timing and zooms in. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of the timing when the production was started.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, a character CH6 is displayed in front of the background image PC15 and near the center thereof, and symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed at the upper left and upper right. ing. This image is in a state where the reach display is performed with the symbols CH7 and CH8, and the character CH6 is displayed as the effect of the reach display. When the image is displayed, each image data is drawn in the same frame size and relative position as in FIG. 78A in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output.

  At the next image update timing in the above state, a zoom-in effect is started. In this case, in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be output, each image data is drawn with a relative size and a relative position as shown in FIG. 78 (b-1). The resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data with the adjustment value for enlargement, and the image signal is output based on the area grasped on the basis of the drawing reference point, as shown in FIG. 78 (b-2). Image is displayed.

  In the image, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 are enlarged so as to zoom in on the character CH6, as compared with the image in FIG. On the other hand, the positions and sizes of the symbols CH7 and CH8 are the same, substantially the same or similar to the positions and sizes in the case of FIG. 78 (a).

  By the way, when the comparison is made on the same line of the character CH6, in the state of FIG. 78 (a), the line is displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 78 (c-1). In the state of b-2), a line is displayed with gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 78 (c-2).

  Also, by displaying the image shown in FIG. 78 (b-2) and then displaying the image shown in FIG. 78 (a), the VDP 76 has just returned to the resolution adjustment based on the initial adjustment value. Is displayed as if zoomed out. That is, the pachinko machine 10 can perform not only a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 but also a zoom-out effect using the scaler 97. Further, as described above, since a plurality of combinations of the adjustment value for enlargement and the drawing reference point are set, the above-described zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed stepwise.

  As described above, the zoom-in effect can be performed using the scaler 97, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. For example, when rendering in the frame areas 82a and 82b, each image data is rendered in an enlarged state, so that a zoom-in effect can be similarly performed. In this case, all the image data to be rendered in the VDP 76 is enlarged. Processing needs to be performed, and the processing load on the VDP 76 increases. Further, for example, a configuration in which image data for normal size and image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image is conceivable. In this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for enlarging and displaying the image is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, it is possible to perform the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect while suppressing the effect on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the effect on the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data.

  The size of the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is the same regardless of whether or not to perform the zoom-in effect. Thus, the creation of the drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b can be performed with the same processing configuration regardless of whether the zoom-in effect is performed or not.

  Further, in the display circuit 94, when the zoom-in effect is not performed, the resolution is adjusted with the specified initial adjustment value and the range in which the image signal is to be output based on the predetermined initial reference point is grasped. In, when the zoom-in effect is performed, only the adjustment value and the reference point to be referred to are changed. Therefore, the zoom-in effect can be performed while using the hardware configuration of the display circuit 94 when the zoom-in effect is not performed.

  Further, even when the zoom-in effect is performed, the symbol is not displayed in an enlarged manner. This prevents the visibility of the symbols from being reduced during the zoom-in effect. In particular, the display CPU 72 designates the parameters of the image data for symbols as parameters that are not to be displayed in an enlarged manner, and the VDP 76 only has to draw the image data for symbols in accordance with the parameters. The visibility of the design can be improved.

  In addition, when the zoom-in effect ends, the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is returned to the initial adjustment value. Thus, when the zoom-in effect ends, the display of the image according to the resolution of the display screen G can be restarted.

  The display circuit 94 may be configured to execute processing corresponding to the output processing (FIG. 77) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using a program. Further, the display circuit 94 may be provided separately from the VDP 76 instead of being built in the VDP 76. In this case, a display circuit 94 may be provided on a signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. A display circuit 94 may be provided thereon.

  Further, the initial adjustment value and the enlargement adjustment value may be written in the same area in the register 92. In this case, after the zoom-in effect, a process of returning the information of the area to the initial adjustment value may be performed. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently by the VDP 76.

  The initial reference point may be set in the register 92 when the initial adjustment value is set in the register 92. In this case, the area in which the initial reference point is set and the area in which the drawing reference point is set may be set separately, and the information may be set in the same area. If the configuration is such that the same area is set, a process of returning the information of the area to the initial reference point after the zoom-in effect may be performed. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently by the VDP 76.

  Further, the image data on which the information for the parameter is adjusted for enlargement is not limited to the image data for the design, and may be image data for a predetermined effect or image data for the background. . In this case, for example, the effect for enlargement may be made so that at least the whole of the effect character not to be enlarged is displayed, and at least the enlargement adjustment is made so that the position does not change. It may be configured.

  Further, a circuit for adjusting the size of the drawing data for performing the zoom-in effect or the zoom-out effect may be provided separately from the scaler 97.

  When the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is an initial adjustment value, only a part of the drawing data may be output as an image signal. In this case, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for reduction, the range in which the image data is output as the image signal in the drawing data is widened, so that the zoom from the state displayed with the initial adjustment value is achieved. Out production can be performed.

<Direction using moving image data>
Next, an effect utilizing moving image data will be described.

  The moving image data is image data that has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data based on one frame of still image data, and is coded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 79A to 79C, as moving image data, moving image data PD54 for before branching, moving image data PD55 for after branching, and moving image data PD56 for after branching B , Is set. The moving image data PD54 to PD56 are set to perform a super reach display that evolves without or through the normal reach display among the reach displays.

  In each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header.

  The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And

  The I picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data that can generate one frame of still image data by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before when decoding. . The B picture data is decoded by performing bi-directional prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames earlier and I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames later. Is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

  In the compressed data of each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the m-th frame. Also, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., N−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the n-th frame. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  The contents of the image set in each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A shows a part of the image set in the moving image data PD54 before branching, and FIG. 80B shows the contents set in the moving image data PD55 for A after branching. FIG. 80 (c) shows a part of the image set in the moving image data PD56 for B after branching.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a-1), the moving image data PD54 before the branch is overlapped with the background image PC16 before the branch showing a wavy state, so that the moving target character which is a boy character is included. Reference data (I picture data) PD57 corresponding to the image to which CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a-2) and (a-3), difference data (P-picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC16 but moves the movement target character CH9 in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD58 and PD59 are set. The still image data for one frame is created by the reference data PD57, and the difference data PD58 and PD59 are applied to the reference data PD57, so that the difference data PD58 and PD59 are applied to the background image PC16 set in the reference data PD57. One frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 59 is added is created.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b-1), the moving image data PD55 for after-branch A is overlapped with the background image PC17 for after-branch A in which a large number of jellyfish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD60 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b-2) and (b-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC17 but moves the movement target character CH9 in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD61 and PD62 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD60, and the difference data PD61 and PD62 are applied to the reference data PD60, so that each difference data PD61 is applied to the background image PC17 set in the reference data PD60. , PD62, one frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 is added is created.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (c-1), the moving image data PD56 for post-branch B overlaps with the background image PC18 for post-branch B in which a large number of fish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD63 corresponding to an image to which a certain movement target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (c-2) and (c-3), difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC18 but moves the movement target character CH9 in a predetermined direction. Data, B picture data) PD64 and PD65 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD63, and the difference data PD64 and PD65 are applied to the reference data PD63, whereby each difference data PD64 is applied to the background image PC18 set in the reference data PD63. , PD65, one frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 is added.

  Using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, super reach display corresponding to the effect branch is executed. Specifically, when the super reach display is started, the pre-branch effect is executed by each still image data created from the pre-branch moving image data PD54.

  Thereafter, at the branch timing, either the effect for after-branch A or the effect for after-branch B is selected. The selection is made in the case where the effect for after-branch A is selected when the operation device for operation 48 is operated at the timing for determination before the timing for branching, and the operation device for operation 48 is not operated at the timing for determination. Is selected, the effect for B is selected. When the after-branch A effect is selected, the after-branch A effect is executed using each still image data created from the after-branch A moving image data PD55. On the other hand, when the after-branch B effect is selected, the after-branch B effect is executed using each still image data created from the after-branch B moving image data PD56.

  In addition, the specific opportunity to select either the after-branch A effect or the after-branch B effect is not limited to the above, and the staging operation device 48 is operated in the specific operation mode at the above-described determination timing. When the operation is performed, the effect operation device 48 is operated for a specific number of times or for a specific period at the determination timing, or the timing is determined in advance from the start of the current super reach display to the branch timing. When one or a plurality of game balls have entered the entry section, one of the effects may be selected.

  A specific processing configuration for performing super reach display using the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a moving image executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the moving image is executed in the background calculation processing in step S2315 in the task processing (FIG. 43). The calculation processing for the moving image is started when a data table corresponding to the number of games in which the super reach display is performed is set.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not it is after the branch timing based on the currently set data table. If it is the timing before the branch, in step S4602, it is determined whether or not the pre-branch effect is being executed based on the currently set data table.

  If the pre-branch effect is not being executed, it means that the timing is before the start timing of the super reach display, and the process advances to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is time to decode the pre-branch moving image data PD54.

  If it is time to decode the moving image data PD54 before branching, in step S4604, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. More specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, an address at which the moving image data PD54 before branching is transferred in advance, and the moving image data PD54 before branching are decoded and the still image data for a plurality of frames is stored. When created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the change area 81b is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S4605, decode designation information for before branching is stored. Incidentally, the timing determined in step S4603 is set so that decoding of the pre-branching moving image data PD54 is completed before the pre-branch effect is started.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4603 or after execution of step S4605, in step S4606, an arithmetic process corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect occurs is executed. Specifically, based on the currently set data table, the image data for the background is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are calculated to update the control information. Then, the calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the image data for the background in the image corresponding to the timing before the pre-branch effect is generated is drawn. Is generated and transmitted to the VDP 76. If the current arithmetic processing is a timing to specify the decoding of the pre-branching moving image data PD54, the decoding specifying information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the above-described decoding related information related to the pre-branching moving image data PD54. Information of various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4602 that the pre-branch effect is being executed, the process advances to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is time to decode the post-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56.

  If it is time to decode the post-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56, it is determined in step S4608 whether the decoding target is the post-branch A moving image data PD55. Specifically, in the data table, a key to be used to determine whether or not the operation device for operation 48 was operated at the timing for determination before the branch timing is set, and when the key is confirmed, Determines whether or not the flag indicating that the effect operation device 48 has been operated is set in the work RAM 73. The flag is set in the command corresponding process in step S403 when the reception of the operation occurrence command is confirmed in step S402 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72. In step S4608, an affirmative determination is made when the flag indicating that the effect operation device 48 has been operated has been set, and a negative determination has been made when the flag has not been set.

  If the decoding target is the moving image data PD55 for A after branching (step S4608: YES), in step S4609, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address at which the moving image data PD55 for A after branching is transferred in advance, and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching are decoded and a still image of a plurality of frames is decoded. When the data is created, the address of an area where the still image data is stored in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. Thereafter, in step S4610, decode designation information for post-branch A is stored.

  On the other hand, if the decoding target is the moving image data PD56 for after-branch B (step S4608: NO), various addresses are grasped in step S4611 based on the currently set data table. More specifically, the address at which the moving image data PD56 for branching B is pre-transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the moving image data PD56 for branching B are decoded and the still images for a plurality of frames are decoded. When the data is created, the address of an area where the still image data is stored in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. Thereafter, in step S4612, decode designation information for A after branch is stored.

  Incidentally, the timing determined in step S4607 is set such that the decoding of the target post-branch moving image data PD55 and PD56 is completed before any of the post-branch effects are started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4607, or after execution of step S4610 or step S4612, the process advances to step S4613. In step S4613, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored among the still image data created from the moving image data before branching is grasped. This address is determined based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4614, the parameters of the still image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data, thereby updating the control information. I do. Then, in step S4615, after storing the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is to be used, the calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for a moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data before branching is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. If the current arithmetic processing is a timing to designate the decoding of the moving image data PD55 for A after branching, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching are added to the decoding designation information. The information on the various addresses is set in the drawing list. On the other hand, if the current arithmetic processing is a timing to designate the decoding of the moving image data PD56 for post-branch B, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD56 for post-branching B The information on the various addresses is set in the drawing list.

  In addition, since the background image and the effect image are mixed in the still image data, it is not necessary to set the effect image separately from the still image data. Therefore, when still image data is set as a drawing target, the rendering operation processing in step S2316 is skipped. However, since the symbols are displayed separately from the still image data, the symbol calculation processing is not skipped. This is the same in other cases where still image data is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that it is after the branch timing, the process advances to step S4616. In step S4616, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the effect to be executed is the after-branch A effect. By the way, if the result of the determination in step S4608 is affirmative, the data corresponding to the after-branch A effect is set as the data to be referred to after the branch in the data table, and if the result of the determination is negative, the data table is used. Data corresponding to the after-branch B effect is set as data to be referred after the branch.

  If the effect to be executed is an effect for after-branch A, the flow advances to step S4617. In step S4617, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored among the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching is grasped. This address is determined based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4618, the parameters of the still image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data, thereby updating the control information. I do. Thereafter, in step S4619, after storing moving image designation information indicating that still image data created from the moving image data is to be used, the calculation processing ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data for the A after branching is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  When the effect to be executed is the effect for after-branch B, the process proceeds to step S4620. In step S4620, of the still image data created from the moving image data for B after branching, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is determined based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4621, the parameters of the still image data are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data, thereby updating the control information. I do. Then, in step S4622, after storing the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is to be used, the present calculation process ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the moving image is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the still image data created from the moving image data for the post-branch B is included as a drawing target. A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

  Next, a decoding process performed by the video decoder 93 of the VDP 76 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is started when any of the decoding specification information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72. The decoding process is started asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 41) executed by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 and the output process (FIG. 77) executed by the display circuit 94.

  First, in step S4701, the address of the moving image data specified this time is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S4702, the area to which the moving image data is to be developed is grasped from the information of the development destination address specified in the drawing list.

  In step S4703, the moving image data is read from the address grasped in step S4701, and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each still image data resulting from the decoding is written to each area of the address grasped in step S4702. Thereafter, the decoding process ends.

  Next, a moving image setting process performed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  The moving image setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S2204 of the drawing process (FIG. 41). Further, when moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for the moving image is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the moving image designation information is set in association with the still image data to be drawn, the setting process for the moving image is performed according to the drawing order of the still image data in the current drawing list. Fired when it becomes

  Note that, in the drawing order in the drawing list, since the still image data is set as an order prior to the image data for the symbol, after the setting processing for the moving image is executed and the still image data is drawn, , A symbol is drawn.

  First, in step S4801, information on the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S4802, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S4801. In the subsequent step S4803, the parameters of the still image data are grasped from the information set in the drawing list. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  By performing the moving image setting process as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S2205), the still image data is stored in a state where the parameters are applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Is drawn. In addition, since the image data for the design is also set in the current drawing list, the image data for the design is drawn so that the design is displayed in front of the still image corresponding to the still image data. . Then, by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, an image for one frame constituting the super reach display is displayed on the display screen G.

  As described above, since a series of images corresponding to the super reach display is displayed using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the images for each frame of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are individually set as still image data. Compared to the configuration in which the image data is stored, the super reach display is performed using a real image or a high-definition image while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing image data in the NAND flash memory 102. be able to.

  In the super reach display, a pre-branch effect is performed up to the branch timing, and after the branch timing, the content of the effect of the progress destination is switched according to the operation mode of the effect operation device 48. Thus, it is possible to suppress the super reach display from becoming uniform, and to provide various effects.

  In this case, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 include the moving image data PD54 before branching corresponding to the effect before branching, the moving image data PD55 for branching A corresponding to the effect for branching A, and the moving image data PD55 after branching. This is set separately from the post-branch B moving image data PD56 corresponding to the production effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 before branching is sequentially drawn only in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. A pre-production can be performed. After the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target among the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set by the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed only by sequentially drawing in the frame order.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. In addition, both a single moving image data set with a pre-branch effect and a post-branch effect for A and a single moving image data set with a pre-branch effect and a post-branch effect for B are prepared in advance. Another configuration is conceivable. However, it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the first order frame. Therefore, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when the super reach display is started, it is necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. By preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 separately as described above as compared to these assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used is switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the above-described super reach display can be suitably executed.

  When super-reach display is started, decoding is performed on the moving image data PD54 before branching, and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are decoded. Do not decode. As a result, the processing load at the time of starting the super reach display is reduced as compared with a configuration in which decoding is performed on all the moving image data PD54 to PD56 collectively.

  Also, the determination as to which of the post-branch A effect and the post-branch B effect is to be made is made during the execution of the pre-branch effect and before the branch timing. Of the moving image data PD55 for A and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, only the moving image data corresponding to the effect of the distribution destination is decoded. This makes it possible to smoothly start displaying a new moving image after the completion of the pre-branch effect. Further, as compared with a configuration in which bi-moving image data for branching is decoded, the processing load related to decoding is reduced, and the storage capacity required for decoding in the VRAM 75 is reduced.

  In addition, the above-described configuration in which the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately stored may be applied to an effect different from the effect in which the effect of the progress destination is arbitrarily selected according to the situation until the branch timing. Good. For example, in a configuration in which a first effect (first reach display) and a second effect (second reach display) that are common from the start timing to the middle and have different aspects from the middle are set, It may be configured to have first moving image data for displaying an image from the start to the middle and second moving image data and third moving image data corresponding to the mode from the middle. In this case, since the first moving image data can be used in common, the entire data capacity can be suppressed as compared with a configuration in which the entire moving image data is individually provided for each effect.

  In addition, for example, when only the normal reach display is performed as the display effect, the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, and the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed. In the configuration in which the case is set, moving image data for normal reach display, moving image data for first super reach display, and moving image data for second super reach display are set. It may be configured. In this case, in the game in which the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the moving image data for the normal reach display may be sequentially displayed. Also, in the game time in which the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the normal reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, and then the first super reach display moving image is displayed. What is necessary is just to sequentially display the still image data created from the data. Further, in the game time in which the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, the still image data created from the normal reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, and then the second super reach display moving image is displayed. What is necessary is just to sequentially display the still image data created from the data.

  According to this configuration, in each of the game times for performing the first super-reach display and the game times for performing the second super-reach display, the moving image data for the normal reach display may be commonly used. The overall data capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data of the super reach display and the moving image data of the second super reach display each include the contents of the normal reach display.

  Further, the mode after the effect before branching or after the common effect is not limited to two patterns, and may be three patterns, four patterns, or five or more patterns. In this case, the effect of having the moving image data PD54 to PD56 individually as described above is further enhanced.

  Also, the moving picture decoder 93 may be configured to execute the processing corresponding to the decoding processing (FIG. 82A) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using a program. Further, the video decoder 93 may be provided separately from the VDP 76 instead of being built in the VDP 76. In this case, the moving image decoder 93 may be provided on a signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and a signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. A moving image decoder 93 may be provided above.

  Further, in a configuration in which the timing for judging the effect after the branch is the same as or close to the timing of the branch, the moving image data PD55 for the after-branch A and the video data for the after-B for B during the period in which the effect before the branch is being executed The decoding may be performed on both of the moving image data PD56.

  Further, the configuration using a plurality of types of moving image data as described above may be applied not to the reach effect but to a jackpot effect or a notice effect before reach.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The NAND flash memory 102 provided in the display control device 70 has a lower data transfer speed than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, the supply of the operating power to the display CPU 72 is started because the boot data for the initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119 which requires a higher read speed than the NAND flash memory 102. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can promptly start the process for initial startup. Therefore, the control in the display CPU 72 can be started smoothly as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial startup is stored in the NAND flash memory 102.

  In addition, a random access memory such as a NOR flash memory is used for the ROM 53 of the main control device 50, and a NAND flash memory 102 is used for the memory module 74 of the display control device 70, so that the upstream control means can be used. A certain main controller 50 is configured to simplify the configuration relating to the reading of the control program data, and the display controller 70, which is a downstream control unit, is configured to emphasize a large amount of data that can be stored in advance. Can be.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, the display CPU 72 does not include the display target on the display screen G in a predetermined frame, but may include the display target on the display screen G in a subsequent frame. A control start process for deriving parameters is performed in advance on image data corresponding to individual images having characteristics. This makes it possible to disperse the control start timings so that there are not many individual images to be controlled in one processing cycle, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48, scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that the NAND-type flash memory 102 has a single image data. There is no need to set the storable size too large. Also, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time will be lengthened. However, since the transfer can be performed in units of divided part data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, when displaying an animation for displacing the small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, a plurality of small unit images are collectively set. This is a configuration in which control is performed so that the selected still images are sequentially switched. Thus, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while the processing load on the display CPU 72 is suppressed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, when the effect data PD17 is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, an addition process is performed. Thus, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is displayed in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Since the effect image CH2 is an image that transmits an image on the far side such as light or water droplets, it is uncomfortable when displayed irrespective of the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition processing, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, and the appearance is preferable without causing the above-mentioned discomfort.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, in the unit area where the effect data PD18 is drawn, the numerical information already stored therein is reduced in numerical value by the ratio of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. Numerical information obtained as a result of adding the numerical information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical information after the setting is set. Thus, after rendering of the effect data PD18, each numerical information of RGB in the unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b is suppressed from being the maximum value, and the occurrence of overexposure can be suppressed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used for subsequent use. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of effect data are drawn each time a plurality of effect effects are executed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 65, partial display of individual images such as symbols and characters is performed using α data and α palette data. This allows partial display of an individual image in a configuration in which image data cannot be partially handled by the VDP 76. Further, the data capacity of these α data and α palette data is smaller than that of image data. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which image data for whole display and image data for partial display are individually prepared for an individual image to be partially displayed, an increase in storage capacity required for storing image data is suppressed. In addition, partial display of an individual image can be performed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70, the background image switching is performed gradually over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, so that the background image switching mode can be novel. Besides, it is possible to diversify the manner of switching the background image. In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 constituting the image of the front display timing are linked, and the linked image data is combined with the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the α data for the wipe switching effect is individually synthesized for each of the image data PD39 to PD42.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, the first sprite data having a relationship shifted by half a dot from each other in the movement direction of the sprite CH5 is used as image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. The PD 48 and the second sprite data PD 49 are stored. The sprite data PD48 and PD49 are used alternately. This makes it possible to display the sprite CH5 for smooth movement as if it has progressed by half a dot on the basis of the frame areas 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount on the display screen G for each frame. The sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, a zoom-in effect can be performed using the scaler 97, and a zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. . For example, when rendering in the frame areas 82a and 82b, each image data is rendered in an enlarged state, so that a zoom-in effect can be similarly performed. In this case, all the image data to be rendered in the VDP 76 is enlarged. Processing needs to be performed, and the processing load on the VDP 76 increases. Further, for example, a configuration in which image data for normal size and image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image is conceivable. In this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for enlarging and displaying the image is performed not by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 but by the display circuit 94. Therefore, it is possible to perform the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect while suppressing the effect on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the effect on the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data.

  As described with reference to FIG. 79 to FIG. 82, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 include the moving image data PD54 before branching corresponding to the pre-branch effect, and the moving image data PD54 for branching A corresponding to the after-branch effect. The moving image data PD55 and the after-branch B moving image data PD56 corresponding to the after-branch B effect are set separately. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 before branching is sequentially drawn only in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. A pre-production can be performed. After the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target among the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set by the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed only by sequentially drawing in the frame order.

  When still image data for a plurality of frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. In addition, both a single moving image data set with a pre-branch effect and a post-branch effect for A and a single moving image data set with a pre-branch effect and a post-branch effect for B are prepared in advance. Another configuration is conceivable. However, it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the first order frame. Therefore, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when the super reach display is started, it is necessary to decode both of the moving image data. In this case, there is a concern that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. By preparing the moving image data PD54 to PD56 separately as described above as compared to these assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used is switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Therefore, the above-described super reach display can be suitably executed.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the display control device 190 is different from the above embodiments. FIG. 83 is a block diagram for describing an electrical configuration of the display control device 190.

  As shown in FIG. 83, a display control board 191 of the display control device 190 is provided with a first display CPU 193 and a second display CPU 194 as control means for creating a drawing list and transmitting it to the VDP 192. Further, a management CPU 195 is provided to control the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194.

  The management CPU 195 determines the content of the effect based on the instruction from the audio light emission control device 60 received through the input port 196, and based on the determination result, the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 each correspond to one frame. Provides the base information for determining the content of the image. The first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 are provided with information corresponding to different frames, respectively. The first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 correspond to an image for one frame based on the received information. The drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 192.

  The control program of each of the CPUs 193 to 195 is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory of the memory module 197, and is transferred in advance to the work RAM 198 by a timing required by each of the CPUs 193 to 195 based on a transfer instruction from the management CPU 195. You. Each of the CPUs 193 to 195 executes various processes while accessing the work RAM 198. In addition, image data is stored in the memory module 197 in advance, and the image data is preliminarily transferred to the expansion buffer 202 of the VRAM 201 by a timing required by the VDP 192 based on a transfer instruction from the management CPU 195. .

  The VDP 192 is provided with a first drawing unit 203 and a second drawing unit 204 in a one-to-one correspondence with the display CPUs 193 and 194. The drawing list transmitted from the first display CPU 193 is transmitted to the first drawing unit 203, and the drawing list transmitted from the second display CPU 194 is transmitted to the second drawing unit 204. Here, each of the drawing units 203 and 204 may be for 3D display as in the first embodiment, or may be for 2D display as in the second embodiment.

  Each of the drawing units 203 and 204 operates individually, and creates one frame of drawing data corresponding to the received drawing list in the VRAM 201. The frame buffer 205 of the VRAM 201 is provided with a first frame area 206, a second frame area 207, and a third frame area 208, and the drawing data by each of the drawing units 203 and 204 is stored in one of the frame areas 206 to 208. Is drawn.

  Each of the drawing units 203 and 204 is connected to each of the frame regions 206 to 208 through a selector unit 211. The selector unit 211 sets a drawing target of each of the drawing units 203 and 204 to one of the frame regions 206 to 208. You. Further, not only the drawing units 203 and 204 but also a display circuit 212 is connected to the selector unit 211, and the frame regions 206 to 208 to which the display circuit 212 outputs image signals are switched by the selector unit 211.

  In the above configuration, each of the drawing units 203 and 204 creates drawing data in each of the frame regions 206 to 208 using the drawing period of two frames, and when compared by the two drawing units 203 and 204, one drawing frame is used. The drawing data is created by shifting by the time difference of the drawing period. In other words, the creation of the drawing data is completed every drawing period for one frame. Then, at each update timing, the display circuit 212 outputs an image signal to a frame area that is not a drawing target of each of the drawing units 203 and 204 as an output target. As described above, by creating the drawing data by the triple buffer method, the image is updated every time the update timing of one frame is obtained while securing the drawing period of two frames as the creation period of the drawing data of one frame. Can be done. Therefore, compared to the above-described embodiments, more time is allowed in the period of creating the drawing data, and even if the image is configured to display a complicated image or a large-screen image, the image can be displayed better.

  In the above configuration, the first drawing unit 203 creates drawing data for one frame in the first frame area 206 and the second frame area 207 alternately in a drawing period for one frame. May be configured such that one frame of drawing data is created in the third frame area 208 in a drawing period of a plurality of frames. In this case, the drawing data can be basically created by the double buffer method, and the drawing data corresponding to a particularly complicated image can be created over a drawing period of a plurality of frames.

  Further, the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be two and the number of the frame regions may be four or more. The number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be three. And four or more frame regions may be provided, or five or more combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be provided, and six or more frame regions may be provided. . In other words, a plurality of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit are provided, and the number of frame regions is equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding one, whereby drawing data for one frame is created using a drawing period for a plurality of frames. be able to.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the background arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 is different from that of the first embodiment. The arithmetic processing for the background will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S4901, the rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4902, various parameters of the grasped rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In the next step S4903, the object to be updated for the background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S4904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

  Thereafter, in step S4905, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing cycle is a processing cycle for creating a drawing list corresponding to a frame immediately before the advanced effect. .

  The extended effect is an effect in which the number of effect characters increases, an effect in which the action of the effect character is newly added, and an effect in which an effect character with a large processing load is displayed. It is a production corresponding to. Further, in the development effect, in the effect calculation process (step S504) in the task process (FIG. 12) of the display CPU 131, a process of grasping an object corresponding to the development effect and a process of updating information for controlling the object are executed. In addition, in the rendering setting process (step S603) in the rendering process (FIG. 14) of the VDP 135, the geometry calculation and rendering as described above are performed on the object corresponding to the advanced rendering.

  If it is determined in step S4905 that it is the timing immediately before the development effect, the process proceeds to step S4906 to store the separately designated execution designation information, and then ends the calculation process.

  When the arithmetic processing for the background is executed as described above, the image data for the background corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, The execution designation information for separate storage is set. By executing the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment on the drawing list in the VDP 135, the background drawing data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is separately stored. Is done. In this case, in the present embodiment, a separate storage buffer is provided for the VRAM 134 instead of the mode buffer 145, and the background drawing data is separately stored in the separate storage buffer.

  If it is determined in step S4905 in the background arithmetic processing (FIG. 84) that it is not the timing immediately before the development effect, in step S4907, the development effect is being performed based on the currently set data table. It is determined whether or not. When the development effect is not being performed, the present arithmetic processing ends. In this case, by outputting a drawing list corresponding to the drawing list, the VDP 135 creates background drawing data as usual using the specified rearmost image and object.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the development effect is being performed, the use specifying information of the separately-stored data is stored in step S4908, and the calculation process ends.

  When the arithmetic processing for the background is executed as described above, at least use designation information of separate storage data is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing. By performing the background drawing data creation process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment on the drawing list in the VDP 135, at least rendering is not performed on the background drawing data. The separately stored background drawing data is diverted as background drawing data under development.

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where the processing load for displaying the effect character is increased, the rendering of the background drawing data is omitted. Thus, in a situation where an advanced effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 135 from becoming extremely large and the occurrence of an inconvenience such that a processing drop occurs.

  The background drawing data stored separately corresponds to the background image displayed in the frame immediately before the start of the development effect. Thereby, even if the background image is diverted during the development effect, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  When the background image is an image displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction over a display period for a plurality of frames, scroll display is performed until immediately before the development effect, and scroll display is performed during the development effect. It will be in a stopped state.

  In the above processing configuration, the display CPU 131 may not calculate and update the parameters of the background image data during the development effect, and the VDP 135 may not perform the geometry calculation. In this case, the processing load is further reduced.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be independently applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or a predetermined combination may be applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments. Further, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment that is not illustrated as an application target of the configuration.

  (1) In order to improve the data reading speed in the display CPUs 72 and 131 and the VDPs 76 and 135, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are not used as the memory modules 74 and 133, but NOR. A configuration for pre-transferring data and a configuration for reading boot data from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to a configuration in which a memory that can be randomly accessed such as a flash memory is used.

  (2) When attention is paid to the effect that the initial setting process can be smoothly performed, the boot memories 119 and 179 are not provided, and the boot data is stored in the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. Before the setting process is started, the boot data may be transferred to the work RAMs 73 and 132 in advance. In this case, it is preferable that the display CPUs 72 and 131 execute a wait process until the transfer of the boot data to the work RAMs 73 and 132 is completed. In the case of the above configuration, although the time from the power supply start timing to the display CPUs 72 and 131 to the substantial start timing of the initial setting process is longer than in each of the above embodiments, the initial setting process can be smoothly performed. It becomes possible.

  (3) In the above embodiments, the program data may be stored in another random accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 in advance. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of the image data is stored in another random accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162.

  (4) The boot memories 119 and 179 may be provided separately from the memory modules 74 and 133. In this case, a signal path between the boot memories 119 and 179 and the display CPUs 72 and 131 is a signal path between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, and a signal path between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the RAMs 73 and 75. , 132, 134, data can be transferred from the memory modules 74, 133 to the work RAMs 73, 132 and the VRAMs 75, 134 using the period during which boot data is read into the display CPUs 72, 131. It becomes possible.

  (5) The program data of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) may be constituted only by the boot data without requiring the data of the latter half. In this case, it is necessary to increase the required storage capacity of the boot memories 119 and 179 as compared with the above embodiments, but it is not necessary to transfer the program data for the initial setting process during the initial setting process. Incidentally, in this configuration, it is necessary that the program data for instructing the transfer of the common program data and the common image data is set in the boot data.

  (6) In addition to the memory modules 74 and 133, a memory for storing image data in advance may be provided. More specifically, a NOR flash memory is provided as the separate memory, and ordinary image data is stored in the NOR flash memory. By connecting the NOR flash memory to the VDPs 76 and 135 to display an image corresponding to the common image data, the common image data may be read from the NOR flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of memories for storing image data in advance. However, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can handle the common image data without transferring the common image data. It is possible to favorably display the resulting image. Even in this configuration, the NOR flash memory stores only ordinary image data, and the memory modules 74 and 133 store change image data whose data capacity is likely to increase with the diversification of effects. With this structure, a NOR flash memory having a small storage capacity may be used, so that the above effects can be achieved while reducing cost. Further, the above configuration may be applied to commercial program data.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, when backup power is not supplied to the RAM of the display control devices 70 and 130 and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data group stored in the RAM until then is Instead of a configuration in which the RAM is destroyed or erased, a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the RAM may be employed.

  As a means for supplying the backup power, the power supply and firing control device 57 may also be used as a power supply unit during power supply for supplying backup power to the RAM 54 of the main control device 50 or the like. An intermediate power supply unit may be provided.

  (8) The storage means to which the program data and the image data are transferred in advance has a higher data reading speed than the NAND flash memories 102 and 162, and if the data can be overwritten, the RAM is a volatile storage means. Not limited.

  (9) The configuration of pre-transfer of program data and image data and the configuration of reading boot data from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to control devices other than the display control devices 70 and 130. For example, the present invention may be applied to the sound emission control device 60. Further, the present invention may be applied to the main control device 50, the payout control device 55, or the power supply and firing control device 57. Further, in a configuration in which a movable object that performs an operation for playing a game is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to a control device that drives and controls the movable object.

  (10) For an image displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation over a display period for a plurality of frames, an operation in a predetermined order may be reproduced in the forward direction, and then the image may be reproduced in the reverse direction. . In this case, since it is not necessary for the first operation and the last operation to have continuity, it is easier to create image data in the design stage than in the case of loop reproduction.

  (11) When the processing load on the display CPUs 72 and 131 and the VDPs 76 and 135 increases, such as when the production characters perform complicated actions or when the production characters increase, the background characters may be used. The display of the non-attention character may be continued, but the operation may not be updated. Thereby, the processing load is reduced.

  (12) A plurality of image data for displaying a predetermined character may be simultaneously set in the frame areas 82a and 82b. Thus, it is possible to display a plurality of characters while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance. Further, in this case, the image data may be set by inverting left and right, or when performing an effect of passing through a predetermined position, the coordinates may be set so that the timing of passing through the position is different.

  (13) Image data in which a plurality of effect images are combined may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the visual effect by the effect image can be enhanced while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system. A configuration may be adopted in which a single camera is commonly set for image data.

  (15) In the first embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the design image. However, the image data is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image. Or a configuration in which the effect image and the design image are collectively projected, or a configuration in which all of them are projected together.

  (16) In the first embodiment, when performing texture mapping processing, a texture may be attached to only a projected surface of a single object. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of performing texture mapping before projection, texture mapping may be performed after projection.

  (17) In the first embodiment, the display of the symbol may be performed based on the data obtained by pasting the two-dimensional image data on the plate polygon in the world coordinate system. In this case, by changing the vertex colors of the four corners of the plate polygon in order, a configuration may be adopted in which a display is made as if the symbol is illuminated by light.

  (18) In the first embodiment, by combining camera work in the world coordinate system and scaling of an object, a predetermined character is displayed in a certain size, and the moving distance of the character is determined. A display effect that shows for a long time may be performed.

  (19) When focusing on a characteristic configuration related to display control using image data in each of the above embodiments, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are used as storage means for storing program data and image data in advance. The configuration and the configuration in which the data is pre-transferred to the read RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134 are arbitrary, and a random access memory such as a NOR flash memory is used as the memory for pre-storing the program data and the image data. The above-described characteristic configuration related to display control may be applied to a configuration that is not used or a configuration that does not have advance transfer to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134.

  (20) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 is given priority. A configuration in which digestion may be applied may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side vertically, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are arranged on the left and right. The configuration may be such that they are arranged side by side, or a configuration in which these two working ports are arranged side by side diagonally. Furthermore, according to the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both the operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or the second operation port can be won.

  In the above configuration, the main display unit 33 displays a first display area for displaying the result of the determination as to whether or not the hold information has been obtained based on the winning of the upper operating port 23, and obtains the result based on the winning of the lower operating port 24. And a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of the validity of the held information. In this case, the change information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area prior to or based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning in the upper operating port 23 becomes the target of the success / failure determination. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the determination of the success or failure is displayed, and the fluctuation display of one game time is ended. In addition, prior to or based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning in the lower operating port 24 becomes the target of the success / failure determination, the fluctuation display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination is displayed, and the variation display of one game time is ended.

  (21) In the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is a target of the hit determination, and the case where the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 is the target of the hit determination, May be different. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of working ports are provided as in the above embodiments, the number of working ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, a configuration in which only one operation port is provided may be employed.

  (22) Instead of a configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the audio light emission control device 60 based on a command output from the main control device 50, based on a command output from the main control device 50 The display control devices 70 and 130 may control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 50, and both functions of the two control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. The configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

  (23) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball in a specific region of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right enters and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  In addition, a gaming machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, is provided with a plurality of reels as a plurality of orbiting bodies having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and stops. After a reel is stopped by operating a switch, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a slot such as a medal payout is provided to the player. The present invention can be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device separately from the reels, the present invention can be applied to control of image display in the display control device. Can be applied.

  A pachinko machine, a slot machine, and a slot machine, comprising a capturing device, and starting rotation of the reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capturing device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Feature A1. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with
A second storage means (work RAMs 73 and 132) for storing information read from the first storage means and at a higher speed for reading information than reading the information from the first storage means;
A transfer unit that reads, from the first storage unit, specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the control unit executes the specific control, and stores the specific information in the second storage unit (Controllers 101 and 161),
Based on the fact that a predetermined initial activation state has been established, initial control information used when executing the initial activation process in the control means is stored in advance, and the speed required for reading the information is the first speed. A third storage unit (boot memories 119 and 179) which is faster than the case of reading from the storage unit;
With
The control means includes:
A specific control execution unit (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage unit and executing the specific control;
An initial execution unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in the third storage unit and executing the initial startup process;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is performed by the control unit, in the second storage unit that requires a higher speed for reading the information than when reading the information from the first storage unit. The control means is configured to read out the specific information stored in the second storage means and execute the specific control. Therefore, the time required for reading the specific information in the control means can be reduced, and the specific control can be performed smoothly.

  Also, the initial startup information used when executing the initial startup process is stored in advance in the third storage unit, not in the first storage unit, but in a third storage unit in which the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage unit. Have been. Then, the initial startup process is executed by reading the initial startup information from the third storage means. Thereby, when executing the initial startup processing, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial startup information to the second storage means. Is shortened.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

  The “first storage unit” includes a storage unit that is used only for reading out information when the control unit executes control, and a storage unit that stores and retains information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Storage means. This is also true for the following independent features.

Feature A2. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with
The first storage unit has a NAND flash memory,
A second storage means (work RAMs 73 and 132) for storing information read from the first storage means and at a higher speed for reading information than reading the information from the first storage means;
A transfer unit that reads, from the first storage unit, specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the control unit executes the specific control, and stores the specific information in the second storage unit (Controllers 101 and 161),
Based on the fact that a predetermined initial activation state has been established, initial control information used when executing the initial activation process in the control means is stored in advance, and the speed required for reading the information is the first speed. A third storage unit (boot memories 119 and 179) which is faster than the case of reading from the storage unit;
With
The control means includes:
A specific control execution unit (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage unit and executing the specific control;
An initial execution unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in the third storage unit and executing the initial startup process;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A2, the use of the NAND flash memory as the first storage means makes it easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, in the second storage unit, which is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage unit. The configuration is such that the specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND-type flash memory having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be reduced, and the specific control can be performed smoothly. it can.

  Also, the initial startup information used when executing the initial startup process is stored in advance in the third storage unit, not in the first storage unit, but in a third storage unit in which the speed required for reading the information is faster than when reading from the first storage unit. Have been. Then, the initial startup process is executed by reading the initial startup information from the third storage means. Thereby, when executing the initial startup processing, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial startup information to the second storage means. Is shortened.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

Feature A3. The specific control execution means starts the specific control after the execution of the initial startup processing is completed,
Further, the information for initial startup includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information is to be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means,
The initial execution unit performs the transfer of the specific information to the second storage unit by referring to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the process of the initial startup. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the gaming machine executes a process of causing the display CPU 72 or 131 to execute step S310.

  According to the feature A3, since information for transferring the specific information is set in the information for initial startup, during the execution of the process for initial startup, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control is performed. Instructions are given. Thereby, the specific control can be started satisfactorily.

Feature A4. The control means reads the post-start information transferred to the second storage means, and executes post-start processing after the initial start processing (steps S307 to S131 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). (A function of executing the process of S314).
The initial activation information includes reference information for post-activation information indicating that the post-activation information should be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means,
The initial execution unit refers to the reference information for the post-startup information as at least a part of the initial start-up process, and transfers the post-startup information to the second storage unit to the transfer unit. (The processing of step S304 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).
Further, by completing the execution of the initial start-up process and the post-start-up process, the control unit completes an initial start-up setting based on the initial start-up state. The gaming machine according to features A1 or A2, wherein the means starts the specific control upon completion of the execution of the initial start-up process and the post-startup process.

  According to the feature A4, the information used for executing and completing the initial startup setting in the control unit is set separately for the information for initial startup and the information after startup. The initial startup information to be used first is stored in the third storage unit in advance, and the post-startup information to be used later is stored in the first storage unit in advance. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity of the third storage unit, as compared with a configuration in which the initial startup information and the post-startup information are collectively stored in the third storage unit in advance.

  In addition, even in this configuration, since information for transferring post-boot information is set in the initial boot information, during the execution of the initial boot process, the subsequent post-boot process may be performed. A necessary post-startup information transfer instruction is issued. Thereby, the post-startup process can be started satisfactorily.

Feature A5. The post-start information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage means and transferred to the second storage means,
The post-startup execution unit refers to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the post-startup process, so that the transfer unit transfers the specific information to the second storage unit. The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein the gaming machine executes a process to be performed (the process of step S310 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the feature A5, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the post-start information, during the execution of the post-start processing, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control is performed. Instructions are given. Thereby, the specific control can be started satisfactorily.

Feature A6. The transfer unit selects a storage area corresponding to the transfer instruction information among a large number of storage areas included in the first storage unit based on the transfer instruction information transmitted by the control unit, and stores the selected storage area. Management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for reading information stored in the area in advance;
When reading the initial start-up information from the third storage means, the control means transmits transfer instruction information corresponding to the information to the management means, and based on the information, reads out the information from the third storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5.

  According to the feature A6, since the management unit is provided, the transfer of the information from the first storage unit is favorably performed in response to the transfer instruction from the control unit. In this case, the control unit may transmit the transfer instruction information to the management unit even when reading the information from the third storage unit. Thereby, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control unit are aggregated, and the configuration regarding the transfer instruction can be simplified.

  Feature A7. The management unit, the first storage unit, and the third storage unit are provided as storage modules (memory modules 74, 133) having a common port unit (I / F 111, 171) for the control unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A6.

  According to the feature A7, the control unit controls the common port of the storage module in both the case of instructing the transfer from the first storage unit to the second storage unit and the case of reading the information from the third storage unit. The transfer instruction information may be transmitted to the unit. Thereby, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A8. The first storage means is a NAND flash memory,
The transfer means,
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114 and 174) for storing management information in which information of a physical address of the first storage means is associated with information of a logical address transmitted by the control means;
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control unit is executed, and a large number of storage areas included in the first storage unit are Management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for executing a reading process of reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, a bad block may occur in the NAND flash memory. However, since the management unit specifies the physical address corresponding to the logical address transmitted from the control unit, information of the information from the NAND flash memory is Reading is performed favorably.

Feature A9. The transfer unit stores the information read from the storage area of the first storage unit corresponding to the information of the logical address, and stores the information at a higher speed than that required when reading from the first storage unit. Means (cache memories 117 and 177) for transferring information corresponding to the information of the logical address to a transfer destination after storing the information in the storage means.
When the management unit reads information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control unit from the first storage unit and stores the information in the storage unit, the management unit corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. The game according to Feature A8, further comprising a prediction start unit (a function of executing the processing of Step S107 in the controller CPUs 113 and 173) for starting transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage unit. Machine.

  According to the feature A9, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means, and is transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. Instead, the logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address according to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage unit. Accordingly, when information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, transmission of the logical address information from the control unit is performed for the information corresponding to the subsequent logical address in the read order. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required for reading such information can be reduced.

  However, in the above configuration, reading of information corresponding to the first logical address greatly depends on the reading speed of the NAND flash memory. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and the initial startup information is stored in advance in the third storage unit instead of the first storage unit. Therefore, the initial startup process is started after the initial startup state. The time required to complete the process is reduced.

Feature A10. A display unit (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
The specific control execution unit is configured to perform display control of an image to be displayed on the display screen as the specific control,
The initial execution means performs, as the initial startup processing, processing for displaying an image (initial image) for a stage before display of an image based on the specific control is started (steps S311 and S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the gaming machine executes the processing.

  According to the feature A10, since the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial startup processing, the image on the display screen is displayed until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. The display of the image on the display screen can be started at an earlier timing as compared with the configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Feature A11. A display unit (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), wherein the control unit performs display control of an image to be displayed on the display screen;
The first storage unit stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the control unit and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen,
The transfer means controls the transfer means to perform the transfer while adjusting the information transfer timing so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising means (a function of executing steps S306, S309, and S313 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

  According to the feature A11, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in the first storage means in advance, the storage destinations of these information can be consolidated. Further, in this configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which control program data is transferred and the period during which image data is transferred are not overlapped. Transfer of each information can be performed favorably while suppressing complication.

Feature A12. A plurality of types of the control program data are stored, and the type of image data required for displaying an image based on the process using the control program data is different depending on the type of the control program data,
The transfer adjusting unit causes the transfer of the control program data corresponding to the image data to be performed prior to the transfer of the image data, and does not use the image data in a process using the control program data. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the image data is transferred while the processing is being performed.

  According to the feature A12, the transfer of the control program data corresponding to the image data is performed prior to the transfer of the image data. Further, in the processing using the control program data, the image data is transferred while the processing not using the image data is being performed, so that display of an image using the image data is not hindered. It becomes possible to.

Feature A13. The initial execution means includes, as the initial startup processing, processing for displaying an image (initial image) for a stage before display of an image is started based on the specific control (Steps S311 and S311 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). S312).
The transfer adjustment unit may be configured to transfer an image corresponding to the pre-stage image after the transfer of the initial startup information is completed and before the transfer of the control program data used in the specific control is started. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein data transfer is performed.

  According to the feature A13, since the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial startup processing, the image on the display screen is displayed until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. The display of the image on the display screen can be started at an earlier timing as compared with the configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Feature A14. The control unit is a downstream control unit that performs the specific control according to instruction information transmitted based on the execution of the upstream process in the upstream control unit (main control device 50),
Further, the first storage means is a NAND flash memory, and the upstream storage means (ROM 53) which previously stores control program data used when the upstream control means performs the upstream processing is random. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the gaming machine is an accessible memory.

  According to the feature A14, the control means on the upstream side can perform random access with respect to the reading of the control program data, thereby simplifying the configuration relating to the reading of the control program data. A configuration emphasizing capacity can be adopted.

Feature A15. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with
The first storage unit has a NAND flash memory,
A second storage means (work RAMs 73 and 132) for storing information read from the first storage means and at a higher speed for reading information than reading the information from the first storage means;
A transfer unit that reads, from the first storage unit, specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the control unit executes the specific control, and stores the specific information in the second storage unit (Controllers 101 and 161),
With
The control means includes:
A specific control execution unit (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the specific information stored in the second storage unit and executing the specific control;
Performing an initial startup process based on a predetermined initial startup state, wherein the speed transferred to the second storage unit or the speed required to read information is read from the first storage unit; An initial execution unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading out the initial startup information stored in another storage unit faster than the other and executing the initial startup process;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A15, the use of the NAND flash memory as the first storage means makes it easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, in the second storage unit, which is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage unit. The configuration is such that the specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND-type flash memory having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be reduced, and the specific control can be performed smoothly. it can.

  Further, the initial startup information used when executing the initial startup process is read out after being transferred to the second storage unit, or the speed required for reading out the information is faster than when reading out from the first storage unit. Is read from the storage means. As a result, the initial startup process can be performed well.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

Feature A16. A display unit (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G); a first storage unit (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) that stores information in advance; A display control means (display CPUs 72 and 131, VDPs 76 and 135) for controlling display of an image to be displayed on the display screen based on the information on the game machine.
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the display control means and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen,
A second storage means (work RAMs 73, 132, VRAMs 75, 134) for storing information read from the first storage means and at a higher speed for reading information than reading the information from the first storage means;
Transfer means (controllers 101 and 161) for reading necessary information from the first storage means and storing the necessary information in the second storage means at a timing before the timing required by the display control means;
With
The display control means is configured to execute processing using the control program data transferred to the second storage means and to display an image using the image data transferred to the second storage means. ,
Further, a transfer adjustment unit (display unit) for causing the transfer unit to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap. Functions for executing steps S306, S309, S313, etc. in the CPUs 72, 131);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A16, the information is stored in the second storage means at a timing earlier than the timing required by the display control means in the second storage means in which the speed required for reading the information is higher than that in the case where the information is read from the first storage means. The control means performs processing using the information stored in the second storage means and displays an image. Therefore, the time required for reading information in the display control means can be shortened, and an image can be smoothly displayed.

  Further, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in the first storage means in advance, the storage destinations of these information can be consolidated. Further, in this configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which control program data is transferred and the period during which image data is transferred are not overlapped. Transfer of each information can be performed favorably while suppressing complication.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily increase the processing speed in executing the control.

Feature A17. First storage means (NAND flash memories 102 and 162) for storing information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72 and 131) for executing specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with
The first storage unit has a NAND flash memory,
A second storage means (work RAMs 73 and 132) for storing information read from the first storage means and at a higher speed for reading information than reading the information from the first storage means;
A transfer unit that reads, from the first storage unit, specific information used when executing the specific control at a timing before the control unit executes the specific control, and stores the specific information in the second storage unit (Controllers 101 and 161),
With
The transfer means,
Management information storage means (control ROMs 114 and 174) for storing management information in which information of a physical address of the first storage means is associated with information of a logical address transmitted by the control means;
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control unit is executed, and a large number of storage areas included in the first storage unit are Management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for executing a reading process of reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process;
Storage means (cache memories 117 and 177) for storing information read from a storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address;
When information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to a transfer destination, the information is stored in the storage unit and then transferred.
When the management unit reads information corresponding to the information of the logical address transmitted by the control unit from the first storage unit and stores the information in the storage unit, the management unit corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. A gaming machine comprising: a prediction start unit (a function of executing the processing of step S107 in the controller CPUs 113 and 173) for starting transfer of information from a storage area of a physical address to the storage unit.

  According to the feature A17, the use of the NAND flash memory as the first storage means makes it easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit, in the second storage unit, which is faster than the case where the information is read from the first storage unit. The configuration is such that the specific control is executed using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even if the NAND-type flash memory having a relatively low reading speed is used as the first storage unit, the time required for reading the specific information in the control unit can be reduced, and the specific control can be performed smoothly. it can.

  In addition, although a bad block may occur in the NAND flash memory, the physical address for the logical address transmitted from the control unit is specified by the management unit, so that information can be read from the NAND flash memory in good condition. Done.

  When the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is not only read out from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination, but also The logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address according to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage unit. Accordingly, when information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, transmission of the logical address information from the control unit is performed for the information corresponding to the subsequent logical address in the read order. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required for reading such information can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature A group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program related to the game is stored, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. . A configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory. Also, in recent years, by diversifying the effect form by images, or by using complex moving images and real-life images as images, the attention to images is increased, and accordingly, the attention to games is increased. Attempts have been made.

  Here, when an image drawing instruction is issued, it is preferable that the image be displayed early in response to the instruction. As one method of displaying an image early, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. As another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of a CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in selecting a memory is reduced at the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of an image, but similarly occurs in configurations related to other controls.

  Incidentally, for any one of the above features A1 to A17, the following features B1 to B13, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the configuration limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means and for updating the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing; CPU 72, VDP 76),
In a gaming machine equipped with
An image data setting unit (a function of executing a writing process in the VDP 76, a function of executing a writing process in the VDP 76) for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen in the image for one frame. Step S3601, Step S3605, Step S3701, Step S3705, Step S3801 to Step S3804).
When the plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency value set in a part of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side corresponds to the individual image on the back side. A transparent value adjusting unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S3604, S3704, and S3807 in the VDP 76) for setting the overlapped portion of the image data to be a display target so as to partially display the individual image on the near side. )When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B1, by adjusting the transparency value of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side, partial display of the individual image is performed. Thus, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage unit can be reduced.

Feature B2. The image data has a large number of unit image data (pixels) associated with color information,
The display storage means stores transparent value adjustment data (partial α data PD22 to PD25, partial α data PD30 to PD33, α palette data , Partial α data PD37, PD38) are stored in advance,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the transparent value adjusting means causes the partial display to be performed by applying the transparent value adjusting data to the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side. .

  According to the feature B2, since the transparent value adjustment data is read out from the display storage unit and applied to the image data to perform the partial display, the processing configuration for performing the partial display is complicated. Is suppressed.

Feature B3. The transparency value adjustment data is such that the transparency of the outline portion is higher than that of a portion adjacent inside the unit image data corresponding to the outline portion of the region partially displayed in the individual image on the front side. The transparency value is set so that
Further, the individual images displayed as the individual images on the near side include a first individual image on the near side and a second individual image on the near side, and the individual images on the near side are one-to-one. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is provided in correspondence therewith.

  According to the feature B3, since the transparent value adjustment data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first front-side individual image and the second front-side individual image, partial display of the individual images is performed. Can be. Also, since the transparency value of each transparent value adjustment data is set so that the transparency of the outline portion of the corresponding individual image is higher than that of the adjacent portion inside the outline portion, the transparency value adjustment is performed to perform partial display. When the application data is applied, at the same time, the jaggies of the partially displayed image can be reduced.

Feature B4. The individual images displayed as the near-side individual images include a first near-side individual image (an individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD26) and a second near-side individual image (an individual image corresponding to the symbol sprite data PD27). Image)
The transparent value adjusting unit may be configured to perform the common transparent value adjustment in both the case where the first front-side individual image is partially displayed and the case where the second front-side individual image is partially displayed. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein data for application (partial α data PD30 to PD33) is applied.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to partially display each of the first front-side individual image and the second front-side individual image while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the transparency value adjustment data. it can.

Feature B5. The transparent value adjustment data has a number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Yes,
The transparent value adjusting unit applies the transparent value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparent value adjustment data to the color information associated with each corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby obtaining the partial value. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, wherein a display is performed.

  According to the feature B5, when performing partial display, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data. For this reason, complication of the processing related to the application can be suppressed.

Feature B6. The image data setting means is configured to display an image for one frame based on the setting of the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and to store the image data in the setting storage means. In the case of setting to, the coordinate information in the setting storage means for a part of the multiple unit image data included in the image data is specified, and the image data is set at a position corresponding to the coordinate information. Configuration
Further, the transparency value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the near side, and transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Has been
The transparent value adjusting unit applies the transparent value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparent value adjustment data to the color information associated with the corresponding unit image data in the image data, so that the partial display is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4, characterized in that:

  According to the feature B6, when the image data is set in the setting storage unit, it is not necessary to specify the coordinate information for all the unit image data of the image data, so that the processing configuration related to the specification is not complicated.

  In this configuration, the transparency value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment regions corresponding to a large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparency value information is set in each unit adjustment region. Data structure. Thereby, even if the coordinate information is not individually specified for all the unit image data of the image data, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is stored in the corresponding unit. It can be applied to color information associated with image data.

Feature B7. The image data setting unit is configured to display an image for one frame based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage unit, and to store the image data in the setting storage unit. In the case of setting, the parameter information including the information of the coordinates in the setting storage means of the image data is specified, and the image data is set according to the specification result,
When the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in the setting storage unit, the transparent value adjustment unit is configured to set the image data in accordance with the specified parameter information. The gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, wherein the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the image data at a previous timing.

  According to the feature B7, a predetermined parameter is applied to the image data to which the transparency value adjustment data is applied, and the data of the application result is set in the setting storage unit. Accordingly, it is not necessary to specify parameters for setting the transparency value adjustment data in the setting storage unit, so that the processing load for specifying the parameters can be reduced.

Feature B8. Identification information is individually set in each of the unit image data,
A combination of the color information and the transparency value information of the unit image data in which the identification information is set is set in the transparency value adjustment data in correspondence with the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B4.

  According to the feature B8, the transparency value for partial display can be applied in accordance with the setting of the color information in each unit image data.

  Feature B9. The transparency value adjusting means adjusts the transparency value so that the transparency of the outline portion of the region partially displayed in the individual image on the front side is higher than that of an adjacent portion inside the outline portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the transparency value is adjusted to perform the partial display, it is possible to reduce jaggies of the image that is partially displayed.

  Feature B10. The transparent value adjusting unit switches a range in which a transparent value is set to display an overlapping portion of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side, so that the area of the partial display in the individual image on the front side is changed. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the game machine makes a transition.

  According to the feature B10, a display effect in which an area that is partially displayed in the front individual image transitions can be performed only by switching the applied transparency value.

Feature B11. Partition area control means (a function of executing the process of step S3506 in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display means so that a partitioned area (partial display area PL5) obtained by partitioning a partial area of the display screen is displayed. Prepare,
The individual image on the near side is an individual image used to be displayed in the defined area, and the individual image on the back side is an individual image used to be displayed in a surrounding area including the periphery of the defined area. Image
When the individual image on the near side is displayed such that a part of the image overlaps with the boundary of the divided area, the transparent value adjusting unit is configured to prevent the individual image on the near side from protruding into the surrounding area. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein an individual image on the near side is partially displayed.

  According to the feature B11, a display effect in which an individual image is displayed within the range of the divided region can be performed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B12. A character color change control unit (character transition processing in the VDP 76) that displays a plurality of character images arranged in a specific direction on the display screen and controls the display unit so that the colors of the plurality of character images are sequentially changed. Function to execute)
The individual image on the front side is an individual image including the plurality of character images,
The individual image on the back side is an individual image including the plurality of character images and the color of each character image is set to be different from the individual image on the front side,
The image data setting means is configured to display an image of one frame based on the setting of the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and the color of the character image is sequentially changed. When a display effect is performed, the image data corresponding to the individual image on the near side is set before the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the transparent value adjusting unit partially displays the individual image on the near side when the display effect is performed.

  According to the feature B12, a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed can be performed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B13. A pattern determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S403 in the display CPU 72) for determining display effect pattern information composed of a plurality of frames of images based on the satisfaction of a predetermined pattern determination condition;
Deriving means (for executing the task processing in the display CPU 72) which derives parameter information in the case of using image data corresponding to an individual image displayed in an image for each frame based on the determined display effect pattern information. Function) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the image data setting unit sets the image data in a state where the parameter information derived by the deriving unit is applied. .

  According to the feature B13, the parameter information of the image data corresponding to each frame is derived based on the display effect pattern information determined earlier, and the image data is set in a state where the parameter information is applied. Thus, in the configuration in which the images for each frame are displayed, the excellent effects as described in the above-described feature B1 and the like can be obtained.

  The invention of the feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying characters and characters. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying characters and characters in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which characters or characters are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or a character is performing a predetermined movement in front of the background, each time an update timing of the display device is reached, coordinates are adjusted to coordinates corresponding to the predetermined movement. The drawing data in which the character or character data is set in the form is created.

  Here, the present inventor, as a display effect on the display device, in the course of the movement of the character or character, transition from a state where the entire character or character is displayed to a state where only a part is displayed We came up with a display effect.

  However, it is not preferable that the capacity of the memory for the image data is extremely increased in order to perform the display effect, and it is necessary to perform the display effect while suppressing the increase in the capacity to some extent. .

  Incidentally, for any one of the features B1 to B13, the features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the configuration limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b), and a predetermined update timing is reached, so that one frame worth of the image is displayed. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the content of the image;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of division image data (division part data PD2 to PD10, division data groups PD12 to PD15) are stored in advance in the display storage means.
The display control means sets the plurality of image data for division in the setting storage means in accordance with a predetermined relative position, so that the same type of display mode corresponds to each image data for division. Set setting means for displaying a series of images that straddle the boundaries of the individual images for division (a function for executing the arithmetic processing for the scroll background in the display CPU 72 or a function for executing the arithmetic processing for the displacement background in the display CPU 72) And a function of executing a setting process of divided parts data in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature C1, image data for displaying a series of images is divided and stored as a plurality of division image data. As a result, the data unit when individually set in the setting storage unit can be reduced, and the processing load in handling single image data can be reduced.

  Feature C2. The set setting means sets the first image data for division (divided part data PD5) and the second image data for division (divided part data PD6) having adjacent positional relationships in the setting storage means. In the case, the gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein an overlapping area (overlapping area PA1) of both data is generated over the entire boundary portion of the image data for division.

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which each image data for division is individually set in the setting storage unit, for example, a gap may be generated between the two image data depending on the individual size adjustment condition of each image data for division. Is concerned. On the other hand, since both data are set in the setting storage means so that an overlapping area is generated, the above-described gap does not occur, and the effect of storing as the respective image data for division is obtained. It can be exhibited well.

  Feature C3. The same color information is associated with a part of the overlapping area in the first image data for division and the second image data for division, wherein the same color information is associated with each other. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C3, since the same color information is associated with the portions constituting the overlapping area in both the division image data, for example, the same magnification is applied to each division image data. However, even if the size is individually adjusted and the width of the overlapping area is slightly shifted, it is expected that color information to be displayed as the overlapping area is reflected in the shifted part. Therefore, even if each of the image data for division is an image that is individually set in the setting storage unit, a favorable display mode can be achieved.

Feature C4. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with color information,
The feature according to Feature C2 or C3, wherein the overlapping area is configured by one row of unit image data in each of the first divisional image data and the second divisional image data. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to achieve an effect that each image data for division is set such that an overlapping area is generated while minimizing a data capacity allocated for generating the overlapping area.

  Feature C5. Each of the image data for division is created so that, when all of the image data for division are set at a predetermined scale, the series of images formed thereby exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a part of each of the divisional image data has a display range of an image for one frame. The gaming machine according to any of features C1 to C4, wherein the gaming machine is created with a division size that is not included in the game machine.

  According to the feature C5, a series of images generated by setting all the image data for each division is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. It is possible for the player to recognize the setting, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, at least at a specific update timing, a part of the image data for division is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. This makes it possible not to set the image data for division not included in the display range of the image for one frame in the setting update means at the specific update timing, and to always set the image data for all divisions. , The processing load is reduced.

Feature C6. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with color information,
The display control means, when setting the image data in the setting storage means, executes a predetermined drawing process on each unit image data of the image data to thereby change the color information of the unit image data. The color information of the unit image data is set in the setting storage unit even if the unit image data of the image data determined to be set in the setting storage unit protrudes from the setting storage unit. It is not set in the setting storage means but executes the drawing process,
Each of the image data for division is created so that, when all of the image data for division are set at a predetermined scale, the series of images formed thereby exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing among the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a part of each of the divisional image data has a display range of one frame image. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the gaming machine is created with a division size that is not included in the game machine.

  According to the feature C6, in the display control unit, when the image data is set in the setting storage unit, even if the image data includes the unit image data that protrudes from the setting storage unit, the unit image data is stored in the unit image data. A similar drawing process is executed. This eliminates the need for the display control unit to execute a dedicated process for the unit image data that protrudes from the setting storage unit.

  In addition, since a series of images generated by setting all the image data for each division is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, the images are set in a range exceeding the size of the display screen. Can be recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. However, in the configuration in which the same drawing processing is performed on the unit image data that protrudes from the setting storage unit as described above, the image data forming the series of images is provided as a single image data. Then, the frequency of performing the drawing process wastefully increases, and the processing load increases.

  On the other hand, at least at a specific update timing, a part of the image data for division is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. This makes it possible not to set the image data for division not included in the display range of the image for one frame in the setting update means at the specific update timing, and to always set the image data for all divisions. , The processing load is reduced.

Feature C7. The set setting means,
A dividing image grasping means for grasping a part of the dividing image data included in the display range of the image of one frame to be updated among the respective dividing image data (executes a scroll background calculation process in the display CPU 72); Function) and
A division image setting means (a function of executing a division part data setting process in the VDP 76) for setting the division image data grasped by the division image grasping means in the setting storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature C5 or C6, comprising:

  According to the feature C7, at least at a specific update timing, the image data for division not included in the display range of the image for one frame is not set in the setting storage unit. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the image data for all divisions is always set.

Feature C8. A parameter information specifying unit (a function of executing a calculation process for a scroll background in the display CPU 72) for specifying parameter information including coordinate information of the image data in the setting storage unit;
The display control unit is configured to set the image data in the setting storage unit in a state where parameter information according to the specification result of the parameter information specifying unit is applied,
When the parameter information specifying means specifies the parameter information for image data constituting at least one frame image corresponding to the specific update timing, the one frame image includes a partial area. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, wherein the parameter information is not specified for division image data corresponding to no division individual image.

  According to the feature C8, at least at the specific update timing, the specification of the parameter information is not performed on the dividing image data that is not included in the display range of the image for one frame. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the parameter information is always specified for all the image data for division.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the series of images are images scroll-displayed in a predetermined direction over an image display period for a plurality of frames.

  According to the feature C9, a series of images can be scroll-displayed, and the scroll display can be performed satisfactorily by providing the configuration of the feature C1 and the like.

Feature C10. A display in which the image data for division is created so that each of the individual images for division includes a plurality of unit images, and the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over a plurality of frames. A plurality of the image data for division is provided corresponding to each of the division positions so that
At each of the division positions where the individual images for division are displayed side by side, each division set in the setting storage means is such that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over a display period for a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, further including an image switching unit (a function of executing a calculation process for the displacement background in the display CPU 72) for switching the image data for display.

  According to the feature C10, display of a plurality of unit images is controlled collectively in units of image data for division, instead of individually setting image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage unit. By doing so, a display effect in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes can be performed. Accordingly, in addition to the excellent effects described in the feature C1, a display effect in which the display mode of a plurality of unit images sequentially changes can be executed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to the feature C1 is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, an image having a large size has a large capacity of image data. For example, a background image that is scroll-displayed and only a partial area is displayed on the display screen for each frame is a character image that is entirely displayed on the display screen at an initially set size. The capacity of the image data is larger than that of.

  In this case, depending on the capacity, it is assumed that it is not possible to store in advance the image data memory as one unit of image data. Even if the data can be stored, if there are many areas that are not actually displayed on the display screen, the amount of calculation for display for each frame increases accordingly, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, in the case of a large image as described above, a configuration in which the image data at the time of initial setting is always enlarged and displayed can be considered, but this causes a reduction in image quality.

  By the way, with respect to any one of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the following features C'1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the configuration limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature C '>
Feature C'1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b), and a predetermined update timing is reached, so that one frame worth of the image is displayed. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the content of the image;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage unit previously stores aggregate image data (divided data groups PD12 to PD15) including a plurality of unit images collectively as display targets, and displays the plurality of unit images in a plurality of frames. A plurality of the aggregated image data are stored so as to be able to perform a display that sequentially changes over the entirety,
Further, an aggregated image switching unit (for a background image in the display CPU 72) that switches the aggregated image data set in the setting storage unit such that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over a display period for a plurality of frames. Gaming machine).

  According to the feature C′1, instead of individually setting image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage unit, the display of the plurality of unit images is grouped in units of the division image data. By performing such control, a display effect in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes can be performed. Thus, a display effect in which the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes can be executed while reducing the processing load.

  The invention according to Feature C'1 is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Here, as the number of unit images included in the image for one frame increases, the processing load for each frame increases. On the other hand, when the number of unit images included in the image for one frame is reduced, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the image may be reduced.

  By the way, for any one of the features C′1, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following configurations limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data of an operation individual image (smoothly moving sprite CH5) that is displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, the at least a part has moved mutually by less than one dot in the specific direction. A plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the state can be acquired.
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the operation image data used to display the operation individual image a plurality of times. An operation image switching means for sequentially switching over the image update timing (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) is provided. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state where they are moved by less than one dot are sequentially switched as use objects, so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction. Is displayed as follows. As a result, it is possible to display as if it is moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores at least a part of the image data of the operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed in such a manner that at least a part thereof moves in a specific direction. It stores a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state in which they move by less than a dot, and
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the operation image data used to display the operation individual image a plurality of times. An operation image switching means for sequentially switching over the image update timing (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) is provided. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction by sequentially switching a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state of moving by less than one dot as a use target. Is displayed as follows. As a result, it is possible to display as if it is moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to facilitate the movement of the operation individual image.

  Further, in this configuration, a plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image may be sequentially switched, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize smooth movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D3. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
The image data is set in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data of an operation individual image (smoothly moving sprite CH5) that is displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, at least a part of the image data is larger than one unit setting area in the specific direction. A configuration in which a plurality of pieces of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state of mutual movement can be acquired by a small size,
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the operation image data used to display the operation individual image a plurality of times. An operation image switching means for sequentially switching over the image update timing (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) is provided. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D3, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state are sequentially switched as use objects by a size smaller than one unit setting area, so that at least one of the operation individual images is used. The part is displayed as moving in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to achieve smooth movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
The image data is set in setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores, as image data of an operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed such that at least a part moves in a specific direction, the at least part of the image data is stored in the specific direction. A plurality of pieces of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state of moving relative to each other by a size smaller than the unit setting area.
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, the operation image data used to display the operation individual image a plurality of times. An operation image switching means for sequentially switching over the image update timing (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72 and a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) is provided. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature D4, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state are sequentially switched as a target to be used by a size smaller than one unit setting area, so that at least one of the operation individual images is used. The part is displayed as moving in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to achieve smooth movement of the operation individual image.

  Further, in this configuration, a plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image may be sequentially switched, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize smooth movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D5. The display control unit is configured to determine coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage unit (steps S4105, S4111, and S4111 in the display CPU 72). S4116).
When the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image is sequentially switched over a plurality of specific update timings, the coordinate information determination unit performs processing on all of the operation image data. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein information of the same coordinates is applied.

  According to the feature D5, a plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to a mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area are sequentially set for the same coordinates, thereby making one unit The operation individual image can be displayed as if it were moving in a unit corresponding to the size smaller than the unit setting area, and the motion of the operation individual image can be smoothed.

Feature D6. The display control unit is configured to determine coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage unit (steps S4105, S4111, and S4111 in the display CPU 72). S4116).
The coordinate information determining means updates the next coordinate information after the same coordinate information has been applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, and updates the next coordinate information before updating. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein the information is updated so as to be information of coordinates shifted from the coordinates by one unit setting area to a side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction.

  According to the feature D6, a plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to a mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area are sequentially set with respect to the same coordinate. The operation individual image can be displayed as if it were moving in a unit corresponding to the size smaller than the unit setting area, and the motion of the operation individual image can be smoothed.

  Further, after the same coordinate information is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, the update to the next coordinate information is performed, and the next coordinate information includes one piece of information from the coordinates before update. The unit setting area is updated so as to become information of coordinates shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction. As a result, the state in which the operation individual image is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D7. The display control means updates the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing,
The operation image switching unit is configured such that, when at least a portion of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction over a display period for a plurality of frames, the plurality of operation image data is The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D6, wherein the setting is repeatedly set in a predetermined order in the setting storage means.

  According to the feature D7, the processing for repeatedly switching the operation image data set in the setting storage means in a predetermined order may be performed, so that the processing load is reduced.

  Feature D8. In the plurality of operation image data, at least a part of the specific image is determined by differentiating a transparency value indicating a transmission ratio of image data overlapping the back side at a position forming an edge portion of the corresponding operation individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3 to D7, wherein the gaming machine corresponds to a state in which the movement has been made smaller than one unit setting area in the direction of.

  According to the feature D8, by using a simple method of making the transparency values of the portions constituting the edge portions different, a plurality of operation units corresponding to a state smaller than one unit setting area and corresponding to a state in which they move relative to each other. Image data can be provided.

  Feature D9. The plurality of operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage unit, and the first operation image data (first sprite data PD48) and the first operation image data are more than the first operation image data. And at least a part of the second operation image data (second sprite data PD49) corresponding to a state in which the image moves by a size smaller than the one unit setting area in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, only the first operation image data and the second operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage unit as operation image data for smoothing the movement of the operation individual image. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the operation image data in the display storage means.

  Feature D10. The second operation image data corresponds to a state in which at least a part of the first operation image data has moved in the specific direction by half or substantially half the size of one unit setting area. The gaming machine according to Feature D9, characterized in that:

  According to the feature D10, a case where the setting target in the setting storage unit is switched from the first operation image data to the second operation image data, and a case where the second operation image data is changed to the first operation image data. It is possible to make the movement amount of the operation individual image the same or substantially the same when switching to the operation image data.

  Note that the configuration limited by any one of the features D5 to D10 may be applied to the feature D1 or D2. In this case, the configuration defined based on “one unit setting area” may be applied as the configuration defined based on “one dot”.

  The invention of the feature D group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine including a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or the like is performing a predetermined movement in front of the background, each time an update timing of the display device is reached, coordinates or a form corresponding to the predetermined movement are displayed. Creates drawing data in which data such as the character is set. Then, each time the drawing data is created, a new signal is output to the display device, and the image on the display screen is updated so that the character or the like makes a predetermined movement.

  Here, when a character or the like is to be moved in a predetermined direction on a display screen configured by arranging a large number of dots, the minimum movement unit that can be set at one update timing is limited to one dot. You. In this case, even if the character or the like is to be smoothly moved in a predetermined direction, there is a limitation. The same applies to the case where a character or the like is to perform a predetermined action. In order to solve this problem, a measure to increase the number of dots included in a unit area can be considered. However, as the number of dots increases, the cost of the display device increases.

  By the way, with respect to any one of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C'1, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1 To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following configurations limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) which stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a and 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
For a plurality of individual images displayed in the one-frame image so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, depth information determining means (in the display CPU 131) for determining information in the depth direction of image data corresponding to each individual image. Function for executing the processing of steps S503 to S505);
By setting the image data corresponding to each of the individual images in the setting storage unit by applying the information on the depth direction determined by the depth information determining unit, the individual images are displayed in the depth direction on the display screen. Image data setting means (a function of executing a hidden surface process using a Z buffer in the VDP 135) so as to be displayed so as to overlap with
The partial display of the specific individual image is performed by determining the information in the depth direction applied to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image to the information for partial display. Partial display setting means (a function of executing a calculation process for a mask in the display CPU 131);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature E1, by adjusting information in the depth direction of specific image data corresponding to a specific individual image, partial display of the individual image is performed. Thus, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage unit can be reduced.

  Feature E2. The partial display setting unit switches a range in which partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching a range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, which is characterized in that:

  According to the feature E2, a range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image is switched using a single specific image data. Thus, it is possible to perform a display effect of switching a range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage unit.

  Feature E3. The partial display setting means switches the specific individual image in a display period for a plurality of frames by stepwise switching a range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the gaming machine is gradually erased or gradually appear over the entire game machine.

  According to the feature E3, a display effect in which a specific individual image is gradually erased or appears gradually over a display period of a plurality of frames is performed, so that the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image will increase in accordance with the number of frames in the process of gradually deleting or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. This is performed by adjusting information, and there is no need to prepare specific image data corresponding to each display mode. Therefore, the above-described display effect can be performed while the storage capacity of the display storage unit is suppressed.

Feature E4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) which stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a and 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image of one frame on the display screen based on the
With
The image data includes image data of an object that is three-dimensional information,
The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Distance information determining means for determining distance information corresponding to a relative distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint is facing (a function of executing processing of steps S503 to S505 in the display CPU 131);
Using the projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, the drawing data is set in the setting storage unit, and a plurality of the When the image data are arranged, the distance information is compared in each of the arranged parts, and the part on the side with the shorter relative distance is preferentially set in the setting storage part (the Z buffer in the VDP 135). Function to perform hidden surface processing using
By causing the distance information determined by the distance information determining means to be determined as information for partial display for a part of specific image data corresponding to a specific individual image, Partial display setting means for performing partial display (a function of executing a calculation operation for a mask in the display CPU 131);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature E4, a partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the distance information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thus, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage unit can be reduced. In particular, according to the present configuration, the above-described excellent effects can be obtained by using the configuration of the hidden surface removal for displaying the three-dimensional image.

  Feature E5. The partial display setting unit switches a range in which partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching a range in which the distance information is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to Feature E4.

  According to the feature E5, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched using the single specific image data. Thus, it is possible to perform a display effect of switching a range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage unit.

  Feature E6. The partial display setting unit switches the range in which the distance information is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data stepwise, so that the specific individual image is displayed over a display period of a plurality of frames. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the gaming machine is gradually erased or gradually appears.

  According to the feature E6, a display effect in which a specific individual image is gradually erased or appears gradually over a display period for a plurality of frames is performed, so that the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image will increase in accordance with the number of frames in the process of gradually deleting or gradually appearing, but the switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. This is performed by adjusting information, and there is no need to prepare specific image data corresponding to each display mode. Therefore, the above-described display effect can be performed while the storage capacity of the display storage unit is suppressed.

  Feature E7. The information for partial display is characterized in that the information for partial display is set as distance information corresponding to the relative distance being longer than the back image data constituting the back image in the image for one frame. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  The back image is an image that always constitutes the back of one frame image, and thus serves as an absolute reference as a position in the depth direction. In this case, according to the feature E7, the partial display of the specific individual image is performed because the information for partial display is set as the distance information corresponding to the relative distance being farther than the back image data. In this case, the processing load related to the setting of the information for partial display is reduced.

Feature E8. The display screen has a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and the setting storage means has a large number of unit setting areas,
The display control means outputs, to the display means, an image signal corresponding to the data of each unit setting area in the drawing data set in the setting storage means, thereby displaying an image corresponding to the data of each unit setting area. Output is performed at each dot corresponding to each unit setting area,
The distance information determination means is for determining the distance information in correspondence with each of a number of unit image data constituting the image data,
Further, a comparison storage unit (Z buffer 143) having a plurality of comparison regions corresponding to the plurality of unit setting regions, and storing distance information referred to by the drawing setting unit in each of the comparison regions. )
The drawing setting means,
When a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint faces, while comparing the distance information individually for each of the unit setting areas,
When performing an individual comparison, if the relative distance is shorter than the distance information referred to at a later timing than the distance information previously stored in the corresponding comparison area, Overwrites the distance information referred to at the timing of the comparison area, and further overwrites the unit image data for which the distance information is determined to the unit setting area corresponding to the comparison area. The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7.

  According to the feature E8, the excellent effect as described in the above feature E4 and the like can be obtained by using the configuration of the hidden surface erasure by using the comparison storage unit.

  The invention of the feature group E is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine including a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, when the individual image defined individually such as a character or a character appears on the display screen or is erased, the entire display of the individual image and a partial We came up with a display effect that switches between display and display.

  However, if a plurality of types of image data are required for the same type of individual image in order to perform the display effect, the more the switching mode between the overall display and the partial display is multi-staged, The types of image data stored in advance increase. Then, the required storage capacity of the image data memory increases, which is not preferable.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the display of a three-dimensional image, but also occurs when a two-dimensional image is displayed.

  By the way, with respect to any one of the features E1 to E8, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C'1, the features D1 to D10, and the following features F1 To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the configuration limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory modules 74 and 133) for storing image data in advance;
An image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b, frame areas 142a and 142b), and a predetermined update timing is obtained. Display control means (display CPUs 72 and 131, VDPs 76 and 135) for updating the content of the image for one frame by
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance a plurality of types of image data respectively corresponding to different individual images,
The display control means,
Grouping means for grouping a plurality of types of image data (a function of executing the processing of step S3405 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the processing of step S4006 in the VDP 76, and a function of executing the processing of step S1404 in the VDP 135);
The grouping data setting unit (the function of executing the processing of step S3406 in the VDP 76, the function of executing the processing of step S2205 in the VDP 76, and the function of executing the processing of step S2205 in the VDP 135) Function for executing the processing of step S1405);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of image data as a single data by grouping a plurality of types of image data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which image data is always individually handled. Further, since the plurality of types of image data are individually stored in the display storage means, the image data can be handled independently. This makes it possible to handle image data flexibly. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which data in which a plurality of types of image data are grouped is stored in the display storage unit in advance, the required storage capacity of the display storage unit can be reduced.

  As described above, when a plurality of individual images are simultaneously displayed, it is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the display.

Feature F2. A grouping storage area (combined data area 81c, mode buffer 145) for storing the grouped data grouped by the grouping unit;
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the grouping data setting unit sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature F2, the grouping data is stored in the grouping storage area, read from the grouping storage area as necessary, and set in the setting storage unit. As a result, the grouped data can be used for a plurality of frames.

  Feature F3. The grouping unit, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set to the setting storage unit, performs grouping on the plurality of types of image data, and performs grouping after the grouping. The gaming machine according to Feature F2, wherein image data is stored in the grouping storage area as the grouping data.

  According to the feature F3, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set to the setting storage unit, the grouping is performed on the plurality of types of image data, and the grouped data is set as the grouped data. It is stored in the grouping storage area. This eliminates the need to independently set the processing timing for grouping.

Feature F4. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, the first display effect and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are greater than the first display effect, or images are stored in the setting storage means. A second display effect in which a processing load of the display control means when setting data is larger than an individual image displayed in the first display effect.
The grouping unit performs the grouping during a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the first display effect is performed, and uses the image data after the grouping as the grouping data. Stored in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting unit, during a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the second display effect is performed, stores the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area into the grouping data. The gaming machine according to Feature F2 or F3, wherein the gaming machine is set in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature F4, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load on the display control unit is relatively small, and the grouped data is used in a situation where the processing load on the display control unit is relatively large. This makes it possible to use the grouped data to distribute the processing load of the display control unit.

Feature F5. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first display effect and a second display effect in which the processing load of the display control unit when setting the image data in the setting storage unit increases. , Is set,
The grouping unit performs the grouping during a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the first display effect is performed, and uses the image data after the grouping as the grouping data. Stored in the grouping storage area,
The grouping data setting unit, during a period in which a process for displaying an image of a frame included in the second display effect is performed, stores the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area into the grouping data. The gaming machine according to Feature F2 or F3, wherein the gaming machine is set in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature F5, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load on the display control unit is relatively small, and the grouped data is used in a situation where the processing load on the display control unit is relatively large. This makes it possible to use the grouped data to distribute the processing load of the display control unit.

Feature F6. The display control means creates one frame of drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. It is a configuration to display an image for one frame on the display screen,
At least the start timing frame in the second display effect includes a plurality of types of common individual images displayed in the end timing frame in the first display effect,
The grouping unit may be configured to, when image data corresponding to the common individual image is set in the setting storage unit and drawing data corresponding to the end timing frame is created, generate The image data corresponding to the individual images are grouped and stored in the grouping storage area as the grouping data,
The grouping data setting unit sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage unit when the drawing data corresponding to the frame at the start timing is created. The gaming machine according to Feature F4 or F5.

  According to the feature F6, even if a plurality of types of common individual images are displayed using the grouping data in the frame of the start timing in the second display effect, the grouping data is not changed to the end timing in the first display effect. Since the frame is created based on the frame, the display between both frames corresponds to each other. As a result, the excellent effects described above can be achieved while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Feature F7. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the plurality of types of common individual images are individual images forming a background image.

  According to the feature F7, since the grouping data is applied to the background image, even if a common individual image used in different frames is displayed, it becomes less noticeable, and the player feels uncomfortable. The excellent effects described above can be obtained while suppressing holding.

Feature F8. The display control means creates drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means to display one image on the display screen. It is a configuration to display images for frames,
A plurality of types of display modes in which display modes of images on the display screen are different from each other are set,
Operation receiving means (operation effecting device 48) for receiving an operation by the player;
Display mode switching means for sequentially switching the display mode based on the operation being received by the operation receiving means (a function of executing an operation generation command corresponding process in the display CPU 131);
With
The grouping unit performs the grouping on a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame included in the display mode, at least in a specific display mode among the plurality of types of display modes. Perform, the image data after the grouping is stored in the group storage area as the grouping data,
The grouping data setting unit is stored in the grouping storage area when the mode is switched to the specific display mode and the drawing data corresponding to the frame immediately after the switching is created. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F7, wherein the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is set in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature F8, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes are diversified. In this case, the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is created, and when the drawing mode corresponding to the frame immediately after the switching to the specific display mode is created, the grouping data is created. Is used. Thereby, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on an operation on the operation receiving unit at an arbitrary timing, the processing load at that time can be reduced.

Feature F9. In each of the plurality of types of display modes, a display effect in which the individual image for fluctuation is variably displayed in front of the background image over a period of a plurality of frames,
The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other,
The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is obtained by grouping a plurality of types of image data for displaying a background image in the specific display mode.

  According to the feature F9, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the operation to the operation receiving unit at an arbitrary timing, the background image is obtained by using the grouping data. In this case, the processing load can be reduced. Further, even if the switching to the specific display mode occurs while the variable individual image is being displayed in a variable manner, the grouping data corresponds to the background image as described above. It is possible to switch only the background image while maintaining the display and reducing the processing load.

Feature F10. The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other, and the types of the individual images for change are also different from each other,
Further, in the variation display mode of the individual image for variation, after the individual image for variation is variably displayed in a low identification mode that is relatively difficult to identify, the individual image for variation is relatively easily identified. Includes a mode that is variably displayed in a mode,
In the case where switching to the specific display mode is performed in a situation where the individual image for fluctuation is being displayed in the low identification mode in a variably displayed manner, and when the drawing data corresponding to the frame immediately after the switching is created, Adjusting means (display) immediately after mode switching, in which the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode stored in the grouping storage area is set in the setting storage means without changing the type of the individual image for display. The gaming machine according to Feature F9, further comprising: a function of executing a calculation process for a display mode background and a symbol calculation process in the CPU 131.

  According to the feature F10, when the individual image for fluctuation is switched to the specific display mode in a state of being variably displayed in the low identification mode, the grouping data is used for the background image, and the previous individual image for fluctuation is used for the background image. The data set in the display mode is used. Thereby, the processing load when switching to the specific display mode can be reduced. Further, in the situation where the individual image for fluctuation is variably displayed in the low identification mode, since the individuality of the individual image for fluctuation is low, the type of the individual image for fluctuation is switched to the one corresponding to the specific display mode as described above. Even if there is no player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F11. The individual image includes, when displayed on the display screen, an effect image displayed in a state in which color information of the individual image overlapping on the back side is reflected,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the plurality of types of image data grouped by the grouping unit include image data corresponding to the effect image.

  According to the feature F11, a plurality of types of effect images can be used individually, and a plurality of types of effect images can be used in a grouped state.

Feature F12. When grouping the plurality of types of image data, the grouping unit performs the grouping by setting a part of the plurality of types of image data as reference image data and performing the remaining group as subordinate image data. Create
The grouping data setting means, when setting the grouping data in the setting storage means, sets the parameter information designated for the reference image data to the reference image data and the dependent image subordinate thereto. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, wherein the setting is performed in the setting storage unit in a state where the setting is applied to data.

  According to the feature F12, when a plurality of types of image data are handled, if parameter information is set in the reference image data, it is applied to the dependent image data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F13. The display storage means stores a plurality of types of front-side image data (image data PD39 to PD42) used to display the front-side image included in the image for one frame, A plurality of types of rear image data (image data PD43 to PD45) used to display the rear image included in the image of the subsequent frame are stored in advance,
The grouping unit creates grouped data by performing grouping on the plurality of types of front-side image data,
The grouping data setting means,
The plurality of types of rear image data are set in the setting storage unit, and the grouped data to which the parameter information is applied so that a part of the front image is not displayed is written to the plurality of types of rear image data. An overlap setting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S4002 to S4005 in the VDP 76) for setting to overlap before the side image data;
A frame switching unit (a function of executing the process of step S4008 in the VDP 76) for performing the setting by the overlap setting unit so that the non-display range is widened over a display period for a plurality of frames;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, comprising:

  According to the feature F13, a wipe effect can be performed while reducing the processing load.

Feature F14. The display control means,
Setting target grasping means for grasping image data to be set in the setting storage means (a function of executing the process of step S3402 in VDP 76);
Deriving means (for executing the processing of step S3303 in the display CPU 72) which derives parameter information for determining the setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means for the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means. Function),
An image data setting means for setting the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means in the setting storage means in a state in which the parameter information derived by the deriving means is applied (the function of executing the processing of step S2205 in the VDP 76) )When,
With
The game according to any one of features F1 to F13, wherein the grouping unit groups a plurality of types of image data in a state where the parameter information derived by the deriving unit is applied. Machine.

  According to the feature F14, since the parameter information is already applied to the plurality of types of image data in the grouped state, when the grouped data is used, the plurality of types of image data included in the grouped data are individually determined. There is no need to apply parameter information. Thereby, the processing load is reduced.

Feature F15. The image data includes image data of an object that is three-dimensional information for displaying an image,
The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint (Steps S610 to S610 in the VDP 135) A function of executing the process of S613).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F14, wherein the grouping means groups data after the plurality of types of image data are projected on the projection plane.

  According to the feature F15, when the grouped data is used, it is not necessary to perform the geometry calculation and the rendering for the plural types of image data included therein. Thereby, the processing load is reduced.

  The invention of the feature F group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, the update of the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be performed at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created in time for the update cycle, and the update to the display device is performed. Signal output needs to be performed. For example, in a configuration in which only one frame buffer in which the drawing data is created is set for the VRAM, the drawing data is created within one update cycle and a signal output based on the drawing data is generated. Need to be completed. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of frame buffers are set, in a situation where a signal is output based on drawing data created in one frame buffer, the next update cycle is supported for another frame buffer. You need to create drawing data.

  In any of the above configurations, in order to simultaneously display individually defined individual images on the display screen, specify the coordinates and size of each individual image, and further draw all the individual images on the frame buffer. If it is necessary to do so, the processing load required to create one frame of drawing data increases. Then, if the processing load exceeds the update cycle, a processing drop occurs.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features F1 to F15, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 To E8, the following features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the configuration limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Feature G1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 133) in which a plurality of types of image data including image data of an object which is three-dimensional information is stored in advance;
Arranging means for arranging the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of step S605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means (steps S610 to S613 in the VDP 135) for setting drawing data in the setting storage means using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint. Function to perform processing),
Image signal output means (display circuit 155) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a plurality of partial objects sandwiching a predetermined connection portion therebetween, and includes a connection object capable of displacing a relative position of the partial objects with respect to the connection portion. ,
Further, as the connection object used when displaying the same type of special character, a plurality of types of special connection objects (connection objects PC35 and PC36) having different positions at which the connection portions are set are displayed. Is stored in advance in
Connected object switching means for switching the connected object used for displaying the special character to one of the plurality of types of special connected objects (a function of executing the processing of steps S2007, S2016, and S2023 in the display CPU 131) A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature G1, any one of a plurality of types of special connection objects is used to display the same type of special character. These plural types of special connection objects have different positions where the connection portions are set. As a result, the data capacity of the special connection object alone can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a single special connection object in which the connection portions are set collectively, and the reading of one special connection object can be performed. Can be satisfactorily performed. Also, by providing a plurality of types of special connection objects as described above in the development stage of the gaming machine, it is easy to adjust the movement of the special character when developing the gaming machine.

  As described above, it is possible to handle the connected object well.

Feature G2. The plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connection object switching means is configured to switch an object for displaying the special character from the first connection object to the second connection object at a specific display switching timing,
The arranging means may arrange the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space together with the first connected object in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. An overlapping arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2102 and S2103 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G2, at a specific display switching timing, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before a specific display switching timing. Thus, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute a process for starting the placement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the already-placed second connected object is updated. Just do it. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which both the arrangement processing and the update processing of the second connected object are performed at a specific display switching timing.

Feature G3. Parameter updating means for updating parameter information including at least information on the coordinates and angles of the objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to change the display content of the image (the processing of steps S2105, S2113 and S2119 in the VDP 135) Function to execute)
The processing load for updating the parameter information of the object is smaller than the processing load for starting the arrangement of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Further, the plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connection object switching means is configured to switch an object for displaying the special character from the first connection object to the second connection object at a specific display switching timing,
The arranging means may arrange the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space together with the first connected object in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. An overlapping arrangement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2102 and S2103 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G3, at a specific display switching timing, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before a specific display switching timing. Thus, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute a process for starting the placement of the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the already-placed second connected object is updated. Just do it. Therefore, the processing load at a specific display switching timing can be reduced.

  Feature G4. The parameter updating unit may be configured to, in a situation where both the first connected object and the second connected object are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space and before the specific display switching timing, perform the first The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein not only the connected object but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated.

  According to the feature G4, before the specific display switching timing, not only the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated. Thus, when a specific display switching timing comes, it becomes possible to use the parameter information that has been updated up to that point, and the processing load at that timing can be reduced.

Feature G5. A deriving unit (a function of executing a calculation process for a connected object in the display CPU 131) for deriving parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in accordance with display contents of an image to be updated;
The parameter updating unit updates the parameter information derived by the deriving unit as parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and stores the first connected object and the The parameter information determined for the first linked object by the deriving means at the timing before the specific display switching timing in a situation where both of the two linked objects are arranged is replaced with the first linked object. The gaming machine according to Feature G4, wherein the parameter information is updated as both parameter information of the second connected object and the second connected object.

  According to the feature G5, in the configuration in which the parameter information of the second connected object is updated even before the specific display switching timing, the parameter information of the second connected object is provided as the parameter information for the second connected object. The parameter information of one connected object is used. Thereby, as compared with a configuration in which parameter information is individually applied to each of the first connected object and the second connected object at a timing before the specific display switching timing, the configuration before the specific display switching timing is used. The processing load at the timing is reduced.

  Feature G6. The features of G2 to G5, wherein the overlapping arrangement means arranges the second connected object so as to be arranged at the same coordinates as the coordinates at which the first connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature G6, in a configuration in which the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the first connected object. The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which coordinates are individually specified for the second connected object.

Feature G7. By adjusting the transparency value information applied to the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, a transparency value setting unit (VDP135) for setting the object as either a display target or a non-display target on the display screen Step S2104, a step S2112, and a function of executing the processing of step S2118).
At the timing before the specific display switching timing, the connected object switching means includes a transparent value information in which the first connected object is the display target and the second connected object is the non-display target. In addition to the above, the transparent value information in which the first connected object becomes the non-display target and the second connected object becomes the display mode after the specific display switching timing is set in the connected objects. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6, characterized in that:

  According to the feature G7, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged before the specific display switching timing, the switching of the display target connected object before and after the specific display switching timing is applied to each connected object. This is performed simply by switching the transparent value information to be performed. As a result, the processing load associated with switching the connected object to be displayed can be reduced.

Feature G8. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first specific display effect (a first effect period) and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are greater than the first specific display effect. Alternatively, a second specific display effect (second effect) in which an individual image whose processing load when setting image data in the setting storage means is larger than the individual image displayed in the first specific display effect is displayed. Period) and is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the specific display effect is switched from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect.

  According to the feature G8, since the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load at the timing is extremely increased. Since the configuration such as G2 is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature G9. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of frames, a first specific display effect (a first effect period) and a second specification that increases a processing load when setting the image data in the setting storage unit. Display effect (second effect period) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the specific display effect is switched from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect.

  According to the feature G9, at the specific display switching timing, the switching from the first specific display effect to the second specific display effect is performed. Therefore, an extreme increase in the processing load at the timing is concerned. Since the configuration such as G2 is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature group G is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine including a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, as a character object, a connected object having a plurality of partial objects with a predetermined connecting portion interposed therebetween and capable of displacing the relative position of the partial objects with respect to the connecting portion is set. By doing so, the movement of the character can be made smooth. However, since the linked object has the link as described above, the creation at the game machine development stage is more complicated than the object without the link. Under such circumstances, if it is desired to change the movement of the character in the course of game machine development, the development period will be lengthened if the connected object is recreated from the beginning. On the other hand, if the connection unit is set to correspond to any movement from the beginning, the data capacity of the connection object increases accordingly.

  By the way, for any one of the above-mentioned features G1 to G9, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the above features C1 to C10, the above features C′1, the above features D1 to D10, and the above features E1 To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the configuration limited to any one of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, the drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is transmitted to the setting storage means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on the output to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen in the image for one frame (executes the processing of steps S2804 to S2805 in VDP 76) Function to execute the processing of steps S3103 to S3104 in the VDP 76),
Regarding the data of the unit setting area where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping portion of the rear individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image. Duplication reflection means (a function of executing the first effect addition process in the VDP 76, a function of executing the second effect addition process in the VDP 76) for setting the state as described above;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction in an image for one frame, the image data of the overlapping portion of the rear individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image. It has the function of displaying in a state where it is in a closed state. As a result, when displaying the front-side individual image, it is possible to display the front-side individual image in a state in which the color of the back-side individual image and the like are reflected, and it is possible to display a visually preferable image.

Feature H2. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplication reflection means,
An arithmetic processing execution means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images (a function of executing the processing of step S2904 in the VDP 76; Function to perform processing),
Setting processing execution means for setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing in the setting storage means in a unit setting area corresponding to each of the mutually overlapping unit image data (the function of executing the processing of step S2905 in the VDP 76; Function for executing the process of step S3207 in
The gaming machine according to feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H2, by executing the calculation process using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the location overlapping in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the feature H1 can be obtained.

Feature H3. Each of the unit setting areas has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control unit corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed in a dot,
The feature H2 according to the feature H2, wherein the arithmetic processing execution means executes, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an adding process of adding numerical information of each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H3, when an image for one frame is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, a dot corresponding to a unit setting area in which large numerical information is set has a brighter color. Is displayed, so that the display control of the dot is not complicated. In this configuration, the unit setting area in which the result obtained by adding the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the location overlapping in the depth direction is set to a larger numerical value than the image data of the front individual image is simply set. Numeric information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image that reflects the color and brightness of the back side individual image at the overlapping portion. As a result, while utilizing the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display corresponding to the numerical information, and further utilizing a relatively simple calculation process called an addition process, as described in the above-described feature H1, Excellent effects can be achieved.

  Feature H4. When the image data of the overlapping portion of the rear-side individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front-side individual image by the overlapping reflecting unit, the ratio of the reflected back-side image data is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, further including a reflection reducing unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature H4, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front-side individual image in a state where the ratio of reflecting the image data of the rear-side individual image is reduced. Accordingly, for example, when the image data of the rear-side individual image is directly reflected, in a case where the front-side individual image cannot be displayed well, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the rear-side individual image is reduced. The front individual image in a state in which the side individual image is reflected can be favorably displayed.

Feature H5. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplication setting means,
An arithmetic processing execution unit (function for executing the processing of step S3206 in the VDP 76) that executes a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each of the unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images;
Setting processing execution means (function for executing the processing of step S3207 in the VDP 76) for setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing in a unit setting area corresponding to the mutually overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means; ,
Reflection reduction means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3202 to S3204 in the VDP 76) for reducing numerical information of the back side individual image among the unit image data to be calculated by the calculation processing;
The gaming machine according to feature H1, comprising:

  According to the feature H5, by executing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the location overlapping in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the above feature H1 can be obtained.

  In addition, it is possible to reflect on the image data of the front-side individual image in a state where the ratio of reflecting the image data of the rear-side individual image is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the ratio of reflecting the image data of the rear-side individual image, for example, when the image data of the rear-side individual image cannot be satisfactorily displayed when the image data of the rear-side individual image is reflected as it is. It is possible to satisfactorily display the front-side individual image in a state in which the individual image is reflected.

  In particular, since the target for which the numerical information is reduced in the arithmetic processing is not the front-side individual image but the rear-side individual image, the color tone of the front-side individual image that is positively added in front of the rear-side individual image is not suppressed. , The back side individual image can be reflected.

Feature H6. Each of the unit setting areas has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control unit corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output so that a bright color is displayed in a dot,
The arithmetic processing execution means is configured to execute, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing of adding numerical information of each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images,
The gaming machine according to Feature H5, wherein the reflection reducing unit reduces numerical information of a back side individual image at a predetermined ratio among unit image data to be added in the addition processing.

  According to the feature H6, when an image for one frame is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, a dot corresponding to a unit setting area in which large numerical value information is set has a brighter color. Is displayed, so that the display control of the dot is not complicated. In this configuration, the unit setting area in which the result obtained by adding the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the location overlapping in the depth direction is set to a larger numerical value than the image data of the front individual image is simply set. Numeric information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image that reflects the color and brightness of the back side individual image at the overlapping portion. As a result, while utilizing the relationship between the numerical information set in the unit setting area and the image display corresponding to the numerical information, and further utilizing a relatively simple calculation process called an addition process, as described in the above-described feature H1, Excellent effects can be achieved.

  However, in the configuration in which the addition processing of the numerical information is executed as described above, it is assumed that the numerical information as a result of the addition processing exceeds the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, so that the display of the front side individual image is performed. It cannot be performed well. On the other hand, it is possible to reflect the numerical information of the unit image data of the rear individual image in the image data of the front individual image in a state where the numerical information is reduced at a predetermined ratio. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical information as a result of the addition processing from exceeding the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, and it is possible to satisfactorily display the front side individual image in a state in which the back side individual image is reflected. Become.

Feature H7. The display storage means stores in advance transparency value adjustment data (partial addition data PD19) in which a transparency value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the front side individual image,
The reflection reducing unit is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the near side individual image and the unit image data on which the arithmetic processing is performed in the image data of the back side individual image. The gaming machine according to feature H5 or H6, wherein each of the transparent values described above is applied.

  According to the feature H7, when the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image is reduced, the transparency value adjustment data may be read from the display storage unit and applied to the image data of the back side individual image. In addition, the complexity of the process for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

Feature H8. A coordinate specifying unit (a function of executing a calculation process for a second effect effect in the display CPU 72) for specifying coordinates when setting the image data in the setting storage unit;
The reflection reducing unit is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the near side individual image and the unit image data on which the arithmetic processing is performed in the image data of the back side individual image. The feature according to Feature H7, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is set for the coordinates specified by the coordinate specifying unit in the near-side individual image so that the respective transparent values are applied. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H8, when the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image is reduced, the transparency value adjustment data is read from the display storage unit, and the transparency value adjustment data is further replaced with the image data of the front side individual image. May be set to the same coordinates as the coordinates for which is set, so that the processing for reducing the ratio is not complicated.

  Feature H9. The front-side individual image is associated with numerical information defining color information as image data, and has an effect image (effect image CH2) having a large number of unit image data in which a transparency value applied to the numerical information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

  According to the feature H9, an effect image can be displayed favorably.

Feature H10. The effect image is used to generate a visual effect on a predetermined base image (character CH1),
The game according to Feature H9, wherein the display storage unit separately stores image data of the base image (sprite data PD16) and image data of the effect image (effect data PD17). Machine.

  According to the feature H10, when displaying the base image, it is possible to display the base image alone and also to display the base image with the effect image applied thereto.

Feature H11. The unit image data is associated with numerical information that defines color information and is configured to be able to set a transparent value applied to the numerical information,
The image data setting unit may be configured such that, when the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency corresponding to information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the near-side individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. When the value is not set, the unit image data of the front side individual image is set in a state where the unit image data of the back side individual image is not reflected in the unit setting area of the setting destination,
The overlap reflecting means is a case where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, and the transparent value corresponding to information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. Is set, the unit image data of the rear individual image is added to the unit image data of the front individual image in a state where the transparent value is applied to the numerical information for the unit setting area of the setting destination. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to H10, wherein data in a state in which is reflected is set.

  According to the feature H11, it can be determined whether or not to reflect the image data of the rear-side individual image based on the setting status of the transparency value for the unit image data of the front-side individual image. The complication of the configuration is suppressed.

  The invention of the feature H group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, as one type of display effect, a smoke screen may be displayed to indicate a state in which an explosion has occurred. Also, a cloud may be displayed to indicate that the weather is cloudy, or rain may be displayed to indicate that the weather is rainy. These individual images are auxiliary displayed in front of the background or the character. In this case, if the individual image is displayed irrespective of the background and the color tone of the character, the player will feel uncomfortable, which is not preferable.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features H1 to H11, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 E8, F1 to F15, G1 to G9, I1 to I10, J1 to J13, K1 to K9, and L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic I group>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) in which image data is stored in advance in correspondence with individual images individually displayed on the display screen;
Setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) in which drawing data is set using the image data;
A deriving unit (a function of executing a task process in the display CPU 72) for deriving parameter information including coordinate information of a setting destination of the image data in the setting storage unit;
The drawing data is created by setting the image data in the setting storage unit in accordance with the parameter information derived by the deriving unit, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display unit. Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The deriving means includes:
If there is image data for which the derivation of the parameter information should be newly started, a deriving means for start (depending on the display CPU 72) for executing derivation starting processing for newly starting derivation of the parameter information for the image data A function of executing the processing of steps S2312 to S2314);
Update deriving means for executing update processing for updating the parameter information in accordance with the change in the display content of the image data for which derivation start processing has already been completed (steps S2315 to S2317 in the display CPU 72). Function to perform processing),
Corresponds to an individual image that is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start processing is executed, but may be included in the display target on the display screen in a subsequent frame A preliminary deriving unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2307 to S2311 in the display CPU 72) for executing the derivation start process on the image data obtained,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature I1, drawing data is created by setting image data in the setting storage means in accordance with the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and an image signal is output to the display means according to the drawing data. Thus, an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen.

  In the above configuration, in the deriving unit, when there is image data for which derivation of parameter information should be newly started, derivation of parameter information is started by executing a derivation start process on the image data, and thereafter, At the image update timing, the parameter information whose derivation has been started may be updated. Accordingly, when a predetermined individual image is displayed over a display period of a plurality of frames, the process of newly setting parameter information does not need to be repeatedly performed on the image data of the individual image. It is sufficient to repeatedly update the parameter information that has been set.

  In addition, individual frames that are not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start processing is executed, but are likely to be included in the display target on the display screen in subsequent frames are supported. Derivation start processing may be performed on image data. This makes it possible to complete the derivation start processing in advance for individual images outside the display screen. For example, when there are a large number of individual images to be displayed on the display screen, the The execution timing of the derivation start process can be dispersed so that the derivation start process is not performed simultaneously on the image data.

  As described above, the processing load for displaying an image can be reduced.

  Feature I2. The deriving means for advance corresponds to an individual image which is included in a display target on the display screen in a frame corresponding to a timing at which the deriving start processing is executed, but has not yet been completed. Priority means (display CPU 72) within the display range for executing the derivation start process in preference to the individual image that is not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame. The gaming machine according to feature I1, further comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2309 to S2310 in (1).

  According to the feature I2, in a configuration including the above feature I1 and capable of executing the derivation start process in advance on the image data of the individual image outside the display screen, the display object on the display screen is more than the image data. , The derivation start process is executed with priority over image data corresponding to an individual image that has not been completed yet. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution timings of the derivation start processing are dispersed as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the individual image that should be displayed is not displayed.

  Feature I3. The preliminary derivation unit is not included in the display target on the display screen in a frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start processing, but is included in the display target on the display screen in a subsequent frame. In the case where the derivation start process is performed on image data corresponding to a possible individual image, the derivation start is performed with priority given to the image data of the individual image whose timing to be displayed on the display screen is earlier. The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or I2, further comprising a priority unit (a function of executing the process of Step S2311 in the display CPU 72) outside the display range so that the use process is executed.

  According to the feature I3, when there are a plurality of individual images that are outside the display screen but may be included in the display target in a subsequent frame, the timing of the display target on the display screen is earlier. Since the derivation start process is executed with priority over the image data of the individual image, the processing load can be satisfactorily dispersed.

Feature I4. The deriving unit outputs, to the display control unit, drawing instruction information (drawing list) including information designating image data of an individual image included in an image for one frame and parameter information derived for the image data. An instruction unit (a function of executing the process of step S408 in the display CPU 72);
The display control means is configured to set image data in the setting storage means in accordance with information specified by the drawing instruction information, and to generate drawing data for a frame corresponding to the drawing instruction information. ,
Further, when the drawing instruction means outputs the drawing instruction information corresponding to an image for one frame, the drawing instruction unit outputs the image data of the individual image not included in the display target on the display screen in the frame. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the drawing instruction information is output so as not to include information corresponding to the image data even when the processing is completed.

  According to the feature I4, even if the derivation unit starts derivation of the parameter information in advance, only the image data of the individual image in the display screen is provided in the drawing instruction information output to the display control unit. However, information corresponding to the image data of the individual image outside the display screen is not provided. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of drawing instruction information output to the display control means. Further, the display control means does not need to determine whether or not the specified individual image is within the display screen, and even if the determination is not performed, the display control for the individual image outside the display screen is useless. You do not need to do this.

Feature I5. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed at a predetermined position in the range of the rear image in front of the rear image, and the rear image corresponds to one frame. Includes a wide-range rear image set wider than the display range,
A display changing unit (a function of executing the process of step S2304 in the display CPU 72) for changing a display range of the one frame in the wide-range rear image to a position different from a display range in a previous frame is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the feature I5, the display range for one frame is sometimes changed, so that the uniformity of the display effect is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the configuration of the feature I1 is provided, and the derivation start process is executed in advance also for the individual image outside the display screen. Therefore, even if the display range of one frame is switched, Thus, the parameter information of each individual image can be satisfactorily derived.

Feature I6. An operation receiving means (operation device for effect 48) for receiving an operation by the player;
The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the display change unit changes the display range for the one frame based on the operation being received by the operation reception unit.

  According to the feature I6, since the display range of one frame may be changed based on an operation performed by the player on the operation receiving unit, uniform display effects are suppressed, and the degree of attention to the image is increased. Becomes possible. However, in a configuration in which the display range for one frame is changed based on the operation on the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to predict the timing at which the change occurs. In this case, the configuration of the feature I1 is provided, and the derivation start process is executed in advance also for the individual image outside the display screen. Therefore, even if the display range of one frame is switched, Thus, the parameter information of each individual image can be satisfactorily derived.

  Feature I7. The preliminary derivation unit is not included in the display target on the display screen in a frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start processing, but is included in the display target on the display screen in a subsequent frame. The gaming machine according to Feature I5 or I6, wherein the determination as to whether or not there is a possibility of an individual image is made based on the display range of the one frame at that time.

  According to the feature I7, the individual image to be the start of the derivation of the parameter information is grasped based on the set display range. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the display range for one frame is switched, the execution timing of the derivation start process is dispersed according to the currently set display range, and the dispersion can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature I8. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the back image,
Further, operation accepting means (operation effecting device 48) for accepting an operation by the player,
A display change unit (a function of executing the process of step S2304 in the display CPU 72) for changing the content of the rear image based on the reception of the operation by the operation reception unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, comprising:

  According to the feature I8, since the content of the back image may be changed based on the operation of the operation reception unit by the player, the uniformity of the display effect can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. Becomes However, in a configuration in which the content of the rear image is changed based on the operation on the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to predict the timing at which the change occurs. In this case, since the configuration of the feature I1 is provided and the derivation start process is executed in advance also on the individual image outside the display screen, even if the content of the back image is switched, It is possible to satisfactorily derive parameter information of an individual image.

  Feature I9. The preliminary derivation unit is not included in the display target on the display screen in a frame corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start processing, but is included in the display target on the display screen in a subsequent frame. The gaming machine according to Feature I8, wherein the determination as to whether or not there is a possible individual image is performed based on the content of the back image at that time.

  According to the feature I9, an individual image as a start target of derivation of parameter information is grasped based on the content of the set rear image. Thus, in the configuration in which the contents of the back image are switched, the execution timing of the derivation start process is dispersed according to the contents of the currently set back image, and the dispersion can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature I10. A deriving storage means (work RAM 73) used when the deriving means derives the parameter information;
The deriving means for starting, as the deriving start processing, when there is image data for which derivation of the parameter information is to be newly started, the deriving used for deriving the parameter information of the image data. In this configuration, at least a search process (step S2312 in the display CPU 72) for searching for an area in the storage unit and an area initialization process (step S2313 in the display CPU 72) for initializing an area secured based on the search result are performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9.

  According to the feature I10, in the process for starting derivation, in addition to the process of setting parameter information, the process of searching for an area used to derive parameter information, and the initialization of the area secured based on the search result The processing load increases as compared with the update processing. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature I1 is provided and the execution timing of the derivation start process can be dispersed, the processing load can be dispersed.

  The invention of the feature I group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, the update of the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be performed at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created in time for the update cycle, and the update to the display device is performed. Signal output needs to be performed. In addition, when creating the drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and the size is performed for each of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen, and the drawing data is created based on the calculation result.

  In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be processed simultaneously increases. Then, when the processing load locally increases, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the feature E1 To E8, F1 to F15, G1 to G9, H1 to H11, J1 to J13, K1 to K9, and L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally;
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
A drawing data creating unit (a function of executing the process of step S2205 in the VDP 76) for creating drawing data in the setting storage unit using the image data;
Image signal output means (display circuit 94) for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A data adjustment unit (scaler) that adjusts the data size of the drawing data created in the setting storage unit to create adjusted data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the adjusted data from the image signal output unit. 97)
A change effect execution unit (a setting process for a zoom-in effect in the VDP 76) that performs a size change effect that is at least one of enlargement and reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit. Function to execute)
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the effect of changing the data size of the drawing data and changing the adjustment magnification when creating the adjusted data is changed, thereby effecting the size change of the individual image displayed on the display screen. This makes it possible to perform a size change effect while reducing the processing load, as compared with a configuration in which the magnification is individually adjusted for each of the image data set in the setting storage unit. As described above, it is possible to perform the size change effect satisfactorily.

  Feature J2. The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the drawing data creating unit creates the drawing data with the same size regardless of the adjustment magnification when creating the drawing data in the setting storage unit.

  According to the feature J2, since the drawing data creation means only needs to create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect, and while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data, A resizing effect can be performed.

Feature J3. An initial adjustment magnification is set as the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means,
The data adjustment unit is configured to adjust the image after the adjustment so that an image corresponding to the entire data of the drawing data is displayed in a state adjusted to the resolution of the display screen in a situation where the initial adjustment magnification is set. The gaming machine according to Feature J1 or J2, wherein data is created.

  According to the feature J3, the excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like can be obtained by using the configuration in which the resolution adjustment corresponding to the display screen is performed on the created drawing data.

  Feature J4. The change effect execution means changes the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means to an enlargement magnification larger than the initial adjustment magnification, thereby performing the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to Feature J3, further comprising an enlargement execution unit (a function of executing the process of Step S4401 in the VDP 76).

  According to the feature J4, a size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image is performed based on the initial adjustment magnification. Thus, the drawing data creating means may create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform a size change effect while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data.

  Feature J5. The change effect execution means is smaller than the enlargement magnification within the range of the enlargement magnification from the initial adjustment magnification in a situation where the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement is being performed by the enlargement execution means. A reduction execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S4401 in the VDP 76) for performing the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing the magnification. The gaming machine according to Feature J4.

  According to the feature J5, after the adjustment magnification is set to the predetermined enlargement magnification, by returning it to the initial adjustment magnification side, a size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image is performed. Thus, the drawing data creating means may create drawing data of a fixed size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform a size change effect while suppressing the complexity of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data.

Feature J6. A power supply unit (power supply and launch control device 57) connected to an external power supply and supplying necessary operating power in the gaming machine;
An initial setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S305 in the display CPU 72) for setting the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit to the initial adjustment magnification based on the start of the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, comprising:

  According to the feature J6, in a configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment unit, for example, when the power ON operation of the gaming machine is performed and the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit is started. , The adjustment magnification is set to the initial adjustment magnification. As a result, the initial adjustment magnification can be set satisfactorily.

  Feature J7. When the adjustment magnification of the data adjustment means is changed from the initial adjustment magnification in order to perform the size change effect, magnification return means (an enlargement flag in the VDP 76) for returning to the initial adjustment magnification after the end of the size change effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to display an image according to the resolution of the display screen after the end of the size change effect.

  Feature J8. The data adjustment unit creates the adjusted data based on performing a linear interpolation process (the processes of steps S4502 and S4506 in the display circuit 94) on the drawing data. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

  According to the feature J8, the excellent effects as described in the above feature J1 and the like can be obtained by using the linear interpolation processing.

  Feature J9. The change effect execution means is configured to perform a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image for one frame when the size change effect is performed, such that the specific individual image is entirely included in the display screen. (A function of executing the processing of steps S4308 to S4312 in the display CPU 72) for adjusting the parameter information when the image data of the individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein:

  In a configuration that performs a size change effect by changing the magnification of drawing data, it is assumed that the size of the specific individual image that you want to display as a whole will be changed and some will be placed outside the display screen Is done. On the other hand, according to the feature J9, the parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit is adjusted so that the specific individual image is entirely included in the display screen. Is done. Thus, the specific individual image as a whole can be displayed on the display screen while achieving the effects described in the above-described feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J10. The change effect execution means may include a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image for one frame when the size change effect is performed, for one frame when the size change effect is not performed. Individual parameter information for adjusting the parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data creating unit so as to be the same as at least one of the size and position displayed in the image. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, further comprising an adjusting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S4308 to S4312 in the display CPU 72).

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size is changed up to a specific individual image for which at least one of the size and the position is not desired to be changed, and the elements not desired to be changed are changed. It is assumed that On the other hand, according to the feature J10, the image data of the specific individual image is stored for setting so that at least one of the size and the position of the specific individual image is the same as when the size change effect is not performed. The parameter information when set in the means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the elements that the user does not want to change with respect to the specific individual image while achieving the effects described in the above-described feature J1 and the like.

  Feature J11. The rendition effect executing means is configured to output a specific individual image of a plurality of individual images included in one frame image when the resize effect is performed, for one frame immediately before the start of the resize effect. An individual adjusts the size and coordinate information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data creating unit so as to be the same as the size and position displayed in the image. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, further comprising an adjusting unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S4308 to S4312 in the display CPU 72).

  In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size and the position of the specific individual image whose size and position are the same as the image of one frame immediately before the size change effect is started are determined. Is expected to be changed. On the other hand, according to the feature J11, the image data of the specific individual image is set so that the size and position of the specific individual image are the same as those of the image of one frame immediately before the start of the size change effect. The size and coordinate information set in the setting storage unit is adjusted. Thus, the display mode of the specific individual image can be maintained while achieving the effects described in the above-described feature J1 and the like.

Feature J12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which the individual image for fluctuation is variably displayed in front of the rear image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J9 to J11, wherein the specific individual image is the individual image for fluctuation.

  According to the feature J12, it is possible to suppress a change in the visibility of the individual image for change due to the size change effect.

Feature J13. As a display effect, a reach effect that displays an image for reach in a state where the individual image for reach is displayed in a standby state is included,
The gaming machine according to Feature J12, wherein the specific individual image is an individual image for the reach displayed in the standby mode.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach individual image from fluctuating due to the size change effect.

  The invention of the feature J group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, it is considered that by performing a display effect of enlarging or reducing an image for one frame, it is possible to diversify the display effect. However, it is not preferable that the processing load is increased to perform the display effect and the processing is omitted. On the other hand, in order to perform the display effect, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced. If measures are taken to simplify such display contents, it becomes impossible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the display effect.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 E8, F1 to F15, G1 to G9, H1 to H11, I1 to I10, K1 to K9, and L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores a plurality of types of compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image,
The display control means,
Expanding means (moving image decoder 93) for expanding any one of the moving image data into an area for expansion and creating still image data for a plurality of frames for an image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using still image data for a plurality of frames expanded by the expansion means in the frame order defined in the moving image data, a moving image of an image corresponding to the moving image data is displayed in the display period for the plurality of frames. Moving image display executing means (a function of executing a setting process for a moving image in the VDP 76) for displaying over a range of:
Of the plurality of types of moving image data, a moving image based on the first moving image data (moving image data PD54 before branching) is displayed, and then the second moving image data (moving image data PD55 after branching A). A plurality of moving image effect execution means (a function of executing a moving image calculation process in the display CPU 72) for performing a group of display effects having a display period in which a moving image is displayed by the CPU;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature K1, a group of display effects is performed using at least the first moving image data and the second moving image data instead of using a single moving image data. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to use the first moving image data or the second moving image data in common to perform another display effect, and the moving image data is individually applied to each display effect. Compared with the set configuration, the storage capacity required for storing moving image data can be reduced. Also, for example, at the start of the group of display effects, a process for expanding the first moving image data is executed, and the second moving image is displayed during the period in which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. Processing for expansion can be performed on the data. In this case, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is reduced as compared with a configuration in which the development for both moving image data is performed collectively.

  As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily perform the display effect using the moving image data.

  Feature K2. The display control unit includes a unit configured to perform a group of display effects using one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data, wherein the display control unit includes: Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is commonly used for performing another display effect. Thereby, the storage capacity required for storing moving image data can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which moving image data is individually set for each display effect.

  Feature K3. The moving image based on the first moving image data corresponds to a series of display effects, and the moving image based on the second moving image data is a continuous display effect with respect to the series of display effects based on the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein

  According to the feature K3, since the first moving image data alone corresponds to a series of display effects, a display effect using only the first moving image data can be performed. In this case, by separately preparing the first moving image data and the second moving image data, a single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the second moving image data are put together is prepared in advance. It is possible to perform a plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required for storing moving image data as compared to a configuration in which the first moving image data is prepared and separately prepared in advance. Become.

  Feature K4. In the case where the group of display effects is performed by the plurality of moving image effect execution units, the expanding unit performs an expanding process on the second moving image data during a period in which moving image display using the first moving image data is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature K4, the expansion process is performed on the second moving image data using the period during which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. Thereby, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the unfolding process is performed on both the moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

Feature K5. The plurality of moving image effect execution means,
First moving image effect execution means (a function of executing processing of steps S4613 to S4615 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data;
Second moving image effect execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4617 to S4619 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the second moving image data after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed;
Third moving image effect execution means (steps S4620 to S4 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the third moving image data (moving image data PD56 for post-branch B) after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed. A function of executing the processing of S4622);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, comprising:

  According to the feature K5, the first moving image data can be commonly used in each of the display effect using the second moving image data and the display effect using the third moving image data. Thereby, a single piece of moving image data combining the first moving image data and the second moving image data, and a single moving image data combining the first moving image data and the third moving image data. As compared with a configuration in which a plurality of display effects are individually prepared, it is possible to perform the plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required for storing moving image data.

Feature K6. An operation receiving means (operation device for effect 48) for receiving an operation by the player;
The plurality of moving image effect execution means is based on the operation being received by the operation receiving means in a period during which a moving image is displayed by the first moving image data or at a timing after the moving image display is completed. And an effect distribution means (a function of executing the process of step S4608 in the display CPU 72) for setting a subsequent effect execution target to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means. The gaming machine according to Feature K5.

  In a configuration in which the previously executed moving image display is branched to a predetermined moving image display or a different moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player, the operation itself is arbitrary, so One moving image data cannot be used. On the other hand, according to the feature K6, the first moving image data is prepared for the moving image display executed first, and the second moving image data and the third moving image data are displayed for the moving image display executed after branching. Of moving image data is prepared. Thus, it is possible to provide an effect in which the content of the moving image display of the development destination is changed during the moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player.

  Feature K7. The developing means may be configured such that, when a moving image based on the second moving image data or a moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, the first moving image The method according to Feature K6, wherein, prior to the start timing of the moving image display by the data, the expansion processing is performed only on the first moving image data among the first to third moving image data. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K7, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is reduced as compared with the configuration in which, when the group of display effects is started, the unfolding process is performed on the pieces of moving image data collectively.

  Feature K8. The effect allocating means may be configured to determine that the moving image display is being performed by the first moving image data at a timing for determination that is earlier than the end timing by a number of frames for determination, and the operation receiving unit performs the determination. When it is specified that the operation has been accepted, the effect execution target after the moving image display by the first moving image data is set to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means. The gaming machine according to feature K6 or K7, wherein:

  According to the feature K8, since the determination of the distribution destination moving image data is performed before the timing at which the moving image display based on the first moving image data ends, the moving image display based on the first moving image data is performed. In a certain period, a period for performing the expansion process on the moving image data of the distribution destination is secured. Accordingly, the start of a new moving image display after the moving image display based on the first moving image data is completed is smoothly performed.

  Feature K9. When the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed and then the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed, the expanding unit may determine the timing based on the determination timing. The gaming machine according to Feature K8, wherein during the period up to the end timing of the moving image display based on the first moving image data, the effect distributing means executes the expanding process on the moving image data of the distribution destination.

  According to the feature K9, the expansion processing is executed only for the destination moving image data of the second moving image data and the third moving image data. As a result, the processing load of the expansion processing can be reduced, and the storage capacity required in the expansion area can be reduced.

  The invention of the feature K group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory.

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  A configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. Since moving image data has a larger data capacity than still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in a memory for image data. Therefore, when using the moving image data, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area using a decoder to form a plurality of still image data. They must be used in a fixed order.

  Here, since the moving image data compressed as described above needs to be decoded and used, there is a restriction on its use, and accordingly, there is a restriction on diversifying display effects using moving image display. Also occurs. On the other hand, a configuration in which the image data is stored as a group of still image data without compression may be considered.

  Further, for any one of the above features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 E8, F1 to F15, G1 to G9, H1 to H11, I1 to I10, J1 to J13, and any of the following features L1 to L13. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen and updating the image when the update timing comes;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
In addition to deriving period elapse correspondence information (data corresponding to the area of PL21 in still image data, integrated parameters) corresponding to each of the plurality of continuous update timings, at least a part of the period elapse correspondence information is derived. As for the period elapse correspondence information (P picture data and B picture data), the corresponding information deriving means (moving image) is derived based on the period elapse correspondence information (I picture data and P picture data) derived earlier than the period elapse correspondence information. A function of executing a decoding process in the decoder 93);
A specific display control means for displaying an image corresponding to each of the period lapse correspondence information by using the period lapse correspondence information corresponding to an elapsed period from a specific start timing (a start timing of a panorama display effect);
With
The specific display control means establishes the specific condition from the specific start timing based on a specific condition (operation on the operation device for performance 48) established after the specific start timing. By using the period lapse correspondence information corresponding to the lapsed period up to, the effect content is switched to a second display effect in which at least a part of the effect progress content is different from the first display effect up to that time ( A function of executing a calculation process for a panorama display effect in the display CPU 131, and a function of executing a moving image texture mapping process in the VDP 135).
The correspondence information deriving means may be configured to derive the period-elapse correspondence information corresponding to the timing when the specific condition is satisfied even in a situation where the second display effect is not executed. (A function of executing a decoding process in the video decoder 93).

  According to the feature L1, when a specific condition is satisfied after the specific start timing, the time lapse correspondence information corresponding to the elapsed period from the specific start timing to the specific condition being satisfied is used. 2 display effects can be performed. Therefore, compared with the case where display is started from an image corresponding to the timing at a specific start timing, it is possible to display a variety of images at a timing at which a specific condition is satisfied, and the player to the display effect is displayed. Attention can be increased.

  In addition, even when the second display effect is not executed, when a specific condition is satisfied, the derivation of the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to the timing is completed. Therefore, when the image is displayed by the specific display control unit, the time lapse correspondence information corresponding to each update timing after the timing at which the specific condition is satisfied is derived as compared with the case where the information is derived after the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the inconvenience that no long-term elapsed correspondence information is derived is generated. In particular, in the case where the time lapse correspondence information is derived based on the time lapse correspondence information at the previous timing, the inconvenience can be effectively reduced.

  Feature L2. The temporal change of the image in the second display effect, which is displayed using the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to each update timing after the timing at which the specific condition is satisfied, is the image in the first display effect. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that the gaming machine is connected to a change over time.

  According to the feature L2, it is possible to cause a connection between the content of the image displayed in the first display effect and the content of the image in the second display effect displayed after a specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to display an image that does not easily cause a sense of discomfort before and after the specific condition is satisfied, while performing various displays due to the specific condition being satisfied.

Feature L3. An operation receiving means (operation device for effect 48) for receiving an operation by the player;
After the specific start timing, it is recognized that the specific condition is satisfied based on the operation being received by the operation receiving unit, and the respective update timings after the timing at which the operation is received. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein an image is displayed using the corresponding period elapse correspondence information.

  According to the feature L3, by receiving the operation of the player, the display can be started from the image corresponding to the progress from the specific start timing to the operation of the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the display effect of the player and to diversify the game.

Feature L4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G);
Display storage means (memory module 74) which stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means and updating the image when the update timing comes;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores, as the image data, compressed moving image data used for reproducing a moving image,
The display control means,
Still image data corresponding to each of the plurality of continuous update timings is derived, and at least some of the still image data (P picture data and B picture data) among the still image data is derived from the still image data. A decompression unit (a function of executing a decoding process in the video decoder 93) which is created by decompressing in the decompression area (decompression buffer 141) based on the previously derived still image data;
By using a part or all of the still image data (data corresponding to the area PL21 in the still image data) corresponding to the elapsed time from a specific start timing (start timing of the panorama display effect), each of the still images is used. Specific display control means for displaying an image corresponding to part or all of the data,
With
The specific display control means establishes the specific condition from the specific start timing based on a specific condition (operation on the operation device for performance 48) established after the specific start timing. By using a part or all of the still image data corresponding to the elapsed time until the second display effect, at least a part of the progress of the effect is different from the first display effect until then. (The function of executing the arithmetic processing for the panorama display effect in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the moving image texture mapping processing in the VDP 135).
The developing means causes the creation of the still image data corresponding to the timing to be completed when the specific condition is satisfied even in a situation where the second display effect is not being executed. (A function of executing a decoding process in the video decoder 93).

  According to the feature L4, when a specific condition is satisfied after the specific start timing, a part or all of the still image data corresponding to an elapsed period from the specific start timing to the specific condition being satisfied is used. By doing so, the second display effect can be performed. Therefore, compared with the case where display is started from an image corresponding to the timing at a specific start timing, it is possible to display a variety of images at a timing at which a specific condition is satisfied, and the player to the display effect is displayed. Attention can be increased.

  In addition, even when the second display effect is not executed, when a specific condition is satisfied, the creation of the still image data corresponding to the timing is completed. Therefore, compared to the case where still image data corresponding to each update timing after the timing when the specific condition is satisfied is created after the specific condition is satisfied, the image display is more appropriate when the specific display control unit displays the image. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the inconvenience that the still image data is not created is generated.

  Here, in general, a part of the compressed moving image data is difference data from the still image data at the previous update timing, and thus a part of the still image data is the still image data at the previous update timing. If it is not possible to create still image data at a timing when a specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined time may be required. In this regard, the configuration of this feature creates still image data corresponding to each update timing before each update timing regardless of whether a specific condition is satisfied.

  With this, when a specific condition is satisfied, the still image data corresponding to the current update timing already created in the expansion area can be used, so that the time from the specific start timing until the specific condition is satisfied can be used. It is possible to smoothly display a moving image having appropriate contents according to the elapse of the update timing.

  Feature L5. The temporal change of the image in the second display effect to be displayed using the still image data corresponding to each update timing after the timing at which the specific condition is satisfied is the temporal change of the image in the first display effect. The gaming machine according to feature L4, wherein the gaming machine has a connection with a dynamic change.

  According to the feature L5, it is possible to cause a connection between the content of the image displayed in the first display effect and the content of the image in the second display effect displayed after a specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to display an image that does not easily cause a sense of discomfort before and after the specific condition is satisfied, while performing various displays due to the specific condition being satisfied.

Feature L6. The first display effect is to display an image using a portion corresponding to a first area of the still image data (data corresponding to the area PL21 in the still image data before the viewpoint PC31 is changed),
The second display effect corresponds to a second region different from the first region of the still image data corresponding to an update timing after the still image data used in the first display effect. The gaming machine described in the feature L4 or L5, wherein an image is displayed using a portion (data corresponding to the area PL21 in the still image data after the viewpoint PC31 is changed).

  According to the feature L6, when a specific condition is satisfied in a state where an image is displayed using a portion corresponding to the first area of the still image data in the first display effect, the first display effect An image is displayed using a portion corresponding to the second area of the still image data corresponding to the update timing after the still image data to be used. These still image data are created by developing the same moving image data. That is, different portions of the same moving image can be displayed between the first display effect and the second display effect, and a display having a connection with the content can be performed. Thereby, various display effects can be performed.

  Feature L7. The gaming machine according to Feature L6, wherein the first area and the second area have the same size.

  According to the feature L7, since the size of the still image data to be partially used is the same before and after the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress a difference in the drawing processing configuration before and after the specific condition is satisfied. Complicating the processing configuration can be suppressed.

Feature L8. Placement means for placing image data of an object in a virtual three-dimensional space; viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space; texture pasting means for pasting a texture to the image data of the object; Projection means for projecting the image data of the object on a projection plane set based on the projection plane, and drawing setting means for generating generation data based on the data projected on the projection plane, storing the generated data generated by the drawing means. Storage means for performing
Display control means for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The texture pasting means,
The period elapse correspondence information (data corresponding to the area of the PL 21 in the still image data, the parameter to be integrated) corresponding to each of the plurality of continuous update timings is derived, and at least part of the period elapse correspondence information among the period elapse correspondence information is obtained. As for the correspondence information (P picture data, B picture data), the correspondence information deriving means (moving picture decoder 93) which derives based on the period elapse correspondence information (I picture data, P picture data) derived earlier than the period elapse correspondence information. Function to execute the decoding process in
By using the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to the elapsed period from a specific start timing, special texture pasting means for pasting a texture corresponding to the period elapse correspondence information,
With
The special texture pasting unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied from the specific start timing based on a specific condition (operation on the operation device for performance 48) being satisfied after the specific start timing. By pasting the texture using the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to the elapse period up to the second display effect, at least a part of the progress of the effect is different from the first display effect up to that time (The function of executing the arithmetic processing for the panorama display effect in the display CPU 131 and the function of executing the moving image texture mapping processing in the VDP 135).
The correspondence information deriving means may be configured to derive the period-elapse correspondence information corresponding to the timing when the specific condition is satisfied even in a situation where the second display effect is not executed. (A function of executing a decoding process in the video decoder 93).

  According to the feature L8, when the specific condition is satisfied after the specific start timing, the texture using the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to the elapsed period from the specific start timing to the specific condition being satisfied is pasted. By doing so, a second display effect can be performed. Therefore, compared with the case where display is started from an image corresponding to the timing at a specific start timing, it is possible to display a variety of images at a timing at which a specific condition is satisfied, and the player to the display effect is displayed. Attention can be increased.

  In addition, even when the second display effect is not executed, when a specific condition is satisfied, the derivation of the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to the timing is completed. Therefore, when the texture is pasted by the special texture pasting means, the time lapse correspondence information corresponding to each update timing after the timing when the specific condition is satisfied is derived after the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to reduce the inconvenience that no long-term lapse correspondence information is derived. In particular, in the case where the time lapse correspondence information is derived based on the time lapse correspondence information at the previous timing, the inconvenience can be effectively reduced.

  Feature L9. The temporal change of the texture in the second display effect using the period elapse correspondence information corresponding to each update timing after the timing at which the specific condition is satisfied is the change of the texture in the first display effect. The gaming machine according to Feature L8, wherein the gaming machine is connected to a change over time.

  According to the feature L9, it is possible to generate a connection between the content of the texture to be pasted in the first display effect and the content of the texture in the second display effect to be pasted after a specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to display an image that does not easily cause a sense of discomfort before and after the specific condition is satisfied, while performing various displays due to the specific condition being satisfied.

  Feature L10. The period elapse correspondence information is one type of still image data created corresponding to each update timing after the specific start timing by expanding the moving image data in the expansion area (expansion buffer 141). The gaming machine according to feature L8 or L9, wherein the gaming machine is part or all.

  According to the feature L10, if a specific condition is satisfied after a specific start timing, a texture using a moving image according to progress from the specific start timing to the specific condition being satisfied is pasted. Can be attached. Therefore, compared to the case where a moving image is pasted as a texture from the beginning of a specific start timing, it is possible to display a variety of images according to timing when a specific condition is satisfied, and the player's attention to the display effect can be increased. Can be enhanced.

Feature L11. The first display effect is to paste the texture using a portion corresponding to a first region of the still image data (data corresponding to the region PL21 in the still image data before the viewpoint PC31 is changed). ,
The second display effect corresponds to a second region different from the first region of the still image data corresponding to an update timing after the still image data used in the first display effect. The gaming machine according to Feature L10, wherein the texture is pasted using a portion (data corresponding to the area PL21 in the still image data after the viewpoint PC31 is changed).

  According to the feature L11, when a specific condition is satisfied in a state where a texture is pasted using a portion corresponding to the first area of the still image data in the first display effect, the first display effect The texture is pasted using a portion corresponding to the second area of the still image data corresponding to the update timing after the still image data to be used. These still image data are created by developing the same moving image data. In other words, different portions of the same moving image can be pasted as textures between the first display effect and the second display effect, and a display with a connection to the content can be performed. Thereby, various display effects can be performed.

  Feature L12. The features L8 to L11 characterized in that the special texture pasting means pastes the texture only in a region of image data of the object projected on the projection plane (a function of executing a moving image texture mapping process in the VDP 135). A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature L12, the texture is not set in the entire area of the image data of the object to which the texture is to be pasted, but is set only in the area of the image data of the object projected on the projection plane. Can be suppressed from becoming complicated in the processing configuration for pasting.

  Feature L13. The game according to Feature L12, wherein the distance between the image data of the object to which the texture is pasted in the virtual three-dimensional space and the viewpoint is constant even if the position or orientation of the viewpoint is changed. Machine.

  According to the feature L13, the distance between the image data of the object to which the texture is pasted and the viewpoint does not change depending on the position or the direction of the viewpoint, so the size of the texture pasted before and after the change of the viewpoint position or the direction is It is constant. This makes it possible to suppress the processing configuration for pasting the texture from becoming complicated.

  The invention of the feature L group is effective for the following problems.

  As one type of gaming machines, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known. These gaming machines include a control board on which a CPU is mounted and on which elements such as a memory in which a control program relating to the game is stored are mounted, and a series of games is controlled by the control board. Note that a configuration is also known in which a CPU and a memory are not individually mounted on a control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

  As the gaming machine, there is known a game machine equipped with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on a display screen using the image data read from the memory ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

  The case where an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Have been. By reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon, which is three-dimensional image data, is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture, which is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns, is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting the polygon on which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, a three-dimensional image is displayed.

  Here, a display effect of a series of display contents is performed by deriving a series of image data corresponding to the continuous update timing and displaying an image using the image data according to the continuous update timing. I have. By starting the display in the middle of this series of display contents, that is, by starting the display from the image using the image data corresponding to the update timing in the middle of the update timing, the display effects are diversified, It is considered that the degree of attention can be increased.

  However, even if the display is started in the middle of a series of display contents, if it is necessary to derive the image data corresponding to the previous timing in order to derive the image data corresponding to the update timing of the start, There is a possibility that the data cannot be derived at an appropriate timing and the display effect cannot be satisfactorily performed.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features L1 to L13, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C'1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 E8, F1 to F15, G1 to G9, H1 to H11, I1 to I10, J1 to J13, and K1 to K9. You may. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied will be described below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: provided with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means A game machine for stopping variable display of the plurality of pictures and giving a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Production operation device as operation receiving means, 50 ... Main control device as upstream control means, 53 ... ROM, 70 ... Display control device, 72 ... Display CPU 73, Work RAM, 74, Memory module, 76, VDP, 81c, Synthetic data area as grouping storage area, 82a, 82b, Frame area as setting storage means, 93 ... Moving picture decoder as expansion means 94, a display circuit, 97, a scaler as data adjustment means, 101, a controller, 102, a NAND flash memory, 111, an I / F, 113, a controller CPU as management means, 114, a control as management information storage means. ROM 117, cache memory as storage means, 119 memory for boot, 13 ... Display CPU, 132 ... Work RAM, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142a, 142b ... Frame area as setting storage means, 143 ... Z buffer as comparison storage means, 145 ... Grouping storage area Mode buffer, 155 display circuit, 161 controller, 162 NAND flash memory, 171 I / F, 173 controller CPU as management means, 174 control ROM as management information storage means, 177 ... Cache memory as storage means, 179 boot memory, CH5 smooth movement sprite, G display screen, PA1 overlapping area, PC35, PC36 connected object, PD2 to PD10 divided part data, PD12 to PD15 ... divided data group, PD19 ... Partial addition data as bright value adjustment data, PD22 to PD25: Partial α data, PD26, PD27: Symbol sprite data, PD30 to PD33: Partial α data, PD37, PD38: Partial α data, PD48, PD49 ... Sprite data, PD54 to PD56 ... Moving image data, PL5 ... Partial display area.

Claims (1)

Display means having a display screen in which a number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
By setting the image data in the setting storage unit having a large number of unit setting areas to create drawing data in the setting storage unit, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display unit. Display control means for displaying an image for one frame on the display screen based on the
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that a plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen in the image for one frame;
Regarding the data of the unit setting area where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping portion of the rear individual image is reflected on the image data of the overlapping portion of the front individual image. Duplication reflection means for ensuring that
A gaming machine comprising: